bmw 550 2014 owners manual

273
Owner's Manual for Vehicle The Ultimate Driving Machine THE BMW 5 SERIES SEDAN. OWNER'S MANUAL. Contents A-Z Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Upload: musahamzic

Post on 05-Feb-2016

21 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

DESCRIPTION

bmw 550 2014 owners manual

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Owner's Manualfor Vehicle

The UltimateDriving Machine

THE BMW 5 SERIES SEDAN.OWNER'S MANUAL.

ContentsA-Z

Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 2: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual
Page 3: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

5 Series Owner's Manual for VehicleThank you for choosing a BMW.The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better controlyou will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW.Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐tains important information on vehicle operation that will helpyou make full use of the technical features available in yourBMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute tomaintaining the value of your BMW.Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the printed orIntegrated Owner's Manual are found in the appendix of theprinted Quick Reference for the vehicle.Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐chures in the onboard literature.We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride.BMW AG

The Owner's Manual is available in many countries as an app.For more information, go towww.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide

Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 4: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

© 2014 Bayerische Motoren WerkeAktiengesellschaftMunich, GermanyReprinting, including excerpts, only with the writtenconsent of BMW AG, Munich.US English X/14, 11 14 490Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleachedwithout chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 5: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Addendum

ADDENDUM TO BMW 5 SERIESOWNER’S MANUAL 1402956218

We wanted to provide you with someupdates and clarifications with respect tothe printed BMW Owner’s Manual.These updates and clarifications willsupersede the materials contained inthat document.

1. Where the terms “service center,”“the service center,” “your servicecenter,” “service specialist,’ or“service” are used in the Owner’sManual, we wanted to clarify thatthe terms refer to a BMW dealer’sservice center or another servicecenter or repair shop that employstrained personnel that can performmaintenance and repair work onyour vehicle in accordance withBMW specifications.

2. Where the text of the Owner’sManual contains an affirmativeinstruction to contact a “servicecenter” or “your service center,” wewanted to clarify that BMWrecommends that, if you are facedwith one of the situations addressedby that text, you contact or seek theassistance of a BMW dealer’sservice center or another servicecenter or repair shop that employstrained personnel that can performmaintenance and repair work onyour vehicle in accordance withBMW specifications.

While BMW of North America LLC,at no cost to you, will pay for repairsrequired by the limited warrantiesprovided with respect to your

vehicle and for maintenance underthe Maintenance Program duringthe applicable warranty andmaintenance coverage periods, youare free to elect, both during thoseperiods and thereafter, to havemaintenance and repair workprovided by other service centers orrepair shops.

3. Where the Owner’s Manual makesreference to parts and accessorieshaving been approved by BMW,those references are intended toreflect that those parts andaccessories are recommended byBMW of North America LLC. Youmay elect to use other parts andaccessories, but, if you do, werecommend that you make sure thatany such parts and/or accessoriesare appropriate for use on yourvehicle.

4. At page 7, under the warrantysection’s discussion ofhomologation, where it states thatyou “cannot lodge warranty claimsfor your vehicle there,” the textshould read that you “may not beable to lodge warranty claims foryour vehicle there.”

5. At page 7, under the “Parts andaccessories” section, in the sixthsentence, the word “cannot” shouldread “does not.”

6. At page 58, in the “Check andreplace safety belts” section, the

Page 6: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Addendum

text beginning, “This should only bedone by your service center . . .”should be disregarded and thefollowing text should be read in lieuthereof: “BMW recommends havingthis work performed by a servicecenter as it is important that thissafety feature functions properly.”

7. At page 59, under the heading:“Active head restraint,” theparagraph beginning, “Only attachaccessories . . .” should bedisregarded and the following textshould be read in lieu thereof:“BMW recommends that you attachaccessories approved by BMW tothe seat or head restraint.”

8. At page 102, under the heading:“Special windshield,” the paragraphbeginning, “Therefore, have thespecial windshield . . .” should bedisregarded and the following textshould be read in lieu thereof:“BMW recommends that you havethe special windshield replaced bythe service center.”

9. At page 190 under the heading:“Objects within the range ofmovement of the pedals” and atpage 251 under the heading:“Carpets and floor mats,” theparagraph that begins: “Only usefloor mats . . .” should bedisregarded and the followinglanguage should be read in lieuthereof: “The manufacturer of yourvehicle recommends that you usefloor mats that have been identifiedby it as appropriate for use in yourvehicle and that can be properlyfixed in place.”

10. At page 211, under the heading“Tire inflation pressurespecifications,” the sentencebeginning, “Tire inflation pressurespecifications apply to approved tiresizes . . . .” should be disregarded.

11. At page 223, under the heading:“Mounting,” the paragraphbeginning, “Have mounting andbalancing . . .” should bedisregarded and the following textshould be read in lieu thereof:“BMW recommends that you havemounting and balancing performedby your service center or a tiremounting specialist.”

12. At page 223, under the heading:“Approved wheels and tires,” theterm “Approved” should bedisregarded and in lieu thereof, theterm “Recommended” should beread in its place. In addition, thetext of that section should bedisregarded and the following textshould be read in lieu thereof:

The manufacturer of your vehiclestrongly suggests that you usewheels and tires that have beenrecommended by the vehiclemanufacturer for your vehicle type;otherwise, for example, despitehaving the same official size ratings,variations can lead to body contactand with it, the risk of severeaccidents.

The manufacturer of your vehicledoes not evaluate non-recommended wheels and tires todetermine if they are suitable foruse on your vehicle.

Page 7: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Addendum

13. At page 224 and page 225, underthe heading: “Fine-link snowchains,” the text should bedisregarded and the following textshould be read in lieu thereof:

Only certain types of fine-link snowchains have been tested by themanufacturer of your vehicle andare determined by the manufacturerof your vehicle to be road safe andare recommended by themanufacturer of your vehicle.

Information about recommendedsnow chains is available from aservice center.

14. At page 226, under the heading“Hood,” the sentence beginning, “Ifyou are unfamiliar” should bedisregarded.

15. At page 230, under the heading:“Approved oil types,” the referencesto “Approved” should be read as“Suitable.” Where it reads: Youcan add oils with the followingspecifications,” that text should bedisregarded, and the following textread in lieu thereof: “Add engineoils that meet the following oil ratingstandards: . . .”

16. At page 230, under the heading:“Alternative oil types,” the textpreceding the chart should bedisregarded, and in lieu thereofshould be read as follows: “If anengine oil suitable for continuoususe is not available, up to 1 USquart/liter of an engine oil with thefollowing oil rating can beadded: . . .” The reference to

“specification” should be read as“rating.”

17. At page 230, under the heading:“Engine oil change,” the text shouldbe disregarded and in lieu thereofshould be read as follows:

BMW recommends that you havethe oil changed at your BMWdealer’s service center or at anotherservice center that has trainedpersonnel that can perform the workin accordance with BMWspecifications.

18. At page 233, under the heading:“Service and Warranty InformationBooklet for US models andWarranty and Service GuideBooklet for Canadian models,” thesecond paragraph should bedisregarded and the following textread in lieu thereof:

The manufacturer of your vehiclerecommends that you havemaintenance and repair performedby your BMW dealer’s servicecenter or another service center orrepair shop that employs trainedpersonnel that can performmaintenance and repair work onyour vehicle in accordance withBMW specifications. Themanufacturer of your vehiclerecommends that you maintainrecords of all maintenance andrepair work performed on yourvehicle.

19. At page 236 and page 237, where itreads: “Do not perform work/bulbreplacement on xenon headlamps,”

Page 8: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Addendum

that text should be disregarded andin lieu thereof the following textshould be read: “Xenon headlampwork or replacement can causeserious and fatal injuries.” In thetext that follows, where it reads:“[h]ave any work on the xenonlighting system . . . ,” the followingwords should be read as precedingthat passage: “It is stronglysuggested that you . . . .”

20. At page 240, under the “Batteryreplacement” section, the textshould be disregarded and in lieuthereof the following text should beread:

Use of recommended vehiclebatteries

The manufacturer of your vehiclerecommends that you use vehiclebatteries that it has tested andrecommends for use in your vehicle;otherwise the vehicle could bedamaged and systems or functionsmay not be fully available.

After a battery replacement, themanufacturer of your vehiclerecommends that you have thebattery registered on your vehicleby a service center to ensure that allcomfort functions are fully available,and that any “check control”messages of these comfortfunctions are no longer displayed.

Page 9: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

ContentsThe fastest way to find information on a partic‐ular topic or item is by using the index, refer topage 258.

6 Notes

At a glance14 Cockpit18 iDrive26 Voice activation system29 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle

Controls34 Opening and closing53 Adjusting65 Transporting children safely69 Driving84 Displays103 Lights108 Safety135 Driving stability control systems143 Driving comfort165 Climate control172 Interior equipment181 Storage compartments

Driving tips188 Things to remember when driving192 Loading195 Saving fuel

Mobility204 Refueling206 Fuel211 Wheels and tires226 Engine compartment228 Engine oil231 Coolant233 Maintenance235 Replacing components242 Breakdown assistance248 Care

Reference254 Technical data258 Everything from A to Z

Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 10: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

NotesUsing this Owner's ManualOrientationThe fastest way to find information on a partic‐ular topic is by using the index.An initial overview of the vehicle is provided inthe first chapter.

Updates made after the editorialdeadlineAny updates made after the editorial deadlinefor the Owner's Manuals are found in the ap‐pendix of the printed Quick Reference for thevehicle.

User's manual for Navigation,Entertainment, CommunicationThe topics of Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐munication and the short commands of thevoice activation system are described in a sep‐arate user's manual, which is also includedwith the onboard literature.

Symbols Indicates precautions that must be followed

precisely in order to avoid the possibility ofpersonal injury and serious damage to thevehicle.◄ Marks the end of a specific item ofinformation.

Refers to measures that can be taken tohelp protect the environment."..." Identifies display texts in vehicle used toselect individual functions.›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voiceactivation system.››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by thevoice activation system.

Symbols on vehicle components Indicates that you should consult the

relevant section of this Owner's Manual forinformation on a particular part or assembly.

Vehicle features and optionsThis Owner's Manual describes all models andall standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series.Therefore, in this Owner's Manual, we also de‐scribe and illustrate features that are not avail‐able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐lected optional features or the country-specificversion.This also applies to safety-related functionsand systems.For any options and equipment not describedin this Owner's Handbook, refer to the Supple‐mentary Owner's Handbooks.On right-hand drive vehicles, some controlsare arranged differently from what is shown inthe illustrations.

Status of the Owner'sManualBasic informationThe manufacturer of your vehicle pursues apolicy of constant development that is con‐ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue toembody the highest quality and safety stan‐dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ fromthose in your vehicle.

Seite 6

Notes

6Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 11: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Updates made after the editorialdeadlineAny updates made after the editorial deadlinefor the Owner's Manuals are found in the ap‐pendix of the printed Quick Reference for thevehicle.

For your own safetyWarrantyYour vehicle is technically configured for theoperating conditions and registration require‐ments applying in the country of first delivery -homologation. If your vehicle is to be operatedin a different country it might be necessary toadapt your vehicle to potentially differing oper‐ating conditions and permit requirements. Ifyour vehicle does not comply with the homolo‐gation requirements in a certain country youcannot lodge warranty claims for your vehiclethere. Further information can be obtainedfrom your Service Centre.

Maintenance and repairsAdvanced technology, e.g., the use of modernmaterials and high-performance electronics,requires suitable maintenance and repair work.Therefore, have this work performed only by aBMW center or a workshop that works accord‐ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri‐ately trained personnel.If work is not carried out properly, there is adanger of subsequent damage and relatedsafety hazards.

California Proposition 65 WarningCalifornia laws require us to state the followingwarning:Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐bile components and parts, including compo‐nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐cle, contain or emit chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancer and birthdefects and reproductive harm. In addition,certain fluids contained in vehicles and certainproducts of component wear contain or emitchemicals known to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐

Seite 7

Notes

7Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Parts and accessoriesBMW recommends using parts and accesso‐ries approved by BMW for this purpose.

Your BMW center is the right contact for genu‐ine BMW parts and accessories, other prod‐ucts approved by BMW and related qualifiedadvice.BMW has tested these products for safety andsuitability in relation to BMW vehicles.BMW can assume responsibility for them.However, we cannot assume any responsibilitywhatsoever for parts and accessories that havenot been specifically approved by BMW.BMW cannot evaluate whether each individualproduct from another manufacturer can beused with BMW vehicles without presenting asafety hazard. This guarantee is also not appli‐cable when country-specific government ap‐proval has been granted. Testing of this kindmay fail to embrace the entire range of poten‐tial operating conditions to which componentsmight be exposed on BMW vehicles. Suchproducts could conceivably fail to comply withBMW's own stringent quality standards.

Page 12: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Usedengine oil contains chemicals that have causedcancer in laboratory animals. Always protectyour skin by washing thoroughly with soap andwater.

Service and warrantyWe recommend that you read this publicationthoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐lowing warranties:▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐

ranty.▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.▷ California Emission Control System Lim‐

ited Warranty.Detailed information about these warranties islisted in the Service and Warranty InformationBooklet for US models or in the Warranty andService Guide Booklet for Canadian models.Your vehicle has been specifically adapted anddesigned to meet the particular operating con‐ditions and homologation requirements in yourcountry and continental region in order to de‐liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicleis operated under those conditions. If you wishto operate your vehicle in another country orregion, you may be required to adapt your ve‐hicle to meet different prevailing operatingconditions and homologation requirements.You should also be aware of any applicablewarranty limitations or exclusions for suchcountry or region. In such case, please contactCustomer Relations for further information.

MaintenanceMaintain the vehicle regularly to sustain theroad safety, operational reliability and the NewVehicle Limited Warranty.Specifications for required maintenance meas‐ures:▷ BMW Maintenance system

▷ Service and Warranty Information Bookletfor US models

▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet forCanadian models

If the vehicle is not maintained according tothese specifications, this could result in seri‐ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage isnot covered by the BMW New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.

Data memoryMany electronic components on your vehicleare equipped with data memories that tempo‐rarily or permanently store technical informa‐tion about the condition of the vehicle, eventsand faults. This technical information generallyrecords the state of a component, a module, asystem or the environment:▷ Operating mode of system components, fill

levels for instance.▷ Status messages for the vehicle and from

its individual components, e.g., wheel rota‐tion speed/vehicle speed, deceleration,transverse acceleration.

▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys‐tem components, e.g., lights and brakes.

▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐tions such as airbag deployment or engag‐ing the stability control system.

▷ Ambient conditions, such as temperature.This data is purely technical in nature and isused to detect and correct faults and to opti‐mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles overroutes traveled cannot be created from thisdata. When service offerings are used, e.g., re‐pair services, service processes, warrantyclaims, quality assurance, this technical infor‐mation can be read out from the event andfault memories by the service personnel, in‐cluding the manufacturer, using special diag‐nostic tools. You can obtain further informationthere if you need it. After an error is corrected,

Seite 8

Notes

8Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 13: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

the information in the fault memory is deletedor overwritten on a continuous basis.With the vehicle in use there are situationswhere you can associate these technical datawith individuals if combined with other infor‐mation, e.g., an accident report, damage to thevehicle, eye witness accounts — possibly withthe assistance of an expert.Additional functions that are contractuallyagreed with the customer - such as vehicleemergency locating - you can transmit certainvehicle data from the vehicle.

Event Data Recorder EDRThis vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐tions, such as an air bag deployment or hittinga road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.The EDR is designed to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safety systems for ashort period of time, typically 30 seconds orless.The EDR in this vehicle is designed to recordsuch data as:▷ How various systems in your vehicle were

operating.▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger

safety belts were fastened.▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing

the accelerator and/or brake pedal.▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.These data can help provide a better under‐standing of the circumstances in whichcrashes and injuries occur.EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if anontrivial crash situation occurs; no data arerecorded by the EDR under normal drivingconditions and no personal data, e.g., name,gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.

However, other parties, such as law enforce‐ment, could combine the EDR data with thetype of personally identifying data routinely ac‐quired during a crash investigation.To read data recorded by an EDR, specialequipment is required, and access to the vehi‐cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as lawenforcement, that have the special equipment,can read the information if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

Vehicle identificationnumber

The vehicle identification number can be foundin the engine compartment.

The vehicle identification number can also befound behind the windshield.

Reporting safety defectsFor US customersThe following only applies to vehicles ownedand operated in the US.If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could cause in‐jury or death, you should immediately informthe National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis‐tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW ofNorth America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West‐wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone1-800-831-1117.

Seite 9

Notes

9Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 14: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles, itmay order a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, your dealer,or BMW of North America, LLC.To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing‐ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in‐formation about motor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

For Canadian customersCanadian customers who wish to report asafety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐fect Investigations and Recalls, may call thetoll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can alsoobtain other information about motor vehiclesafety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.

Seite 10

Notes

10Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 15: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Seite 11

Notes

11Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 16: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 17: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

At a glanceThese overviews of buttons, switches and

displays are intended to familiarize you with yourvehicle. You will also become quickly acquaintedwith the available control concepts and options.

Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 18: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

CockpitVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems.

All around the steering wheel

1 Seating comfort featuresSeat, mirror, steering wheelmemory  61

Active seat  56

2 Roller sunblinds  493 Rear window safety reel  494 Power windows  485 Exterior mirror operation  626 Driver assistance systems

Active Blind Spot Detec‐tion  130

Intelligent Safety  116

Lane departure warning  129

Night Vision  125

Head-up Display  101

7 Lights

Seite 14

At a glance Cockpit

14Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 19: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Front fog lights  106

Parking lights  103

Low beams  103

Automatic headlight con‐trol  104Daytime running lights  104Adaptive Light Control  104High-beam Assistant  105Instrument lighting  106

8 Steering column stalk, leftTurn signal  76

High beams, head‐light flasher  76

High-beam Assistant  105

Roadside parking lights  104

Computer  97

9 Shift paddles  8110 Steering wheel buttons, left

Store speed  150,  143

Resume speed  151,  146

Cruise control on/off, interrupt‐ing  143

Cruise control on/off, interrupt‐ing  150

Reduce distance  146

Increase distance  146

Cruise control rocker reel  151,  145

11 Instrument cluster  8412 Steering wheel buttons, right

Entertainment source

Volume

Voice activation  26

Telephone, see user's manual forNavigation, Entertainment andCommunication

Thumbwheel for selection lists  96

13 Steering column stalk, rightWiper  77

Rain sensor  77

Clean the windshields and head‐lights  77

14 Start/stop the engine and reel theignition on/off  70

Auto Start/Stop function  71

15 Horn16 Steering wheel heating  64

17 Adjust the steering wheel  64

Seite 15

Cockpit At a glance

15Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 20: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

18 Open the trunk lid  40 19 Unlocking the hood

All around the center console

1 Control Display  182 Glove compartment  1813 Ventilation  1684 Hazard warning system  242

Central locking system  39

5 Radio/CD/Multimedia, see user's manualfor Navigation, Entertainment and Commu‐nication

6 Automatic climate control  1657 Controller with buttons  18

8 Parking brake  73

Auto Hold  74

9 PDC Park Distance Control  152Top View  158Rearview camera  154Parking assistant  160Side View  157

HDC Hill Descent Control  137

Seite 16

At a glance Cockpit

16Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 21: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

10 Driving Dynamics Control  139

DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐trol  135

11 Transmission selector lever

All around the roofliner

1 Intelligent Emergency Re‐quest  242

2 Glass sunroof, powered  50

3 Indicator lamp, front-seat pas‐senger airbag  110

4 Reading lights  107

5 Interior lights  106

Seite 17

Cockpit At a glance

17Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 22: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

iDriveVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems.

The conceptThe iDrive combines the functions of manyswitches. Thus, these functions can be oper‐ated from a central location.

Using the iDrive during a tripTo avoid becoming distracted and pos‐

ing an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle'soccupants and to other traffic, never attemptto use the controls or enter information unlesstraffic and road conditions allow it.◀

Control elements at a glanceControl elements

1 Control Display2 Controller with buttons and, depending on

the equipment version, with touchpad

Control Display

Hints▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the

care instructions.▷ Do not place objects close to the Control

Display; otherwise, the Control Display canbe damaged.

▷ In the case of very high temperatures onthe Control Display, e.g. due to intense so‐lar radiation, the brightness may be re‐duced down to complete deactivation.Once the temperature is reduced, e.g.through shadow or climate control system,the normal functions are re-established.

Switching on1. Switch on the ignition.2. Press the controller.

Switch off

1. Press button.2. "Turn off control display"

ControllerThe buttons can be used to open the menusdirectly. The controller can be used to selectmenu items and enter the settings.Some iDrive functions can be operated usingthe touchpad on the controller.

Seite 18

At a glance iDrive

18Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 23: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

1. Turn.

2. Press.

3. Move in four directions.

Buttons on controller

Press button Function

MENU Open the main menu.

RADIO Opens the Radio menu.

MEDIA Opens the Multimedia menu.

NAV Opens the Navigation menu.

TEL Opens the phone menu.

Press button Function

BACK Displays the previous panel.

OPTION Opens the Options menu.

Operating conceptOpening the main menu

Press button.

The main menu is displayed.All iDrive functions can be called up via themain menu.

Selecting menu itemsHighlighted menu items can be selected.

1. Turn the controller until the desired menuitem is highlighted.

2. Press the controller.

Seite 19

iDrive At a glance

19Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 24: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Menu items in the Owner's ManualIn the Owner's Manual, menu items that can beselected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,"Settings".

Changing between panelsAfter a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", anew panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.▷ Move the controller to the left.

Closes current display and shows previousdisplay.Reopens previous display by pressingBACK button. In this case, the currentpanel is not closed.

▷ Move the controller to the right.Opens new display on top of previousscreen.

White arrows pointing to the left or right indi‐cate that additional panels can be opened.

Display of an opened menuWhen selecting a menu, it generally opens withthe panel that was last selected in that menu.To display the first panel of a menu:▷ Move the controller to the left repeatedly

until the first panel is displayed.▷ Press the menu button on the controller

twice.

Opening the Options menuPress button.

The "Options" menu is displayed.

Additional options: move the controller to theright repeatedly until the "Options" menu isdisplayed.

Options menuThe "Options" menu consists of various areas:▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen".

This area remains unchanged.▷ Control options for the selected main

menu, e.g., for "Radio".▷ If applicable, further operating options for

the selected menu, e.g., "Store station".

Changing settings1. Select a field.2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is displayed.

3. Press the controller.

Activating/deactivating the functionsSeveral menu items are preceded by a check‐box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu itemactivates or deactivates the function.

Function is activated.

Seite 20

At a glance iDrive

20Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 25: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Function is deactivated.

TouchpadSome iDrive functions can be operated usingthe touchpad on the controller:

Selecting functions1. "Settings"2. "Touchpad"3. Select the desired function.

▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers.▷ "Interactive map": viewing the interac‐

tive map.▷ "Browser": enter Internet addresses.▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered

letters and numbers.

Entering letters and numbersEntering letters requires some practice at thebeginning. When entering, pay attention to thefollowing:▷ For the input of upper/lower case letters

and numbers, it may be necessary to reelvia the controller to the corresponding In‐put mode, refer to page 24, e.g. when thespelling of upper and lower case letters isidentical.

▷ Enter characters as they are displayed onthe Control Display.

▷ Always enter associated characters, suchas accents or periods so that the letter canbe clearly recognized. Possible input de‐pends on the set language. Where neces‐sary, enter special characters via the con‐troller.

▷ To delete a character, slide to the left onthe touchpad.

▷ To enter a blank space, slide to the right inthe center of the touchpad.

▷ To enter a hyphen, slide to the right in theupper area of the touchpad.

▷ To enter an underscore, swipe to the rightin the lower area of the touchpad.

Using interactive map and InternetVia touch-pad move the interactive map in thenavigation system and Internet sites.

Function Controls

Move interactive map orInternet sites.

Swipe into re‐spective direc‐tion.

Enlarge/shrink interactivemap or Internet sites.

Drag in or out onthe touchpad withfingers.

Display the menu or opena link in the Internet.

Tap once.

Changing settingsYou may change control display settings viatouchpad. Swipe left or right accordingly.

Example: setting the clockSetting the clockOn the Control Display:

1. Press button. The main menu is dis‐played.

2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐lighted, and then press the controller.

3. If necessary, move the controller to the leftto display "Time/Date".

Seite 21

iDrive At a glance

21Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 26: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" ishighlighted, and then press the controller.

5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐lighted, and then press the controller.

6. Turn the controller to set the hours andpress the controller.

7. Turn the controller to set the minutes andpress the controller.

Status informationStatus fieldThe following information is displayed in thestatus field at the top right:▷ Time.▷ Current entertainment source.▷ Sound output, on/off.▷ Wireless network reception strength.▷ Phone status.▷ Traffic bulletin reception.

Status field symbolsThe symbols are grouped as follows.

Radio symbols

Symbol Meaning

HD radio station is being received.

Satellite radio is switched on.

Telephone symbols

Symbol Meaning

Incoming or outgoing call.

Missed call.

Wireless network receptionstrength.Symbol flashes: network search.

Wireless network is not available.

Bluetooth is switched on.

Roaming is active.

Text message was received.

Check the SIM card.

SIM card is blocked.

SIM card is missing.

Enter PIN.

Entertainment symbols

Symbol Meaning

CD/DVD player.

Music collection.

Gracenote® database.

AUX-IN port in the front or in therear.

USB audio interface.

Mobile phone audio interface.

Seite 22

At a glance iDrive

22Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 27: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Additional symbols

Symbol Meaning

Spoken instructions are turned off.

Split screenGeneral informationAdditional information can be displayed on theright side of the split screen, e.g., informationfrom the computer.In the divided screen view, the so-called splitscreen, this information remains visible evenwhen you change to another menu.

Switching the split screen on and off

1. Press button.2. "Split screen"

Selecting the display

1. Press button.2. "Split screen"3. Move the controller until the split screen is

selected.4. Press the controller or select "Split screen

content".5. Select the desired menu item.

Programmable memorybuttonsGeneral informationThe iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐grammable memory buttons and called up di‐rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐tions, phone numbers and menu entries.Settings are stored for the profile currently inuse.

Saving a function1. Highlight the function via the iDrive.

2. Press and hold the desired button,until a signal sounds.

Running a functionPress button.The function will work immediately.

This means, e.g., that the number is dialedwhen a phone number is selected.

Displaying the button assignmentTouch buttons with bare fingers. Do not weargloves or use objects.The key assignment is displayed at top edge ofscreen.

Deleting the button assignments1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for

approx. five seconds.2. "OK"

Seite 23

iDrive At a glance

23Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 28: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Deleting personal data in thevehicleThe conceptDepending on the usage, the vehicle savespersonal data, such as stored radio stations.These personal data can be permanently de‐leted through iDrive.

General informationDepending on the equipment package, the fol‐lowing data can be deleted:▷ Personal Profile settings.▷ Stored radio stations.▷ Stored Favorites buttons.▷ Travel and computer information.▷ Music collection.▷ Navigation, e.g. stored destinations.▷ Phone book.▷ Online data, e.g. Favorites, cookies.▷ Voice notes.▷ Login accounts.▷ RemoteApp smartphone tethering.Altogether, the deletion of the data can take upto 30 minutes.

Functional requirementData can only be deleted while stationary.

Deleting dataHeed and follow the instructions on the Con‐trol Display.

1. Switch on the ignition.2. "Settings"3. Open "Options".4. "Delete personal data"5. "Continue"6. "OK"

Entering letters and numbersGeneral informationOn the Control Display:

1. Turn the controller: select letters or num‐bers.

2. Select additional letters or numbers ifneeded.

3. "OK": confirm the entry.

Symbol Function

Press the controller: delete the let‐ter or number.

Press the controller for an extendedperiod: delete all letters or numbers.

Switching between cases, letters andnumbersDepending on the menu, you can reel betweenentering upper and lower case, letters andnumbers:

Symbol Function

Enter the letters.

Enter the numbers.

or Tip controller up.

Without navigation system Select the symbol.

Entry comparisonEntering names and addresses: choice is nar‐rowed down with every letter entered and let‐ters may be added automatically.Entries are continuously compared with datastored in the vehicle.▷ Only those letters are offered during input

for which data is available.

Seite 24

At a glance iDrive

24Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 29: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

▷ Target search: names of locations may beentered in languages available throughControl Display.

Seite 25

iDrive At a glance

25Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 30: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Voice activation systemVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems.

The concept▷ Most functions displayed on the Control

Display can be operated by voice com‐mands via the voice activation system. Thesystem supports you with announcementsduring input.

▷ Functions that can only be used when thevehicle is stationary cannot be used via thevoice activation system.

▷ The system uses a special microphone onthe driver's side.

▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner'sManual to use with the voice activationsystem.

RequirementsVia the Control Display, set a language that isalso supported by the voice activation systemso that the spoken commands can be identi‐fied.Set the language, refer to page 100.

Using voice activationActivating the voice activation system

1. Press button on the steeringwheel.

2. Wait for the signal.3. Say the command.

A command that is recognized by the voiceactivation system is announced and dis‐played in the instrument cluster.

This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐cates that the voice activation system is active.If no other commands are available, use func‐tion via iDrive.

Terminating the voice activationsystem

Briefly press the button on the steer‐ing wheel or ›Cancel‹.

Possible commandsMost menu items on the Control Display canbe voiced as commands.The available commands depend on the menuthat is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐play.There are short commands for many functions.You may select lists such as phone lists viavoice activation. Read these lists out loud ex‐actly as they show in the respective list.

Having possible commands read aloudYou can have available commands read outloud for you: ›Voice commands‹E. g. if the "Settings" menu is displayed, thecommands for the settings are read out loud.

Seite 26

At a glance Voice activation system

26Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 31: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Executing functions using shortcommandsExecute functions on the main menu via shortcommands. It almost doesn't matter whichmenu item is selected, e.g., ›Vehicle status‹.List of short commands for the voice activationsystem, see Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐munication Owner's Manual.

Help dialog for the voice activationsystemCalling up help dialog: ›Help‹Additional commands for the help dialog:▷ ›Help with examples‹: announces informa‐

tion about the current operating optionsand the most important commands forthem.

▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: informationabout the principle of operation for thevoice activation system is announced.

One example: open the tonesettingsVia the main menuThe commands of the menu items are spokenjust as they are selected via the controller.

1. Turn on the Entertainment sound output ifneeded.

2. Press button on the steeringwheel.

3. ›Radio‹4. ›Tone‹

Via short commandThe desired tone settings can also be startedvia a short command.

1. Turn on the Entertainment sound output ifneeded.

2. Press button on the steeringwheel.

3. ›Tone‹

Setting the voice dialogSet system to standard dialog or use a shortversion.The short version of the voice dialog playsback short messages in abbreviated form.

1. "Settings"2. "Language/Units"3. "Speech type:"4. Select setting.

Adjusting the volumeTurn the volume button while giving an in‐struction until the desired volume is set.▷ The volume remains constant even if the

volume of other audio sources is changed.▷ The volume is stored for the profile cur‐

rently in use.

Hints on EmergencyRequestsDo not use the voice activation system to ini‐tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.

Seite 27

Voice activation system At a glance

27Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 32: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

This can unnecessarily delay the establish‐ment of a phone connection.Instead, use the SOS button, refer topage 242, close to the interior mirror.

Environmental conditions▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters

smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐sis, and speed.

▷ Always say commands in the language ofthe voice activation system.

▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐roof closed to prevent noise interference.

▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehiclewhile speaking.

Seite 28

At a glance Voice activation system

28Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 33: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicleVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems.

Integrated Owner's Manualin the vehicleThe Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐played on the Control Display. It specificallydescribes features and functions found in thevehicle.

Components of the IntegratedOwner's ManualThe Integrated Owner's Manual consists ofthree parts, which offer various levels of infor‐mation or possible access.

Quick Reference GuideThe Quick Reference Guide provides informa‐tion how to operate the car, how to use basicvehicle functions or what to do in case of abreakdown. This information can also be dis‐played while driving.

Search by imagesImage search provides information and de‐scriptions. This is helpful when the terminol‐ogy for a feature is not at hand.

Owner's ManualSearch for information and descriptions by en‐tering terms selected from the index.

Select components

1. Press button.2. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle info".3. Press the controller.4. Selecting desired range:

▷ "Quick reference"▷ "Search by pictures"▷ "Owner's Manual"

Leafing through the Owner's Manual

Page by page with link accessTurn the controller until the next or previouspage is displayed.

Page by page without link accessScroll through the pages directly while skip‐ping the links.Highlight the symbol once. Now simply pressthe controller to browse from page to page.

Scroll back.

Scroll forward.

Seite 29

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance

29Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 34: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Context help - Owner's Manual to thetemporarily selected functionYou may open the relevant information di‐rectly.

Opening via the iDriveTo move directly from the application on theControl Display to the Options menu:

1. Press button or move the controllerto the right repeatedly until the "Options"menu is displayed.

2. "Display Owner's Manual"

Opening when a Check Controlmessage is displayedDirectly from the Check Control message onthe Control Display:"Display Owner's Manual"

Changing between a function and theOwner's ManualTo reel from a function, e. g., radio, to theOwner's Manual on the Control Display and toalternate between the two displays:

1. Press button or move the controllerto the right repeatedly until the "Options"menu is displayed.

2. "Display Owner's Manual"3. Select the desired page in the Owner's

Manual.

4. Press button again to return to lastdisplayed function.

5. Press button to return to the page ofthe Owner's Manual displayed last.

To alternate permanently between the last dis‐played function and the Owner's Manual re‐peat steps 4 & 5. Opens a new display everytime.

Programmable memory buttons

General informationThe Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro‐grammable memory buttons and called up di‐rectly.

Storing1. "Owner's Manual" Select via the iDrive.

2. Press selected button for morethan 2 seconds.

ExecutingPress button.The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐

mediately.

Seite 30

At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle

30Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 35: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Seite 31

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance

31Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 36: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 37: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

ControlsThis chapter is intended to provide you with

information that will give you complete control ofyour vehicle. All features and accessories thatare useful for driving and your safety, comfort

and convenience are described here.

Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 38: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Opening and closingVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems.

Remote control/keyGeneral informationThe vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐trols with integrated key.Every remote control holds a replaceable bat‐tery.You may set the key functions depending onthe optional features and country-specific ver‐sion. For Settings, refer to page 46.The vehicle stores personal settings for everyremote control. Personal Profile, refer topage 35.The remote controls hold information on re‐quired maintenance. Service data in the re‐mote control, refer to page 233.

At a glance

1 Unlocking2 Locking

3 Opening the trunk lid4 Press briefly: headlight courtesy delay fea‐

turePress and hold: Panic mode

Integrated key

Press button on the back of the remote con‐trol, arrow 1, and pull out the key, arrow 2.The integrated key fits the following locks:▷ Driver's door.▷ Storage compartment in the front center

armrest.

The storage compartment contains a reel forseparately securing the trunk lid, refer topage 42.

Replacing the battery

1. Remove integrated key from remote con‐trol.

2. Push in the catch with the key, arrow 1.

Seite 34

Controls Opening and closing

34Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 39: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

3. Remove the cover of the battery compart‐ment, arrow 2.

4. Insert a battery of the same type with thepositive side facing up.

5. Press the cover closed.Take the used battery to a recyclingcenter or to your service center.

New remote controlsNew remote controls are available from theservice center.

Loss of the remote controlsLost remote controls can be disabled by yourservice center.

Emergency detection of remotecontrolIt is possible to reel on the ignition or start theengine in situations such as the following:▷ Interference of radio transmission to re‐

mote control by external sources e.g., byradio masts.

▷ Empty battery in remote control.▷ Interference from radio transmissions

through mobile devices in close proximityto remote control.

▷ Interference of radio transmission bycharger while charging items such as mo‐bile devices in the vehicle.

A Check Control message is displayed if an at‐tempt is made to reel on the ignition or startthe engine.

Starting the engine with emergencydetection of the remote control

Steptronic transmission: if a correspondingCheck Control message appears, hold the re‐mote control, as shown, against the markedarea on the steering column and press theStart/Stop button within 10 seconds whilepressing the brake.Manual transmission: if a corresponding CheckControl message appears, hold the remotecontrol, as shown, against the marked area onthe steering column and press the Start/Stopbutton within 10 seconds while pressing theclutch pedal.If the remote control is not recognized: slightlychange the height position of the remote con‐trol and repeat the procedure.

Personal ProfileThe conceptIndividual settings in the vehicle are saved inpersonal profiles. Every remote control is as‐signed the last active profile.Three personal profiles and a guest profile canbe created.▷ Changes to the settings are automatically

saved in the profile currently activated.▷ Unlocking the car activates the profile that

is stored in the remote control.▷ Your personal settings will be recognized

and activated even if the vehicle had beenoperated with another remote control.

Seite 35

Opening and closing Controls

35Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 40: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

AdjustingThe settings for the following systems andfunctions are saved in the active profile. Thescope of storable settings is country- andequipment-dependable.▷ Unlocking and locking.▷ Lights.▷ Climate control.▷ Radio.▷ Instrument cluster.▷ Programmable memory buttons.▷ Volumes, tone.▷ Control Display.▷ Navigation.▷ Park Distance Control PDC.▷ Rearview camera▷ Side View.▷ Head-up Display.▷ Driving Dynamics Control.▷ Driver's seat position, exterior mirror posi‐

tion, steering wheel position.▷ Cruise control.▷ Intelligent Safety.▷ Active Blind Spot Detection.▷ Night vision.

Profile management

Opening profilesRegardless of the remote control in use a dif‐ferent profile may be activated.

1. "Settings"2. "Profiles"3. Select a profile.The activated profile is assigned to the cur‐rently used remote control.

Renaming profiles1. "Settings"2. "Profiles"3. "Options"4. "Rename current profile"

Resetting profilesThe settings of the active profile are reset totheir default values.

1. "Settings"2. "Profiles"3. "Options"4. "Reset current profile"

Exporting profilesMost settings of the active profile and thesaved contacts can be exported.This can be helpful for securing and retrievingpersonal settings, before delivering the vehicleto a workshop, e.g. Profiles can be taken to an‐other vehicle equipped with the Personal Pro‐file function.The following export options are available:▷ Via BMW Online.▷ Via the USB port to a USB device.

Popular file systems for USB devices aresupported. FAT32 and exFAT are the rec‐ommended formats for profile export.Other formats may not support the export.

1. "Settings"2. "Profiles"3. "Export profile"4. BMW Online: "BMW Online"

USB port: "USB device"

Importing profilesProfiles exported via BMW Online can also beimported via BMW Online.Profiles stored on a USB device can be im‐ported via the USB interface.

Seite 36

Controls Opening and closing

36Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 41: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Existing settings and contacts are overwrittenwith the imported profile.

1. "Settings"2. "Profiles"3. "Import profile"4. BMW Online: "BMW Online"

USB interface: "USB device"

Using the guest profileThe guest profile is for individual settings thatare saved in none of the three personal pro‐files.This can be useful for drivers who are usingthe vehicle temporarily and do not have theirown profile.

1. "Settings"2. "Profiles"3. "Guest"The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is notassigned to the current remote control.

Display profile list during startThe profile list can be displayed during eachstart to select the desired profile.

1. "Settings"2. "Profiles"3. "Options"4. "Display user list at startup"

Using the remote controlNote

Take the remote control with youPeople or animals left unattended in a

parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐side. Always take the remote control with youwhen leaving the vehicle so that the vehiclecan then be opened from the outside.◀

UnlockingPress button on the remote control.

▷ All doors and the trunk lid are unlocked.▷ Interior lamps and courtesy lamps are acti‐

vated. This function is not available, if theinterior lamps were switched off manually.

▷ The welcome lamps are switched on, if thisfunction was activated.

▷ Exterior mirrors folded through convenientclosing are folded open.

You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked.For Settings, refer to page 46.Anti-theft protection is switched off.The alarm system, refer to page 47, is dis‐armed.

Convenient openingPress and hold this button on the re‐mote control after unlocking.

The windows and the glass sunroof areopened, as long as the button on the remotecontrol is pressed.

LockingLocking from the outsideDo not lock the vehicle from the outside

with people inside the car, as the vehicle can‐not be unlocked from inside without specialknowledge.◀

Press button on the remote control.

All doors and the trunk lid are locked.Anti-theft protection is switched on. It pre‐vents the doors from being unlocked using thelock buttons or the door openers.The alarm system, refer to page 47, is armed.

Seite 37

Opening and closing Controls

37Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 42: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Switching on interior lights andcourtesy lights

Press button on the remote control withthe vehicle locked.

This function is not available, if the interiorlamps were switched off manually.If the button is pressed again within 10 sec‐onds after vehicle was locked, the interior mo‐tion sensor and tilt alarm sensor of the anti-theft warning system, refer to page 48, areturned off. After locking, wait 10 seconds be‐fore pressing the button again.

Panic modeYou can trigger the alarm system if you findyourself in a dangerous situation.

Press button on the remote control forat least 3 seconds.

To reel off the alarm: press any button.

Opening the trunk lidPress button on the remote control forapprox. 1 second.

The trunk lid opens, regardless of whether thevehicle was previously locked or unlocked.During opening, the trunk lid pivots back andup. Ensure that adequate clearance is availablebefore opening.Depending on the features and the countryversion, it is also possible to have door un‐locked. Create the settings, refer to page 46.If the doors were not unlocked, the trunk lid islocked again as soon as it closes.

Do not place the remote control in thecargo area

Take the remote control with you and do notleave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐mote control is locked inside the vehicle whenthe trunk lid is closed.◀

Switching on the headlight courtesydelay feature

Briefly press the button on the remotecontrol.

The duration can be set in the Control Display.

MalfunctionRemote control detection by the vehicle canamong others be malfunctioning under the fol‐lowing circumstances:▷ Interference of the radio connection from

transmission towers or other equipmentwith high transmit power.

▷ Shielding of the remote control due tometal objects.

▷ Interference of the radio connection frommobile phones or other electronic devicesin direct proximity.

Do not transport the remote control togetherwith metal objects or electronic devices.In the case of interference, the vehicle can alsobe unlocked and locked from the outside with‐out remote control, refer to page 39.

For US owners onlyThe transmitter and receiver units comply withpart 15 of the FCC/Federal CommunicationCommission regulations. Operation is gov‐erned by the following:FCC ID:▷ LX8766S.▷ LX8766E.▷ LX8CAS.▷ LX8CAS2.▷ MYTCAS4.Compliance statement:This device complies with part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐

ference, and

Seite 38

Controls Opening and closing

38Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 43: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

▷ this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications or changes tothese devices could void the user's authority tooperate this equipment.

Without remote controlFrom the outside

Locking from the outsideDo not lock the vehicle from the outside

with people inside the car, as the vehicle can‐not be unlocked from inside without specialknowledge.◀

Remove the key before pulling the doorhandle

Before pulling the outside door handle, removethe key to avoid damaging the paintwork andthe key.◀

Unlock or lock the driver's door via the doorlock using the integrated key, refer to page 34.In some vehicle equipment versions, only thedriver's door can be unlocked or locked via thedoor lock. In this case, the other doors must beunlocked or locked from the inside.

Alarm systemWith some country versions, the alarm systemis not armed if the vehicle is locked with theintegrated key.

In some country-specific versions, the alarmsystem is triggered when the vehicle is un‐locked via the door lock.In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehiclewith the remote control or reel on the ignition,if needed, through emergency detection of theremote control, refer to page 35.

From the inside

Unlocking and locking

Pressing the central locking system buttonlocks or unlocks the vehicle with the frontdoors closed.

The vehicle is not secured against theft whenlocking.The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle isautomatically unlocked. The hazard warningsystem and interior lights come on.

Unlocking and opening

▷ Press the central locking system button tounlock the doors together, and then pullthe door handle above the armrest.

Seite 39

Opening and closing Controls

39Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 44: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

▷ On the door to be opened, pull the doorhandle twice: the first time unlocks thedoor, the second time opens it. The otherdoors remain locked.

DoorsAutomatic Soft ClosingTo close the doors, push lightly.It is closed automatically.

Danger of jammingMake sure that the closing path of the

doors is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀

Trunk lidOpeningDuring opening, the trunk lid pivots back andup.Ensure that adequate clearance is availablebefore opening.

Opening from the outside

▷ Press button on the trunk lid.

▷ Press button on the remote con‐trol for approx. 1 second.

As the case may be, the doors are also un‐locked. Unlocking with the remote control,refer to page 38.

The trunk lid opens.

Opening from the insideWith the vehicle is stationary, pressthe button in the driver's footwell.

The trunk lid opens.

Locking and closing

HintsKeep the closing path clearMake sure that the closing path of the

trunk lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may re‐sult.◀

Do not place the remote control in thecargo area

Take the remote control with you and do notleave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐mote control is locked inside the vehicle whenthe trunk lid is closed.◀

Locking

Press the button on the inside of the trunk lidto lock the vehicle prior to closing.The driver's door must be closed for this pur‐pose.

Seite 40

Controls Opening and closing

40Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 45: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Closing

Recessed grips in the interior trim of the trunklid make it easier to pull down the lid.

Automatic tailgate operation

OpeningDuring opening, the trunk lid pivots back andup. Ensure that adequate clearance is availablebefore opening.

▷ Press button on the exterior of the trunklid.

▷ Press button on the remote con‐trol for approx. 1 second.

As the case may be, the doors are also un‐locked. Opening with the remote control,refer to page 38.

▷ Push the button in the driver'sfootwell.

Pressing the button again stops the motion.The opening procedure is likewise interrupted:▷ When starting the engine.▷ When the vehicle starts moving.

▷ By pressing the button in the driver's foot‐well.

▷ By pressing the button on the inside of thetrunk lid.

Provide edge protectionSharp objects or those with edges can

hit the rear window while driving and damagethe heat conductors of the rear window. Pro‐vide edge protection.◀

ClosingWithout Comfort Access:

▷ Press button on the inside of the trunk lid.The trunk lid closes automatically.Pressing the button again stops the mo‐tion.

With Comfort Access:

▷ Press button, arrow 1, on the inside of thetrunk lid.Pressing the button again stops the mo‐tion.

▷ Press button, arrow 2.

Seite 41

Opening and closing Controls

41Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 46: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

The vehicle will be locked after closing thetailgate. The driver's door must be closedfor this purpose and the remote controlmust be outside of the vehicle in the areaof the trunk lid.Pressing the button again stops the mo‐tion.

▷ Press button on the exterior of the trunklid.Pressing the button again stops the mo‐tion.

The closing operation is interrupted:▷ When starting the engine.▷ The vehicle starts off with jerks.

Keep the closing path clearMake sure that the closing path of the

trunk lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may re‐sult.◀

Do not place the remote control in thecargo area

Take the remote control with you and do notleave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐mote control is locked inside the vehicle whenthe trunk lid is closed.◀

Manual operationIn the event of an electrical fault, manually op‐erate the unlocked trunk lid slowly andsmoothly.To close it completely, push the trunk lid downlightly. It is closed automatically.

Keep the closing path clearMake sure that the closing path is clear;

otherwise, injuries may result.◀

Locking separatelyThe trunk lid can be locked separately usingthe reel in the center armrest. If the center armrest is locked, the trunk lid cannot be opened.

▷ Trunk lid secured, arrow 1.▷ Trunk lid not secured, ar‐

row 2.

Slide the reel into the arrow 1 position. Thissecures the trunk lid and disconnects it fromthe central locking system.This is beneficial when the vehicle is parkedusing valet service. The infrared remote con‐trol can be handed out without the key.

Emergency unlocking

Pull the handle inside the cargo area.The trunk lid unlocks.

Comfort AccessThe conceptThe vehicle can be accessed without activat‐ing the remote control.All you need to do is to have the remote con‐trol with you, such as in your pants pocket.

Seite 42

Controls Opening and closing

42Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 47: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

The vehicle automatically detects the remotecontrol when it is in close proximity or in thecar's interior.Comfort Access supports the following func‐tions:▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.▷ Convenient closing.▷ Open the trunk lid individually.▷ Open trunk lid with no-touch activation.▷ Open/close trunk lid with no-touch activa‐

tion.▷ Start the engine.

Functional requirements▷ There are no external sources of interfer‐

ence nearby.▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control

must be located outside of the vehicle.▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not

possible until after approx. 2 seconds.▷ The engine can only be started if the re‐

mote control is in the vehicle.

Unlocking

Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely,arrow.This corresponds with pressing the button onthe remote control.

Locking

Touch the surface on the handle of a vehicledoor, arrow, with your finger for approx. 1 sec‐ond without grasping the door handle.This corresponds with pressing the button onthe remote control. To save battery power, ensure that the ignitionand all electronic systems and/or power con‐sumers are turned off before locking the vehi‐cle.

Convenient closingMonitor closingMonitor closing to ensure that no one

becomes trapped.◀

Touch the surface on the handle of a vehicledoor, arrow, with your finger and hold it therewithout grasping the door handle.This corresponds to pressing and holding the remote control button.

In addition to locking, the windows and theglass sunroof close and the exterior mirrorsfold in.

Seite 43

Opening and closing Controls

43Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 48: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Separately unlocking the trunk lidPress button on the exterior of the trunk lid.This corresponds to pressing the re‐mote control button.The situation of the doors does not change.

Do not place the remote control in thecargo area

Take the remote control with you and do notleave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐mote control is locked inside the vehicle whenthe trunk lid is closed.◀

Open trunk lid with no-touchactivationWith Comfort Access, the trunk lid can beopened with no-touch activation using the re‐mote control you are carrying.Two sensors detect a forward-directed footmotion in the center of the area at the rear ofthe car and the trunk lid opens.

Foot movement to be carried outDo not touch vehicleWith the foot motion, make sure there is

steady stance and do not touch the vehicle;otherwise, there is a danger of injury, e. g. fromhot exhaust system parts.◀

1. Place in the center behind the vehicle,about an arm's length from the vehicle rear.

2. Move a foot in the direction of travel as farunder the vehicle as possible and immedi‐ately pull it back. With this movement, the

leg must pass through the ranges of bothsensors.

OpeningThe trunk lid opens, regardless of whether itwas previously locked or unlocked.During opening, the trunk lid pivots back andup. Ensure that adequate clearance is availablebefore opening.Before the opening, the hazard warning sys‐tem flashes.

Preventing inadvertent openingIn situations where the trunk lid is not to

be opened with no-touch activation, ensurethat the remote control is located beyond therange of the sensor, at least 5 ft/1.50 m fromthe rear of the car.Otherwise, the trunk lid may be opened inad‐vertently, for example by an unintentional ormisinterpreted movement of the foot.◀

Opening and closing the trunk lid withno-touch activationWith Comfort Access, the trunk lid can beopened or closed with no-touch activation us‐ing the remote control you are carrying.Two sensors detect a forward-directed footmotion in the center of the area at the rear ofthe car and the trunk lid opens.

Seite 44

Controls Opening and closing

44Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 49: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Foot movement to be carried outDo not touch vehicleWith the foot motion, make sure there is

steady stance and do not touch the vehicle;otherwise, there is a danger of injury, e. g. fromhot exhaust system parts.◀

1. Place in the center behind the vehicle,about an arm's length from the vehicle rear.

2. Move a foot in the direction of travel as farunder the vehicle as possible and immedi‐ately pull it back. With this movement, theleg must pass through the ranges of bothsensors.

OpeningThe trunk lid opens, regardless of whether itwas previously locked or unlocked.During opening, the trunk lid pivots back andup. Ensure that adequate clearance is availablebefore opening.Before the opening, the hazard warning sys‐tem flashes.

Preventing inadvertent openingIn situations where the trunk lid is not to

be opened with no-touch activation, ensurethat the remote control is located beyond therange of the sensor, at least 5 ft/1.50 m fromthe rear of the car.Otherwise, the trunk lid may be opened inad‐vertently, for example by an unintentional ormisinterpreted movement of the foot.◀

ClosingThe hazard warning system flashes on and anacoustic signal sounds before the trunk lidcloses.When closing, the trunk lid pivots back anddown.The closing of the trunk lid has no effect on thelocking of the vehicle.Another foot movement can interrupt the clos‐ing operation.

Avoiding unintentional closingIn situations in which the opened trunk

lid should not to be closed with no-touch acti‐vation, ensure that the remote control is lo‐cated beyond the range of the sensor, at least5 ft/1.50 m from the rear of the car.Otherwise, the trunk lid may be closed inadver‐tently, for example by an unintentional or mis‐interpreted movement of the foot.◀

Keep the closing path clearMake sure that the closing path of the

trunk lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may re‐sult.◀

Do not place the remote control in thecargo area

Take the remote control with you and do notleave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐mote control is locked inside the vehicle whenthe trunk lid is closed.◀

MalfunctionRemote control detection by the vehicle canamong others be malfunctioning under the fol‐lowing circumstances:▷ Interference of the radio connection from

transmission towers or other equipmentwith high transmit power.

▷ Shielding of the remote control due tometal objects.

Seite 45

Opening and closing Controls

45Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 50: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

▷ Interference of the radio connection frommobile phones or other electronic devicesin direct proximity.

Do not transport the remote control togetherwith metal objects or electronic devices.In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lockthe vehicle using the buttons of the remotecontrol or using the integrated key, refer topage 39.

AdjustingUnlockingThe settings are saved in the active profile, re‐fer to page 35.

Doors1. "Settings"2. "Doors/key"3. Select the symbol.4. Select the desired function:

▷ "Driver's door only"Only the driver's door and the fuel fillerflap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐locks the entire vehicle.

▷ "All doors"The entire vehicle is unlocked.

Trunk lidDepending on optional features and countryversion, this setting is not offered in somecases.

1. "Settings"2. "Doors/key"3. Select the symbol.4. Select the desired function:

▷ "Tailgate"The trunk lid is opened.

▷ "Tailgate + door(s)"

The trunk lid is opened and the doorsare unlocked.

Confirmation signals from the vehicleThe settings are saved in the active profile, re‐fer to page 35.

1. "Settings"2. "Doors/key"3. Deactivate or activate the desired confir‐

mation signals.▷ "Acoustic sig. lock/unlock"▷ "Flash when lock/unlock"

Automatic lockingThe settings are saved in the active profile, re‐fer to page 35.

1. "Settings"2. "Doors/key"3. Select the desired function:

▷ "Lock if no door is opened"The vehicle locks automatically after ashort period of time if no door isopened.

▷ "Lock after start driving"The vehicle locks automatically afteryou drive off.

Retrieving the seat, mirror, andsteering wheel settingsThe driver's seat, exterior mirror, and steeringwheel position adjusted last will be stored forthe active profile.When the vehicle is unlocked, these positionsare automatically retrieved if this function wasactivated.

Pinch hazard when moving back the seatIf this function is used, first make sure

that the footwell behind the driver's seat isempty. Otherwise, people might get injured or

Seite 46

Controls Opening and closing

46Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 51: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

objects damaged when the seat is movedback.◀

The adjustment procedure is interrupted:▷ When a seat position reel is pressed.▷ When a button of the seat, mirror, and

steering wheel memory is pressed briefly.

Activating the setting1. "Settings"2. "Doors/key"3. "Last seat position autom."

Alarm systemThe conceptWhen the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarmsystem responds to:▷ Opening a door, the hood or the trunk lid.▷ Movements in the interior.▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during at‐

tempts at stealing a wheel or when towingthe car.

▷ Disconnected battery voltage.The alarm system briefly signals tampering:▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm.▷ By switching on the hazard warning sys‐

tem.▷ By flashing the daytime running lights.

Arming and disarming the alarmsystemWhen you unlock or lock the vehicle, eitherwith the remote control, Comfort Access or atthe door lock the alarm system is disarmed orarmed at the same time.

Door lock and armed alarm systemUnlocking via the door lock will trigger thealarm on some country-specific versions.

Trunk lid and armed alarm systemThe trunk lid can be opened even when thealarm system is armed.After the trunk lid is closed, it is locked andmonitored again when the doors are locked.The hazard warning system flashes once.

Panic modeYou can trigger the alarm system if you findyourself in a dangerous situation.

Press button on the remote control forat least 3 seconds.

To reel off the alarm: press any button.

Indicator lamp on the interior rearviewmirror

▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every2 seconds:The system is armed.

▷ The indicator lamp flashes after locking:The doors, hood or trunk lid is not closedproperly, but the rest of the vehicle is se‐cured.After 10 seconds, the indicator lampflashes continuously. Interior motion sen‐sor and tilt alarm sensor are not active.When the still open access is closed, inte‐rior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor willbe switched on.

▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlock‐ing:The vehicle has not been tampered with.

Seite 47

Opening and closing Controls

47Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 52: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlockinguntil the engine ignition is switched on, butno longer than approx. 5 minutes:An alarm has been triggered.

Tilt alarm sensorThe tilt of the vehicle is monitored.The alarm system responds in situations suchas attempts to steal a wheel or when the car istowed.

Interior motion sensorThe windows and glass sunroof must beclosed for the system to function properly.

Avoiding unintentional alarmsThe tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐sor can be switched off together, such as inthe following situations:▷ In automatic car washes.▷ In duplex garages.▷ During transport on trains carrying vehi‐

cles, at sea or on a trailer.▷ With animals in the vehicle.

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor andinterior motion sensor

Press the remote control button againwithin 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle

is locked.The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐onds and then continues to flash.The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐sor are turned off, until the vehicle is lockedagain.

Switching off the alarm▷ Unlock vehicle with the remote control or

reel on the ignition, if needed throughemergency detection of remote control, re‐fer to page 35.

▷ With Comfort Access: If you are carryingthe remote control on your person, graspthe driver side or front passenger side doorhandle completely.

Power windowsGeneral information

Take the remote control with youTake the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, e.g., can‐not operate the power windows and injurethemselves.◀

Opening

▷ Press the button to the resistancepoint.The window opens while the reel is held.

▷ Press the reel beyond the resistancepoint.The window opens automatically. Pressingthe reel again stops the motion.

See also: Convenient opening, refer topage 37, via remote control.

ClosingKeep the closing path clearMonitor closing and make sure that the

closing path of the window is clear; otherwise,injuries may result.◀

Seite 48

Controls Opening and closing

48Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 53: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

▷ Pull the reel to the resistance point.The window closes while the reel is held.

▷ Pull the reel beyond the resistancepoint.The window closes automatically. Pullingagain stops the motion.

See also: closing by means of Comfort Access,refer to page 42.

Pinch protection systemDanger of jamming even with pinch pro‐tection

Even with the pinch protection system, checkthat the window's closing path is clear; other‐wise, the closing action may not stop in certainsituations, e.g., if thin objects are present.◀

No window accessoriesDo not install any accessories in the win‐

dow's range of movement; otherwise, thepinch protection system will be impaired.◀

If closing force exceeds a specific margin as awindow closes, closing is interrupted.The window reopens slightly.

Closing without the pinch protectionsystem

Keep the closing path clearMonitor closing and make sure that the

closing path of the window is clear; otherwise,injuries may result.◀

E.g. danger from the outside or ice might pre‐vent window from closing properly - proceedas follows:

1. Pull the reel past the resistance point andhold it there.The pinch protection is limited and thewindow reopens slightly if the closing forceexceeds a certain margin.

2. Pull the reel past the resistance point againwithin approx. 4 seconds and hold it there.The window closes without jam protection.

Safety reel

General informationThe safety reel in the driver's door can be usedto prevent children, e.g., from opening andclosing the rear windows using the switches inthe rear.

Switching on and offPress button.The LED lights up if the safety func‐

tion is switched on.

Safety reel for rear operationPress the safety reel when transporting

children in the rear; otherwise, injury may re‐sult if the windows are closed without supervi‐sion.◀

Roller sunblindsGeneral informationIf you are no longer able to move the roller sun‐blind for the rear window after having activatedit a number of times in a row, the system isblocked for a limited time to prevent overheat‐ing. Let the system cool.The roller sunblind for the rear window cannotbe moved at low interior temperatures.

Seite 49

Opening and closing Controls

49Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 54: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Driver's door controls

Roller sunblind for rear windowPress button.

Roller sunblinds for the rear sidewindowsPull out the roller sunblind at the loop and hookit onto the bracket.

Do not open the window while the rollersunblind is tilted

Do not open the window while the roller sun‐blind is tilted; otherwise, there is a risk of dam‐age at high speeds that may result in personalinjury.◀

Glass sunroof, poweredGeneral informationThe glass sunroof and the sliding visor can beoperated together or separately, using thesame reel.The glass sunroof is operational when the igni‐tion is switched on.

Keep the closing path clearMonitor closing and make sure that the

closing path of the glass sunroof is clear; oth‐erwise, injuries may result.◀

Take the remote control with youTake the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, e.g., can‐not operate the glass sunroof and injure them‐selves.◀

Tilting the glass sunroofPush switch briefly upward.▷ The closed glass sunroof is

tilted and the sliding visoropens slightly.

▷ The opened glass sunroofcloses until it is in its tiltedposition. The sliding visordoes not move.

Opening/closing the glass sunroof andsliding visor separately

▷ Press the reel in the desireddirection to the resistancepoint and hold it there.The sliding visor opens, aslong as the reel is helddown. If the sliding visor isalready fully open, the glasssunroof opens.The glass sunroof closes aslong as the reel is helddown. If the glass sunroof isalready closed or in the tiltedposition, the sliding visorcloses.

▷ Press the reel in the desired direction pastthe resistance point.

Seite 50

Controls Opening and closing

50Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 55: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

The sliding visor opens automatically. If thesliding visor is already fully open, the glasssunroof opens automatically.The glass sunroof closes automatically. Ifthe glass sunroof is already closed or in thetilted position, the sliding visor closes au‐tomatically.Pressing the reel upward stops the motion.

Opening/closing the glass sunroof andsliding visor together

Briefly press the reel twice insuccession in the desired direc‐tion past the resistance point.The glass sunroof and sliding vi‐sor move together. Pressing the

reel upward stops the motion.

▷ See also: Convenient opening, refer topage 37, via remote control.

▷ See also: closing by means of Comfort Ac‐cess, refer to page 42.

Comfort positionIf the glass sunroof is not automatically com‐pletely opened, the comfort position has beenattained. In this position the wind noises in theinterior are the least.If desired, continue the movement by pressingthe reel.

Pinch protection systemIf the closing force when closing the glass sun‐roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐ment is stopped, beginning at approximatelythe middle of the opening in the roof, or fromthe tilted position during closing.The glass sunroof reopens slightly.

Danger of jamming even with pinch pro‐tection

Despite the pinch protection system, checkthat the glass sunroof's closing path is clear;otherwise, the closing action may not be inter‐

rupted in certain extreme situations, such aswhen thin objects are present.◀

Closing from the open positionwithout pinch protectionE. g. if there is an external danger, proceed asfollows:

1. Press the reel forward beyond the resist‐ance point and hold.The pinch protection is limited and theglass sunroof reopens slightly if the closingforce exceeds a certain margin.

2. Press the reel forward again beyond the re‐sistance point and hold until the glass sun‐roof closes without jam protection. Makesure that the closing area is clear.

Closing from the raised positionwithout pinch protectionIf there is an external danger, push the reel for‐ward past the resistance point and hold it.The glass sunroof closes without jam protec‐tion.

Initializing after a power failureAfter a power failure during the opening orclosing process, the glass sunroof can only beoperated to a limited extent.

Initializing the systemThe system can be initialized when the vehicleis stationary and the engine is running.During the initialization, the glass sunroofcloses without jam protection.

Keep the closing path clearMonitor closing and make sure that the

closing path of the glass sunroof is clear; oth‐erwise, injuries may result.◀

Seite 51

Opening and closing Controls

51Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 56: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Press the reel up and hold it untilthe initialization is complete:▷ Initialization begins within

15 seconds and is com‐pleted when the glass sun‐roof and sliding visor arecompletely closed.

▷ The glass sunroof closes without jam pro‐tection.

Seite 52

Controls Opening and closing

52Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 57: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

AdjustingVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems.

Sitting safelyThe ideal seating position can make a vitalcontribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.The seating position plays an important role inan accident in combination with:▷ Safety belts, refer to page 57.▷ Head restraints, refer to page 58.▷ Airbags, refer to page 108.

SeatsHints

Do not adjust the seat while drivingDo not adjust the driver's seat while driv‐

ing, or the seat could respond with unexpectedmovement and the ensuing loss of vehiclecontrol could lead to an accident.◀

Do not incline the backrest too far to therear

Also on the front passenger side, do not inclinethe backrest on the front passenger side toofar to the rear while driving, or there is a risk ofslipping under the safety belt in the event of anaccident. This would eliminate the protectionnormally provided by the belt.◀

Keep the movement area unobstructedWhen changing the seat position, keep

the seat's area of movement unobstructed;otherwise, people might get injured or objectsdamaged.◀

Semi-electrically adjustable seats

At a glance

1 Forward/backward2 Thigh support3 Height, tilt4 Backrest5 Lumbar support

Tilt

Move the control in the desired direction untilthe desired tilt is set.

Seite 53

Adjusting Controls

53Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 58: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Forward/backward

Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desireddirection.After releasing the control, move the seat for‐ward or back slightly making sure it engagesproperly.

Height

Move the button in the required direction.

Backrest

Move the button in the required direction.

Electrically adjustable seats

At a glance

1 Thigh support2 Forward/back, height, tilt3 Shoulder support4 Backrest width5 Lumbar support6 Backrest, head restraint

General informationThe seat setting for the driver's seat is storedfor the profile currently in use. When the vehi‐cle is unlocked via the remote control, the po‐sition is automatically retrieved if the Function,refer to page 46, is activated for this purpose.

Adjustments in detail1. Forward/back.

Seite 54

Controls Adjusting

54Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 59: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

2. Height.

3. Seat tilt.

4. Backrest tilt.

5. Thigh support.

Thigh support

Multifunctional seat

Adjust the position using the lever.

Lumbar supportThe curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re‐gion of the spine. The lower back and thespine are supported for upright posture.

▷ Press the front/rear sectionof the reel.The curvature is increased/decreased.

▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐tion of the reel.The curvature is shifted up/down.

Backrest widthChange the width of the back‐rest using the side wings to ad‐just the lateral support.

To make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle,the backrest width temporarily opens fully.

Seite 55

Adjusting Controls

55Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 60: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Shoulder support

Also supports the back in the shoulder area:▷ Results in a relaxed seating position.▷ Reduces strain on the shoulder muscles.

Active seatActive adjustment of the seat cushion's con‐tours reduces muscular tension and fatigue tohelp prevent lower back pain.

Press button. The LED lights up.

Front seat heating

Switching onPress button once for each tempera‐ture level.

The maximum temperature is reached whenthree LEDs are lit.If the journey is continued within approx. 15minutes, the seat heating is activated automat‐ically with the temperature selected last.When ECO PRO, refer to page 196, is acti‐vated, the heater output is reduced.

Switch offPress button longer.The LEDs go out.

Temperature distributionThe heating action in the seat cushion andbackrest can be distributed in different ways.On the Control Display:

1. "Climate"2. "Front seat heating"3. Select the required seat.4. Turn the controller to set the temperature

distribution.

Rear seat heating

Switching onPress button once for each tempera‐ture level.

Seite 56

Controls Adjusting

56Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 61: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

The maximum temperature is reached whenthree LEDs are lit.If the journey is continued within approx. 15minutes, the seat heating is activated automat‐ically with the temperature selected last.When ECO PRO, refer to page 196, is acti‐vated, the heater output is reduced.

Switch offPress button longer.The LEDs go out.

Active seat ventilation, frontThe seat cushion and backrest surfaces arecooled by means of integrated fans.The ventilation cools the seat, e. g., if the vehi‐cle interior is overheated or for continuouscooling at high temperatures.

Switching onPress button once for each ventilationlevel.

The highest level is active when three LEDsare lit.

After a short time, the system automaticallymoves down one level in order to prevent ex‐cessive cooling.

Switch offPress button longer.The LEDs go out.

Safety beltsSeats with safety beltThe vehicle has five seats, each of which isequipped with a safety belt.

General informationAlways make sure that safety belts are beingworn by all occupants before driving off.For the occupants' safety the belt lockingmechanism triggers early. Slowly guide thebelt out of the holder when applying it.Although airbags enhance safety by providingadded protection, they are not a substitute forsafety belts.The upper shoulder strap's anchorage pointwill be correct for adult seat occupants of ev‐ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted.▷ The two outer safety belt buckles,

integrated into the rear seat, are for pas‐sengers sitting on the left and right.

▷ The center rear safety belt buckle is solelyintended for the center passenger.

HintsOne person per safety beltNever allow more than one person to

wear a single safety belt. Never allow infants orsmall children to ride on a passenger's lap.◀

Putting on the beltLay the belt, without twisting, snugly

across the lap and shoulders, as close to thebody as possible. Make sure that the belt lieslow around the hips in the lap area and doesnot press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the beltcan slip over the hips in a frontal impact and in‐jure the abdomen.The safety belt must not lie across the neck,rub on sharp edges, be routed over breakableobjects, or be pinched.◀

Seite 57

Adjusting Controls

57Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 62: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

What reduces the restraining effectAvoid wearing bulky clothing, and pull

the shoulder belt periodically to readjust thetension. Make sure that the belt is not jammed;otherwise, the belt can be damaged and therestraining effect is reduced.◀

Buckling the belt

Make sure you hear the latch plate engage inthe belt buckle.

Tensioning the safety beltautomaticallyWhen the belt is closed, it is automaticallytightened once after the release.

Unbuckling the belt1. Hold the belt firmly.2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.3. Guide the belt back into its roll-up mecha‐

nism.

Safety belt reminder for driver's andpassenger's seat

The indicator lamp lights up and a sig‐nal sounds. Make sure that the safetybelts are positioned correctly. The

safety belt reminder is active at speeds aboveapprox. 6 mph/10 km/h. It can also be activatedif objects are placed on the front passengerseat.

Safety modeIn critical situations, e.g., during full brake ap‐plication, the front safety belts tighten auto‐matically.If the situation passes without an accident oc‐curring, the belt tension relaxes.If the belt tension does not loosen automati‐cally, stop the vehicle and unbuckle the beltusing the red button in the buckle. Fasten thebelt before continuing on your trip.

Damage to safety beltsWear and tear after accidents or when dam‐aged otherwise:Have the safety belts, including the safety belttensioners, replaced and have the belt anchorschecked.

Check and replace safety beltsThis should only be done by your service

center; otherwise, this safety feature might notwork properly.◀

Front head restraintsCorrectly adjusted head restraintA correctly adjusted head restraint reduces therisk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the eventof an accident.

Adjusting the head restraintAdjust the head restraints of all occupied

seats properly; otherwise, there is an increasedrisk of injury in an accident.◀

HeightAdjust the head restraint so that its center isapproximately at ear level.

DistanceAdjust the distance so that the head restraintis as close as possible to the back of the head.

Seite 58

Controls Adjusting

58Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 63: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Active head restraintIn the event of a rear-end collision with a cer‐tain severity, the active head restraint automat‐ically reduces the distance from the head.

Reduced protective function▷ Do not use seat or head restraint

covers.▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,

on the head restraints.▷ Only attach accessories approved by BMW

to the seat or head restraint.Otherwise, the protective function of the activehead restraint will be impaired and the per‐sonal safety of the occupants will be endan‐gered.◀

Wear and tear after accidents or when dam‐aged otherwise:Have the active headrest checked and ifneeded replaced.

Adjusting the height: manual headrestraints

▷ To raise: push.▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push

headrest down.

Adjusting the height: electrical headrestraints

Adjusting electrically.

Distance to the back of the head:manual head restraints

▷ Forward: by pulling.▷ Back: press the button and push the head

restraint toward the rear.

Distance to the back of the head:electrical head restraintsThe head restraint is automatically reposi‐tioned when the shoulder support is adjusted.

Seite 59

Adjusting Controls

59Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 64: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Adjusting the side extensions

Fold forward for increased lateral support inthe resting position.

RemovingThe head restraints cannot be removed.

Rear head restraintsCorrectly adjusted head restraintA correctly adjusted head restraint reduces therisk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the eventof an accident.

Adjusting the head restraintAdjust the head restraints of all occupied

seats properly; otherwise, there is an increasedrisk of injury in an accident.◀

HeightAdjust the head restraint so that its center isapproximately at ear level.

DistanceAdjust the distance so that the head restraintis as close as possible to the back of the head.

Adjusting the height

▷ To raise: push.▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push

headrest down.

Folding forward

Press button, arrow 1, and fold the head re‐straint forward.

RemovingOnly remove the head restraint if no one will besitting in the seat in question.

1. Raise the head restraint up against the re‐sistance.

Seite 60

Controls Adjusting

60Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 65: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

2. Press button, arrow 1, and pull the head re‐straint out completely.

Before transporting passengersReinstall the head restraint before trans‐

porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐able.◀

Seat, mirror, and steeringwheel memoryThe conceptTwo driver's seat and exterior mirror positionscan be stored per profile, refer to page 35, andcalled up. Settings for the backrest width andlumbar support are not stored in memory.

HintsDo not retrieve the memory while drivingDo not retrieve the memory setting while

driving, as an unexpected movement of theseat or steering wheel could result in an acci‐dent.◀

Keep the movement area unobstructedWhen changing the seat position, keep

the seat's area of movement unobstructed;otherwise, people might get injured or objectsdamaged.◀

At a glance

Front

Storing1. Switch on the ignition.2. Set the desired position.

3. Press button. The LED in the but‐ton lights up.

4. Press selected button 1 or 2 while the LEDis lit. The LED goes out.

If the SET button is pressed accidentally:Press button again.The LED goes out.

Calling up settings

Comfort function1. Open the driver's door.2. Switch off the ignition.3. Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2.The corresponding seat position is performedautomatically.The procedure stops when a reel for adjustingthe seat or one of the buttons is pressed.

Safety mode1. Close the driver's door or reel on the igni‐

tion.2. Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2

until the adjustment procedure is com‐pleted.

Calling up of a seat positiondeactivatedAfter a brief period, calling up stored seat posi‐tions is deactivated to save battery power.To reactivate calling up of a seat position:▷ Open or close the door or trunk lid.▷ Press a button on the remote control.▷ Press the Start/Stop button.

Seite 61

Adjusting Controls

61Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 66: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

MirrorsExterior mirrors

General informationThe mirror on the passenger side is morecurved than the driver's side mirror.Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mir‐ror setting is stored for the profile currently inuse. When the vehicle is unlocked via the re‐mote control, the position is automatically re‐trieved if this function is active.

NoteEstimating distances correctlyObjects reflected in the mirror are closer

than they appear. Do not estimate the distanceto the traffic behind you based on what yousee in the mirror, as this will increase your riskof an accident.◀

At a glance

1 Adjusting  622 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor3 Fold in and out  62

Selecting a mirrorTo change over to the other mirror:Slide the switch.

Adjusting electricallyThe setting corresponds to the direc‐tion in which the button is pressed.

Saving positionsSeat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, referto page 61.

Adjusting manuallyIn case of electrical malfunction press edges ofmirror.

Automatic Curb Monitor

The conceptIf reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass onthe front passenger side is tilted downward.This improves your view of the curb and otherlow-lying obstacles when parking, e.g.

Activating

1. Slide the switch to the driver's sidemirror position.

2. Engage selector lever position R.

DeactivatingSlide the switch to the passenger side mirrorposition.

Fold in and outPress button.

Possible at speeds up to approx.15 mph/20 km/h.E. g. this is advantageous▷ In car washes.▷ In narrow streets.▷ For folding mirrors back out that were

folded away manually.

Seite 62

Controls Adjusting

62Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 67: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐matically at a speed of approx.25 mph/40 km/h.

Fold in the mirror in a car washBefore washing the car in an automatic

car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors by hand orwith the button; otherwise, the mirrors couldbe damaged, depending on the width of thevehicle.◀

Automatic heatingBoth exterior mirrors are automatically heatedwhenever the engine is running.

Automatic dimming featureBoth exterior mirrors are automatically dim‐med. Photocells are used to control the Interiorrearview mirror, refer to page 63.

Interior rearview mirror, manuallydimmable

Turn knob

Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect bythe interior mirror.

Interior rearview mirror, automaticdimming feature

The concept

Photocells are used for control:▷ In the mirror glass.▷ On the back of the mirror.

Functional requirementFor proper operation:▷ Keep the photocells clean.▷ Do not cover the area between the inside

rearview mirror and the windshield.

Steering wheelNote

Do not adjust while drivingDo not adjust the steering wheel while

driving; otherwise, an unexpected movementcould result in an accident.◀

Seite 63

Adjusting Controls

63Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 68: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Manual steering wheel adjustment

1. Fold the lever down.2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred

height and angle to suit your seating posi‐tion.

3. Fold the lever back.

Power steering wheel adjustment

The steering wheel can be adjusted in four di‐rections.

Storing the positionSeat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, referto page 61.

Steering wheel heating

Press button.

▷ On: the LED lights up.▷ Off: the LED goes out.If the trip is resumed within approx. 15 min,steering wheel heating is automatically acti‐vated again.

Seite 64

Controls Adjusting

64Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 69: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Transporting children safelyVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems.

The right place for childrenNote

Children in the vehicleDo not leave children unattended in the

vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them‐selves and other persons, e.g., by opening thedoors.◀

Children should always be in the rearAccident research shows that the safest placefor children is in the back seat.

Transporting children in the rearOnly transport children younger than

13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm inthe rear in child restraint systems provided inaccordance with the age, weight and size ofthe child; otherwise, there is an increased riskof injury in an accident.Children 13 years of age or older must wear asafety belt as soon as a suitable child restraintsystem can no longer be used due to their age,weight and size.◀

Children on the front passenger seatShould it ever be necessary to use a child re‐straint system in the front passenger seat,make sure that the front, knee and side airbagson the front passenger side are deactivated.Automatic deactivation of front-seat passen‐ger airbags, refer to page 110.

NoteDeactivating the front-seat passengerairbags

If a child restraint system is used in the frontpassenger seat, deactivate the front-seat pas‐senger airbags; otherwise, there is an in‐creased risk of injury to the child when the air‐bags are activated, even with a child restraintsystem.◀

Installing child restraintsystemsHints

Manufacturer's information for child re‐straint systems

To select, mount and use child restraint sys‐tems, observe the information provided by thesystem manufacturer; otherwise, the protec‐tive effect can be lost.◀

Ensuring the stability of the child seatWhen installing child restraint systems,

make sure that the child seat is securely fas‐tened to the backrest of the seat. Angle andheadrest of the backrest might need to be ad‐justed or possibly be removed. Make sure thatall backrests are securely locked. Otherwisethe stability of the child seat can be affected,and there is an increased risk of injury because

Seite 65

Transporting children safely Controls

65Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 70: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

of unexpected movement of the rear seatbackrest.◀

On the front passenger seat

Deactivating airbagsDeactivating the front-seat passengerairbags

If a child restraint system is used in the frontpassenger seat, deactivate the front-seat pas‐senger airbags; otherwise, there is an in‐creased risk of injury to the child when the air‐bags are activated, even with a child restraintsystem.◀

After installing a child restraint system in thefront passenger seat, make sure that the front,knee and side airbags on the front passengerside are deactivated.Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbagsautomatically, refer to page 110.

Seat position and heightBefore installing a child restraint system, movethe front passenger seat as far back as possi‐ble and bring it up to medium height to obtainthe best possible position for the belt and tooffer optimal protection in the event of an acci‐dent.If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo‐cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat,move the passenger seat carefully forward un‐til the best possible belt guide position isreached.

Child seat security

The rear safety belts and the front passengersafety belt can be permanently locked to fas‐ten child restraint systems.

Locking the safety belt1. Pull out the strap completely.2. Secure the child restraint system with the

belt.3. Allow the strap to be pulled in and pull it

tight against the child restraint system.The safety belt is locked.

Unlocking the safety belt1. Unbuckle the belt buckle.2. Remove the child restraint system.3. Allow the strap to be pulled in completely.

LATCH child restraintsystemLATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil‐dren.

NoteFollow manufacturer's information forLATCH child restraint systems

To mount and use the LATCH child restraintsystems, observe the operating and safety in‐formation from the system manufacturer; oth‐erwise, the level of protection may be re‐duced.◀

Seite 66

Controls Transporting children safely

66Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 71: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchorsThe lower anchors may be used to attach theCRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined childand CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the childis restrained by the internal harnesses.

Properly engage the lower LATCH an‐chors

Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors haveproperly engaged and that the child restraintsystem is resting snugly against the backrest;otherwise, the degree of protection may be re‐duced.◀

Before mounting the LATCH child restraintsystem, pull the belt away from the child re‐straint system.

The corresponding symbol shows themounts for the lower LATCH anchors.

Without a through-loading system:Position

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are lo‐cated in the gap between the seat and back‐rest.

With a through-loading system:Position

Attach to the lower LATCH anchors locatedbehind the indicated covers.

Assembly of LATCH child restraintsystems1. Mount the child restraint system; refer to

the user's manual of the system.2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐

erly connected.

Child restraint fixing system with atether strap

Mounting points

Depending on the vehicle equipment, there aretwo outer or three mounting points for the up‐per retaining strap of the child restraint sys‐tems.

The mounting point for the upper re‐taining strap is marked with a TopTether symbol.

Seite 67

Transporting children safely Controls

67Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 72: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

NoteMounting eyeletsUse the mounting eyes only for the up‐

per retaining strap to secure child restraintsystems; otherwise, the mounting eyes couldbe damaged.◀

Retaining strap guideRetaining strapMake sure the upper retaining strap does

not run over sharp edges and is not twisted asit passes to the top anchor. Otherwise, thestrap will not properly secure the child restraintsystem in the event of an accident.◀

1 Direction of travel2 Head restraint3 Hook for upper retaining strap4 Mounting point5 Rear window shelf6 Seat backrest7 Upper retaining strap

Attaching the upper retaining strap tothe mounting point1. Remove the mounting point cover.2. Raise the head restraint. Do not change

the middle head restraint.3. Guide the upper retaining strap between

the supports of the head restraint.4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to

the mounting eye.

5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling itdown.

6. Lower and lock head restraints as needed.

Locking the doors andwindowsRear doors

Push the locking lever on the rear doors down.

The door can now be opened from the outsideonly.

Safety reel for the rearPress button on the driver's door ifchildren are being transported in the

rear.

This locks various functions so that they can‐not be operated from the rear: safety reel, referto page 49.

Seite 68

Controls Transporting children safely

68Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 73: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

DrivingVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems.

Start/Stop buttonThe concept

Pressing the Start/Stop buttonswitches the ignition on or offand starts the engine.Steptronic transmission: Theengine starts if the brakes are

stepped on while pressing the Start/Stop but‐ton.Manual transmission: The engine starts withthe clutch pedal pressed when the Start/Stopbutton is pressed.

Ignition onSteptronic transmission: Press the Start/Stopbutton without stepping on the brake.Manual transmission: Press the Start/Stop but‐ton without stepping on the clutch pedal.All vehicle systems are ready for operation.Most of the indicator and warning lights in theinstrument cluster light up for a varied lengthof time.To save battery power when the engine is off,reel off the ignition and any unnecessary elec‐tronic systems/power consumers.

NoteIf the engine is switched off and the ignition isswitched on, the system automaticallyswitches to the radio-ready state if the lightsare turned off or, if correspondingly equipped,the daytime running lights are activated.

Ignition offSteptronic transmission: Press the Start/Stopbutton again without stepping on the brake.Manual transmission: Press the Start/Stop but‐ton again without stepping on the clutch pedal.All indicator lights in the instrument cluster goout.To save battery power when the engine is off,reel off the ignition and any unnecessary elec‐tronic systems/power consumers.

P when the ignition is switched offP is engaged automatically when the ig‐

nition is switched off. When in an automatic carwash, e.g., ensure that the ignition is notswitched off accidentally.◀

The ignition automatically cuts off while thevehicle is stationary and the engine is stopped:▷ When locking the vehicle, and when the

low beams are activated.▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged

completely, so that the engine can still bestarted. This function is only availablewhen the low beams are turned off.

▷ When opening or closing the driver door, ifthe driver's safety belt is unbuckled andthe low beams are turned off.

▷ While the driver's safety belt is unbuckledwith driver's door open and low beams off.

The low beams reel to parking lights after ap‐prox. 15 minutes of no use.

Seite 69

Driving Controls

69Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 74: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Radio ready stateActivate radio-ready state:▷ When the engine is running: press the

Start/Stop button.Some electronic systems/power consumersremain ready for operation.The radio-ready state switches off automati‐cally:▷ After approx. 8 minutes.▷ When the vehicle is locked using the cen‐

tral locking system.▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged

completely, so that the engine can still bestarted.

The radio-ready state remains active if, e.g.,the ignition is automatically switched off for thefollowing reasons:▷ Opening or closing the driver's door.▷ Unfastening of the driver's safety belt.▷ When automatically switching from low

beams to parking lights.

Starting the engineHints

Enclosed areasDo not let the engine run in enclosed

areas, since breathing in exhaust fumes maylead to loss of consciousness and death. Theexhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, anodorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.◀

Unattended vehicleDo not leave the vehicle unattended with

the engine running; doing so poses a risk ofdanger.Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐ning, set the parking brake and place the trans‐mission in selector lever position P or N to pre‐vent the vehicle from moving.◀

Repeated starting in quick successionAvoid trying to start the vehicle repeat‐

edly and in quick succession. Otherwise, thefuel is not burned or is inadequately burned,posing a risk of overheating and damage to thecatalytic converter.◀

Do not wait for the engine to warm-up whilethe vehicle remains stationary. Start driving atmoderate engine speeds.

Diesel engineIf the engine is cold and temperatures are be‐low approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃, the start process maybe delayed somewhat due to automatic pre‐heating.A Check Control message is displayed.

Steptronic transmission

Starting the engine1. Depress the brake pedal.2. Press the Start/Stop button.The ignition is activated automatically for acertain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐gine starts.

Manual transmission

Starting the engine1. Depress the brake pedal.2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to neu‐

tral.3. Press the Start/Stop button.The ignition is activated automatically for acertain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐gine starts.

Seite 70

Controls Driving

70Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 75: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Engine stopHints

Take the remote control with youTake the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, e.g., can‐not start the engine.◀

Apply parking brake and further securethe vehicle if needed.

Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upwardand downward inclines, further secure the ve‐hicle, e.g., by turning the steering wheel in thedirection of the curb.◀

Before driving into a car washSo that the vehicle can roll into a car wash ob‐serve instructions for going into an automaticcar wash, refer to page 248.

Steptronic transmission

Switching off the engine1. Engage selector lever position P with the

vehicle stopped.2. Press the Start/Stop button.

The engine is switched off.The radio-ready state is switched on.

3. Set the parking brake.

Manual transmission

Switching off the engine1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the

Start/Stop button.2. Shift into first gear or reverse.3. Set the parking brake.

Auto Start/Stop functionThe conceptThe Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.The system switches off the engine during astop, e.g., in traffic congestion or at trafficlights. The ignition remains switched on. Theengine starts again automatically for drivingoff.

Automatic modeAfter every start of the engine using the Start/Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop function is inthe last selected state, refer to page 73.When the Auto Start Stop function is active, itis available when the vehicle is traveling fasterthan about 3 mph, approx. 5 km/h.

Engine stopThe engine is switched off automatically dur‐ing a stop under the following conditions:Steptronic transmission:▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐

tion D.▷ The brake pedal remains pressed while the

vehicle is stationary or the vehicle is heldby Automatic Hold.

▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or thedriver's door is closed.

Manual transmission:▷ Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal is

not pressed.▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the

driver's door is closed.The air flow from the air conditioner is reducedwhen the engine is switched off.

Displays in the instrument clusterThe display indicates that theAuto Start/Stop function isready for an Automatic enginestart.

Seite 71

Driving Controls

71Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 76: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

The display indicates that theconditions for an automatic en‐gine stop have not been met.

NoteThe engine is not switched off automatically inthe following situations:▷ External temperature too low.▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐

matic climate control is running.▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated

or cooled to the required level.▷ The engine is not yet at operating temper‐

ature.▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the

steering wheel is being turned.▷ After driving in reverse.▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐

matic climate control is switched on.▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.▷ At higher elevations.▷ The engine compartment lid is unlocked.▷ HDC Hill Descent Control is activated.▷ The parking assistant is activated.▷ Stop-and-go traffic.▷ The selector lever is in position N, M/S or

R.▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content.

Starting the engineThe engine starts automatically under the fol‐lowing conditions:▷ Steptronic transmission:

By releasing the brake pedal.When Automatic Hold is activated: pressthe accelerator pedal.

▷ Manual transmission:The clutch pedal is pressed.

After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.

Safety modeAfter the engine switches off automatically, itwill not start again automatically if any one ofthe following conditions are met.▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and

the driver's door is open.▷ The hood was unlocked.Some indicator lights light up for a variedlength of time.The engine can only be started via the Start/Stop button.

NoteEven if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐lowing situations:▷ Excessive warming of the car's interior

when the cooling function is switched on.▷ The steering wheel is turned.▷ Steptronic transmission: change from se‐

lector lever position D to R, N or M/S.▷ Steptronic transmission: change from se‐

lector lever position P to N, D, R or M/S.▷ The vehicle begins rolling.▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐

matic climate control is switched on.▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.▷ Excessive cooling of the car's interior when

the heating is switched on.▷ Low brake vacuum pressure; this can oc‐

cur, e.g., if the brake pedal is depressed anumber of times in succession.

Seite 72

Controls Driving

72Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 77: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Activating/deactivating the systemmanually

Using the button

Press button.

▷ LED comes on: Auto Start/Stop function isdeactivated.The engine is started during an automaticengine stop.The engine can only be stopped or startedvia the Start/Stop button.

▷ LED goes out: Auto Start/Stop function isactivated.

Switching off the vehicle during anautomatic engine stopDuring an automatic engine stop, the vehiclecan be switched off permanently, e.g., whenleaving it.

1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition isswitched off. The Auto Start/Stop functionis deactivated.Selector lever position P is engaged auto‐matically.

2. Set the parking brake.Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.

Automatic deactivationIn certain situations, Auto Start/Stop functionis deactivated automatically for safety reasonsas if the driver were absent.

MalfunctionThe Auto Start/Stop function no longerswitches off the engine automatically. A CheckControl message is displayed. It is possible tocontinue driving. Have the system checked.

Parking brakeThe conceptThe parking brake is used to prevent the vehi‐cle from rolling when it is parked.

At a glance

SettingApply parking brake and further securethe vehicle if needed.

Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upwardand downward inclines, further secure the ve‐hicle, e.g., by turning the steering wheel in thedirection of the curb.◀

Take the remote control with youTake the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, e.g., can‐not release the parking brake.◀

Pull the reel.The LED lights up.

The indicator lamp lights up red. Theparking brake is set.

Seite 73

Driving Controls

73Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 78: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

While drivingUse as emergency brake while driving:Pull the reel and hold it. The vehicle brakeshard while the reel is being pulled.

The indicator lamp lights up red, a sig‐nal sounds and the brake lights lightup.

A Check Control message is displayed.

If the vehicle is slowed down down to a speedof approx. 2 mph/3 km/h the parking brake isset.

ReleasingWith the ignition switched on:

Manual transmission: Press the reelwhile the brake or clutch pedal is

pressed.Steptronic transmission: Press the reel whilethe brake is pressed or selector lever positionP is set.The LED and indicator lamp go out.

The parking brake is released.

Automatic release in cars withSteptronic transmission

Inadvertent operation of the acceleratorpedal

Make sure that the accelerator pedal is not op‐erated unintentionally; otherwise, the vehicle isset in motion and there is a risk of an acci‐dent.◀

For automatic release, step on the acceleratorpedal.The LED and indicator lamp go out.The parking brake is automatically releasedwhen you step on the accelerator:▷ Engine on.▷ Drive mode engaged.▷ Driver buckled in and doors closed.

Automatic release in cars with manualtransmissionDrive off as usual. The parking brake disen‐gages when the clutch pedal is released.The LED and indicator lamp go out.Under the following conditions, the parkingbrake is automatically released:▷ Engine on.▷ Gear engaged.▷ Driver buckled in and doors closed.▷ Engine power is sufficient to drive off.

Inadvertent operation of the clutch pedalMake sure that the clutch pedal is not

operated unintentionally; otherwise, the vehi‐cle is set in motion when the clutch is released,and there is a risk of an accident.◀

Automatic Hold

The conceptThis system assists the driver by automaticallysetting and releasing the brake, such as whenmoving in stop-and-go traffic.The vehicle is automatically held in place whenit is stationary.On inclines, the system prevents the vehiclefrom rolling backward when driving off.

Seite 74

Controls Driving

74Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 79: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Safety informationSecure the vehicle against rollingBefore leaving the vehicle with the en‐

gine running, engage position P of the Step‐tronic transmission and ensure that the park‐ing brake is set. Otherwise, the vehicle maybegin to move.◀

Under the following conditions, AutomaticHold is automatically deactivated and the park‐ing brake is set:▷ The engine is switched off.▷ A door is opened and driver's safety belt is

unbuckled while the vehicle is stationary.▷ The moving vehicle is brought to a stand‐

still using the parking brake.The indicator lamp switches fromgreen to red and the letters AUTO H goout.

ActivatingThis function can be activated when the driv‐er's door is closed, the safety belt is fastenedand the engine is running.

Press button.The LED and the letters AUTO H light

up.

The indicator lamp lights up.Automatic Hold is activated.

DeactivatingPress button again.The LED and the letters AUTO H go

out.

Automatic Hold is deactivated.If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,press on the brake pedal to deactivate it.When the parking brake is set manually, Auto‐matic Hold is deactivated automatically.

sDrivingAutomatic Hold is activated: the vehicle is au‐tomatically secured against rolling after brak‐ing to a standstill.

The indicator lamp lights up green.Step on the accelerator pedal to driveoff.

The brake is released automatically.The indicator lamp goes out.

Before driving into a car washBefore driving into the car wash, deacti‐

vate Automatic Hold; otherwise, the parkingbrake will be set when the vehicle is stationaryand the vehicle will no longer be able to roll.◀

ParkingThe parking brake is automatically set if theengine is switched off while the vehicle is be‐ing held by Automatic Hold.

The indicator lamp changes from greento red.The parking brake is not set if the en‐

gine is switched off while the vehicle is coast‐ing to a halt. Automatic Hold is deactivated.

Automatic Hold remains activated during theengine stop brought about by the Auto Start/Stop function.

Take the remote control with youTake the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, e.g., can‐not release the parking brake.◀

MalfunctionIn the event of a failure or malfunction of theparking brake, secure the vehicle against roll‐ing using a wheel chock, e.g., when leaving it.

Seite 75

Driving Controls

75Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 80: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

After a power failure

Putting the parking brake intooperation1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Press the reel while stepping on thebrake pedal or selector lever position P isset.

It may take several seconds for the brake to beput into operation. Any sounds associated withthis are normal.

The indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out as soon as the parkingbrake is ready for operation.

Turn signal, high beams,headlight flasherTurn signal

HintsDo not adjust the exterior mirrorsDo not adjust the exterior mirror while

driving and when blinker/hazards are on, orelse the additional blinker lights in the exteriormirror are out of position and can't be seen.◀

Using turn signals

Press the lever beyond the resistance point.To reel off manually, press the lever to the re‐sistance point.

Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lampindicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.

Triple turn signal activationPress the lever to the resistance point.The turn signal flashes three times.The function can be activated or deactivated.On the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Lighting"3. "Triple turn signal"Settings are stored for the profile currently inuse.

Signaling brieflyPress the lever to the resistance point and holdit there for as long as you want the turn signalto flash.

High beams, headlight flasher

▷ High beams, arrow 1.▷ Headlight flasher, arrow 2.

Seite 76

Controls Driving

76Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 81: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Washer/wiper systemSwitching the wipers on/off and briefwipe

HintsDo not activate wipers if frozen to wind‐shield

Do not reel on the wipers if they are frozen tothe windshield; otherwise, the wiper bladesand the wiper motor may be damaged.◀

Do not activate wipers on dry windshieldDo not use the wipers if the windshield is

dry, as this may damage the wiper blades orcause them to become worn more quickly.◀

Switching on

Push wiper lever up.The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐sition when released.▷ Normal wiper speed: push up once.

The wipers reel to intermittent operationwhen the vehicle is stationary.

▷ Fast wiper speed: press up twice or pressonce beyond the resistance point.Wipers change to normal speed when ve‐hicle comes to standstill.

Switch off and brief wipe

Push wiper lever down.The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐sition when released.▷ Single wipe: press down once.▷ To reel off normal wipe: press down once.▷ To reel off fast wipe: press down twice.

Rain sensor

The conceptThe rain sensor automatically controls the timebetween wipes depending on the intensity ofthe rainfall. The sensor is located on the wind‐shield, directly behind the interior rearview mir‐ror.

Activating/deactivating

Press button on the wiper lever.Wiping is started. If the vehicle is equippedwith a rain sensor: LED in wiper lever lights up.When wipers are frozen to windshield, wiperoperation is deactivated.During trip interruption with the rain sensorswitched on: if the trip is resumed within ap‐

Seite 77

Driving Controls

77Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 82: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

prox. 15 minutes, the rain sensor is automati‐cally activated again.

Deactivate the rain sensor in car washesDeactivate the rain sensor when passing

through an automatic car wash; otherwise, un‐intentional wiping can cause damages.◀

Rain sensor, sensitivity

Turn the thumbwheel.

Clean the windshield, headlights

Pull the wiper lever towards you.The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐shield and activates the wipers briefly.

In addition, the headlights are cleaned at regu‐lar intervals when the vehicle's lights are acti‐vated.

Do not use the washer system at freezingtemperatures

Do not use the washers if fluid could freezeonto the windshield which might impede yourviewing field. Therefore use antifreeze fluid.

Avoid using the washer when the reservoir isempty; operation might damage pump.◀

Windshield washer nozzlesThe windshield washer nozzles are automati‐cally heated while the ignition is switched on.

Fold-out position of the wipersFold wipers back when you want to change theblades or with pending low temperatures.

1. Switch the ignition on and off again.2. With icy conditions make sure that blades

are not frozen to the windshield.3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point

of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec‐onds, until the wiper remains in a nearlyvertical position.

After the wipers are folded back down, thewiper system must be reactivated.

Folding wipers back downBefore switching the ignition on, fold the

wipers back down to the windshield; other‐wise, the wipers may become damaged whenthey are activated.◀

1. Switch on the ignition.2. Push wiper lever down. Wipers move to

their resting position and are ready againfor operation.

Washer fluidGeneral information

Antifreeze for washer fluidAntifreeze is flammable and can cause

injury if it is used incorrectly.Therefore, keep it away from possible sourcesof ignition.Only keep it in the closed original containerand inaccessible to children.

Seite 78

Controls Driving

78Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 83: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Follow the notes and instructions on the con‐tainer.United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio isregulated by the U.S. EPA and many individualstates; do not exceed the allowable washerfluid dilution ratios limits that apply. Follow theusage instructions on the washer fluid con‐tainer. Use BMW’s Windshield Washer Con‐centrate or the equivalent.◀

Washer fluid reservoirAdding washer fluidOnly add washer fluid when the engine is

cool, and then close the cover completely toavoid contact between the washer fluid andhot engine parts.Otherwise, there is a danger of fire and a risk topersonal safety if the fluid is spilled.◀

All washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐ervoir.Fill with a mixture of windshield washer con‐centrate and tap water and – if required – with awasher antifreeze, according to the manufac‐turer's recommendations.Mix the washer fluid before adding to find theright mixture.Do not add windshield washer concentrate andantifreeze undiluted and do not fill with purewater; this could damage the wiper system.Do not mix window washer concentrates of dif‐ferent manufacturers because they can clogthe windshield washer nozzles.

Recommended minimum fill quantity:0.2 US gal/1 liter.

Manual transmissionShifting

Shifting into 5th or 6th gearWhen shifting into 5th or 6th gear, push

the gearshift lever to the right; otherwise, inad‐vertent shifting into 3rd or 4th gear could leadto engine damage.◀

Reverse gearSelect only when the vehicle is stationary.To overcome the resistance push the selectorlever dynamically to the left and engage the re‐verse gear.

Steptronic transmissionSelector lever positions

D DriveSelector lever position for normal vehicle oper‐ation. All gears for forward travel are activatedautomatically.

R is ReverseSelect only when the vehicle is stationary.

N Neutral:The vehicle may roll. Use in automatic carwashes, e.g.When the ignition is switched off, refer topage 69, selector lever position P is engagedautomatically.

P ParkSelect only when the vehicle is stationary. Thedrive wheels are blocked.P is engaged automatically:

Seite 79

Driving Controls

79Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 84: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

▷ After the engine is switched off when thevehicle is in radio-ready state, refer topage 70, or when the ignition is switchedoff, refer to page 69, and when position Ror D is set.

▷ With the ignition off, if selector lever posi‐tion N is set.

▷ If the safety belt is unbuckled, the driver'sdoor is opened, and the brake pedal is notpressed while the vehicle is stationary andposition D or R is set.

Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that se‐lector lever position P is set. Otherwise, the ve‐hicle may begin to move.

KickdownKickdown is used to achieve maximum drivingperformance. Step on the accelerator pedalbeyond the resistance point at the full throttleposition.

Engaging selector lever positionsPress on the brake pedal until you startdriving

To prevent the vehicle from creeping after youselect a gear, maintain pressure on the brakepedal until you are ready to start.◀

▷ It is not possible to shift out of selectorlever position P until the engine is runningand the brake is applied.

▷ With the vehicle is stationary, press on thebrake pedal before shifting out of P or N;otherwise, the shift command will not beexecuted: shift lock.

Engaging D, R and N

Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di‐rection, beyond a resistance point if needed.After releasing the selector lever, it returns toits center position.

Press unlock button, in order to:▷ Engage R.▷ Shift out of P.

Engaging P

Press button P.

Seite 80

Controls Driving

80Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 85: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Sport program and manual mode

Activating the sport program

Press the selector lever to the left out of selec‐tor lever position D.The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐ment cluster, e.g., S1.The sport program of the transmission is acti‐vated.

Activating the M/S manual mode1. Press the selector lever to the left out of

selector lever position D.2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it

backward.Manual mode becomes active and the gear ischanged.The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐ment cluster, e.g., M1.Once maximum engine speed is attained, M/Smanual mode is automatically upshifted asneeded.

Switching to manual mode▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐

ward.▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rear‐

wards.Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engineand road speeds, for example downshifting isnot possible if the engine speed is too high.

The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐strument cluster, followed by the currently se‐lected gear.

Not M550d xDrive: Steptronic Sporttransmission: prevent automaticupshifting in M/S manual modeIn cars with Steptronic Sport transmission, au‐tomatic shift operations are not performed e.g.at maximum engine speed, if one of the follow‐ing conditions is met:▷ DSC deactivated.▷ TRACTION activated.▷ SPORT+ activated.In addition, the kickdown is deactivated.

Ending the sport program/manualmodePush the selector lever to the right.D is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Shift paddles

The shift paddles on the steering wheel allowyou to shift gears quickly while keeping bothhands on the steering wheel.▷ Shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle.▷ Shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle.▷ Shift down into the lowest possible gear:

pull and hold left shift paddle.Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engineand road speeds, for example downshifting isnot possible if the engine speed is too high.

Seite 81

Driving Controls

81Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 86: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐strument cluster, followed by the current gear.If the shift paddles on the steering wheel areused to shift gears in automatic mode, thetransmission temporarily switches to manualmode.If the selector lever is still in selector lever po‐sition D, it is possible to reel back into the au‐tomatic mode:▷ Pull and hold right shift paddle.Or▷ In addition to the briefly pulled right shift

paddle, briefly pull the left shift paddle.In the manual mode, if there has been no ac‐celeration or shifting of the shift paddles withina certain amount of time, the transmissionswitches back to automatic mode.

Displays in the instrument clusterThe selector lever position is dis‐played, e.g.: P.

Electronic unlocking of thetransmission lock

General informationElectronically unlock the transmission lock tomaneuver vehicle from the danger area.Unlocking is possible, if the started can spinthe engine.

Engaging selector lever position N1. Depress the brake pedal.2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter

must audibly start.3. Press and hold the selector lever into posi‐

tion N.A corresponding Check Control messageis displayed.

4. Press the selector lever again into posi‐tion N within approx. 6 seconds.Position N is displayed in the instrumentcluster.

5. Release brake, as soon as the starterstops.

6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger areaand secure it against moving on its own.

Steptronic Sport transmission:Launch Control

The conceptLaunch Control enables optimum accelerationon surfaces with good traction.

HintsComponent wearDo not use Launch Control too often;

otherwise, this may result in premature wear ofcomponents due to the high stress placed onthe vehicle.◀

Do not use Launch Control during the break-in,refer to page 188, period.To increase vehicle stability, activate DSCagain as soon as possible.An experienced driver may be able to achievebetter acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.

RequirementsLaunch Control is available when the engine iswarmed up, that is, after uninterrupted drivingof at least 6 miles/10 km.To start with Launch Control do not steer thesteering wheel.

Start with launch controlWhile the engine is running:

1. Press button or select Sport+ withthe Driving Dynamics Control.

Seite 82

Controls Driving

82Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 87: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

TRACTION is displayed in the instrumentcluster and the indicator lamp for DSC OFFlights up.

2. Engage selector lever position S.3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on

the brake.4. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal

beyond the resistance point at the fullthrottle position.A flag symbol is displayed in the instru‐ment cluster.

5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within3 seconds, release the brake.

Before using Launch Control, allow the trans‐mission to cool down for approx. 5 minutes.Launch Control adjusts to the surroundingconditions, e.g., wet pavement, when usedagain.

Seite 83

Driving Controls

83Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 88: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

DisplaysVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems.

Overview, instrument cluster

1 Fuel gauge  922 Speedometer3 Messages, e.g. Check Control4 Tachometer  92

5 Engine oil temperature  926 Electronic displays  847 Reset miles  92

Electronic displays▷ Selection lists, refer to page 96.▷ External temperature, refer to page 93.▷ Auto Start/Stop function, refer to page 71.▷ Onboard computer, refer to page 97.

▷ Date, refer to page 93.▷ Energy recovery, refer to page 94.▷ Transmission display, refer to page 82.▷ Miles/trip miles, refer to page 92.

Seite 84

Controls Displays

84Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 89: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

▷ Messages, e.g. Check Control, refer topage 88.

▷ Current fuel consumption, refer topage 93.

▷ Navigation display, see User's manual forNavigation, Entertainment and Communi‐cation.

▷ Range, refer to page 93.▷ Status, Driving Dynamics Control, refer to

page 139.▷ Service requirements, refer to page 94.▷ Speed limit detection, refer to page 95.▷ Time, refer to page 93.

Multifunctional instrument displayThe conceptThe instrument display is a variable display. Inthe event of a program change, the displayrendition adapts to the respective programthrough the Driving Dynamics Control. Thechange of appearance can be deactivated onthe Control Display.

Some of the displays in the instrument displaymay differ from the way they are shown in thisOwner's Manual.

At a glance

1 Fuel gauge  922 Indicator/warning lights  883 Speedometer4 Variable displays

5 Tachometer  92Selection lists  96ECO PRO displays  196

6 Engine oil temperature  92

Seite 85

Displays Controls

85Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 90: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

7 Computer  97 8 Reset miles  92

Switching the change of display on and offYou can set whether the instrument displayautomatically changes to the ECO PRO orSPORT in the display when you reel drivingmodes.

1. "Settings"2. "Instrument cluster"3. "ECO PRO Info"

Or"Driving mode view"

With Professional Navigation System:switching zoom function on/offYou can program whether the current speed isto appear enlarged in the speedometer.

On the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Instrument cluster"3. "Magnifier function"

ECO PRO displays

1 Speedometer 2 Variable displays: ECO PRO Tips, Deceler‐ation assistant instructions, Driver assistsystem displays

Seite 86

Controls Displays

86Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 91: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

3 Efficiency display  1964 Transmission display

5 ▷ Blue: bonus range▷ Gray: range

In the ECO PRO program the instrument dis‐play switches to the ECO PRO displays. Thesedisplays support a driving style that saves on

fuel consumption with more prominent repre‐sentation of the efficiency display and variousECO PRO tips.

Sport displays

1 Speedometer2 Tachometer  923 Transmission display  82

4 Shift lights, when respectively equipped5 Performance display6 Variable displays

In the Sport and Sport+ programs the instru‐ment display switches to the sport displays.These displays support a sporty driving stylewith more prominent representation of thetachometer, the transmission displays, and thevehicle speed.

Shift lights in the instrument display

The conceptShift lights indicate the optimum shift momentin the multifunction instrument display. Thus,with a sporty driving style, the best possiblevehicle acceleration is achieved.

Seite 87

Displays Controls

87Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 92: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

General informationSteptronic Sport transmission: shift lights areshown, when the SPORT+ driving program isactivated.Manual transmission: shift lights are shown,when the SPORT or SPORT+ driving programis activated.

Switching on shift lightsSteptronic Sport transmission:

1. Select Sport+ using the Driving DynamicsControl.

2. Activate the M/S manual mode of thetransmission.

Manual transmission:

1. Select SPORT or SPORT+ using the Driv‐ing Dynamics Control.

2. Deactivate DSC if needed.

Display in the instrument display

▷ Current engine speed is displayed in thetachometer.

▷ Arrow 1: successive yellow illuminatedfields indicate an increase in the speed.

▷ Arrow 2: successive orange illuminatedfields indicate the upcoming shift moment.

▷ Arrow 3: fields are illuminated in red. Donot wait any further to shift.

When the maximum possible speed isreached, the entire display flashes. When themaximum speed is exceeded, the supply offuel is interrupted in order to protect the en‐gine. Speeds in this range must be avoided.

Check ControlThe conceptThe Check Control system monitors functionsin the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctionsin the monitored systems.A Check Control message is displayed as acombination of indicator or warning lights andtext messages in the instrument cluster and inthe Head-up Display.In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and atext message may appear on the Control Dis‐play.

Indicator/warning lights

General informationThe indicator and warning lights in the instru‐ment cluster can light up in a variety of combi‐nations and colors.Several of the lights are checked for properfunctioning and light up temporarily when theengine is started or the ignition is switched on.

Red lights

Safety belt reminderFlashing or illuminated: safety belt onthe driver or passenger side is notbuckled. The safety belt reminder can

also be activated if objects are placed on thefront passenger seat.Make sure that the safety belts are positionedcorrectly.

Airbag systemAirbag system and belt tensioner aredefective.Have the vehicle checked by the serv‐

ice center immediately.

Seite 88

Controls Displays

88Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 93: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Parking brakeThe parking brake is set.

For additional information, refer to Releaseparking brake, refer to page 74.

Brake systemContinue to drive moderately.Have the vehicle checked by the serv‐ice center immediately.

Front-end collision warningIlluminated: advance warning is issued,e.g., when there is the impending dan‐ger of a collision or the distance to the

vehicle ahead is too small.Increase distance.Flashing: acute warning of the imminent dan‐ger of a collision when the vehicle approachesanother vehicle at a relatively high differentialspeed.Intervention by braking or make an evasive ma‐neuver.

Pedestrian warningSymbol in the instrument cluster.

Symbol in the instrument display.

If a collision with a person detected in this wayis imminent, the symbol lights up and a signalsounds.

Orange lights

Active Cruise ControlThe number bars shows the selecteddistance from the vehicle drivingahead.

For additional information, refer to ActiveCruise Control with Stop & Go function, ACC,refer to page 143.

Vehicle detection, Active Cruise ControlIlluminated: vehicle driving ahead de‐tected.Flashing: the conditions are not ade‐

quate for operating the system.The system was deactivated but applies thebrakes until you actively resume control bypressing on the brake pedal or acceleratorpedal.

Yellow lights

Antilock Brake System ABSIt reduces the braking distance to aminimum during emergency stops.Illuminated: avoid abrupt braking if pos‐sible. Braking force boost in somecases defective. Stop carefully. Take

into account longer brake travel. Have thischecked by the service center immediately.

DSC Dynamic Stability ControlFlashing: DSC controls the drive andbraking forces. The vehicle is stabi‐lized. Reduce speed and adapt driving

profile to the driving circumstances.Illuminated: DSC failed. Have the systemchecked by the service center.For additional information, refer to DynamicStability Control DSC, refer to page 135.

Seite 89

Displays Controls

89Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 94: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

DSC Dynamic Stability Control isdeactivated or DTC Dynamic TractionControl is activated

Dynamic Stability Control DSC isswitched off or Dynamic Traction Con‐trol DTC is switched on.

For additional information, refer to DynamicStability Control, refer to page 135, and Dy‐namic Traction Control, refer to page 136.

FTM Flat Tire MonitorThe Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss oftire inflation pressure in a tire.Reduce your speed and stop cau‐

tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma‐neuvers.For more information, see Flat Tire Monitor, re‐fer to page 115.

Tire Pressure Monitor TPMIlluminated: the Tire Pressure Monitorsignals a loss of tire inflation pressurein a tire.

Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoidsudden braking and steering maneuvers.Flashing and then continuously illuminated: noflat tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can bedetected.▷ Interference through systems or devices

with the same radio frequency: after leav‐ing the area of the interference, the systemautomatically becomes active again.

▷ RDC could not conclude the reset: performthe reset of the system again.

▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted:have the service center check it if needed.

▷ Malfunction: have the system checked byyour service center.

For more information, see Tire Pressure Moni‐tor, refer to page 111.

Steering systemSteering system in some cases defec‐tive.Have the steering system checked by

the service center.

Engine functionsHave the vehicle checked by the serv‐ice center.For additional information, refer to On-

board Diagnostics socket, refer to page 233.

Lane departure warningSystem is switched on and under cer‐tain circumstances warns if a detectedlane is left without flashing beforehand.

For additional information, refer to Lane depar‐ture warning, refer to page 129.

Green lights

Turn signalTurn signal on.Unusually rapid flashing of the indicatorlamp indicates that a turn signal bulb

has failed.For additional information, refer to Turn signal,refer to page 76.

Parking lights, headlight controlParking lights or headlights are acti‐vated.For additional information, refer to

Parking lights/low beams, headlight control, re‐fer to page 103.

Front fog lightsFront fog lights are activated.

Seite 90

Controls Displays

90Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 95: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

For additional information, refer to Front foglights, refer to page 106.

High-beam AssistantHigh-beam Assistant is switched on.High beams are activated and off auto‐matically as a function of the traffic sit‐

uation.For additional information, refer to High-beamAssistant, refer to page 105.

Cruise controlThe system is switched on. It maintainsthe speed that was set using the con‐trol elements on the steering wheel.

Automatic HoldThe vehicle is automatically held inplace when it is stationary.On inclines, the system prevents the

vehicle from rolling backward when driving off.For more information, see Automatic Hold, re‐fer to page 74.

Blue lights

High beamsHigh beams are activated.For additional information, refer to Highbeams, refer to page 76.

General lamps

Check ControlAt least one Check Control message isdisplayed or is stored (symbol in dis‐play).

Text messagesText messages in combination with a symbolin the instrument cluster explain a Check Con‐trol message and the meaning of the indicatorand warning lights.

Supplementary text messagesAdditional information, such as on the cause ofan error or the required action, can be called upvia Check Control.With urgent messages the added text will beautomatically displayed on the Control Display.

SymbolsDepending on the Check Control message, thefollowing functions can be selected.▷ "Owner's Manual"

Display additional information about theCheck Control message in the IntegratedOwner's Manual.

▷ "Service request"Contact your service center.

▷ "Roadside Assistance"Contact Roadside Assistance.

Hiding Check Control messages

Press the onboard computer button on theturn signal lever.

▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐played continuously and are not cleareduntil the malfunction is eliminated. If sev‐eral malfunctions occur at once, the mes‐sages are displayed consecutively.

Seite 91

Displays Controls

91Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 96: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

These messages can be faded for approx.8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐played again automatically.

▷ Other Check Control messages are fadedautomatically after approx. 20 seconds.They are stored and can be displayedagain later.

Displaying stored Check ControlmessagesOn the Control Display:

1. "Vehicle info"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Check Control"4. Select the text message.

Messages after trip completionSpecial messages displayed while driving aredisplayed again after the ignition is switchedoff.

Fuel gaugeVehicle tilt position may causethe display to vary.Depending on the equipmentversion, the arrow beside thefuel pump symbol shows which

side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.Hints on refueling, refer to page 204.

TachometerAlways avoid engine speeds in the red warningfield. In this range, the fuel supply is inter‐rupted to protect the engine.

Engine oil temperature▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at

the low temperature end.Drive at moderate engineand vehicle speeds.

▷ Normal operating tempera‐ture: the pointer is in themiddle or in the left half ofthe temperature display.

▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high end ofthe temperature range. A Check Controlmessage is also displayed.

Coolant temperatureIf the coolant along with the engine becomestoo hot, a Check Control message is displayed.Check the coolant level, refer to page 231.

Odometer and trip odometerDisplay

▷ Odometer, arrow 1.▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2.

Show/reset kilometersPress the knob.▷ When the ignition is

switched off, the time, theexternal temperature andthe odometer are displayed.

▷ When the ignition is switched on, the tripodometer is reset.

Seite 92

Controls Displays

92Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 97: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

External temperatureIf the indicator drops to+37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a signalsounds.A Check Control message isdisplayed.

There is an increased risk of ice on roads.

Ice on roadsEven at temperatures above

+37 ℉/+3 ℃, roads might be icy.Therefore, drive carefully on bridges andshaded roads, e.g., to avoid the increased riskof an accident.◀

TimeThe time is displayed at the bot‐tom of the instrument cluster.Setting the time and time for‐mat, refer to page 99.

DateThe date is displayed in thecomputer.Setting the date and date for‐mat, refer to page 100.

RangeDisplay

With a low remaining range:▷ A Check Control message is

displayed briefly.▷ The remaining range is

shown on the computer.▷ With a dynamic driving style - e.g., taking

curves aggressively - engine operationmight vary.

The Check Control message appears continu‐ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.

Refuel promptlyRefuel no later than at a range of

30 miles/50 km or engine operation might failand damage might occur.◀

Displaying the cruising rangeDepending on your vehicle's optional features,the range can also be displayed as bar in theinstrument cluster.

1. "Settings"2. "Instrument cluster"3. "Additional indicators"

Range when destination guidance isactivated in the navigation system

With the appropriate equipment,when destination guidance isactivated in the navigation sys‐tem, the range up to the desti‐nation is displayed.

Current fuel consumptionDisplay

Depending on your vehicle's op‐tional features, the current fuelconsumption can be displayedin the instrument cluster. Checkwhether you are currently driv‐

ing in an efficient and environmentally-friendlymanner.

Displaying the current fuelconsumption1. "Settings"2. "Instrument cluster"3. "Additional indicators"

Seite 93

Displays Controls

93Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 98: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

The bar display for the current fuel consump‐tion is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Energy recoveryDisplay

The kinetic energy of the vehicleis converted to electrical energywhile coasting. The vehicle bat‐tery is partially charged and fuelconsumption can be reduced.

Service requirementsThe conceptAfter the ignition is turned on the instrumentcluster briefly displays available driving dis‐tance or time to the next scheduled mainte‐nance.Your service specialist can read the currentservice requirements from your remote con‐trol.

DisplayData regarding the service status or legallymandated vehicle inspections are automati‐cally transmitted to your service center beforea service due date.

Detailed information on servicerequirementsMore information on the scope of service re‐quired can be displayed on the Control Dis‐play.On the Control Display:

1. "Vehicle info"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Service required"

Required maintenance procedures and le‐gally mandated inspections are displayed.

4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐tion.

Symbols

Sym‐bols

Description

No service is currently required.

The deadline for scheduled mainte‐nance or a legally mandated inspec‐tion is approaching.

The service deadline has alreadypassed.

Entering appointment datesEnter the dates for the required inspections.Make sure that the vehicle's date and time areset correctly.On the Control Display:

1. "Vehicle info"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Service required"4. "§ Vehicle inspection"5. "Date:"6. Adjust the settings.7. Confirm.

The entered date is stored.

Automatic Service RequestData regarding the service status or legallymandated vehicle inspections are automati‐cally transmitted to your service center beforea service due date.You can check when your service center wasnotified.

Seite 94

Controls Displays

94Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 99: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

On the Control Display:

1. "Vehicle info"2. "Vehicle status"3. Open "Options".4. "Last Service Request"

Gear shift indicatorThe conceptThe system recommends the most fuel effi‐cient gear for the current driving situation.Depending on the vehicle's features and coun‐try version of the vehicle, the gear shift indica‐tor is active in the manual mode of the Step‐tronic transmission and with manualtransmission.Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis‐played in the instrument cluster.On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, theengaged gear is displayed.

Manual transmission: displaying

Symbol Description

Fuel efficient gear is set.

Shift up to fuel efficient gear.

Shift down to fuel efficient gear.

Shift into neutral.

Steptronic transmission: displays

Example Description

Fuel efficient gear is set.

Shift into fuel efficient gear.

Speed limit detectionThe concept

Speed limit detectionSpeed limit detection uses a symbol in theshape of a traffic sign to display the currentlydetected speed limit. The camera in the area ofthe interior rearview mirror detects traffic signsat the edge of the road as well as variable over‐head sign posts. Traffic signs with extra sym‐bols for wet road conditions, etc. are also de‐tected and compared with the vehicle'sonboard data, such as for the rain sensor, andwill be displayed depending on the situation.The system takes into account the informationstored in the navigation system and also dis‐plays speed limits present on routes withoutsigns.

HintsPersonal judgmentThe system cannot serve as a substitute

for the driver's personal judgment of the trafficsituation.The system assists the driver and does not re‐place the human eye.◀

Seite 95

Displays Controls

95Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 100: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

At a glance

Camera

The camera is found near the interior rearviewmirror.Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐terior rearview mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/offOn the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Instrument cluster"3. "Speed limit information"If speed limit detection is switched on, it canbe displayed on the info display in the instru‐ment cluster via the computer.

DisplayThe following is displayed in the instrumentcluster:

Speed limit detectionCurrent speed limit.

Speed limit detection is notavailable.

Speed limit detection can also be displayed inthe Head-up Display.

System limitsThe system may not be fully functional andmay provide incorrect information in the fol‐lowing situations:▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.▷ When signs are concealed by objects.▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in

front of you.▷ When driving toward bright lights.▷ When the windshield behind the interior

rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐ered by a sticker, etc.

▷ In the event of incorrect detection by thecamera.

▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigationsystem are incorrect.

▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐tem.

▷ When roads differ from the navigation,such as due to changes in road routing.

▷ When passing buses or trucks with aspeed sticker.

▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐

ately after vehicle shipment.

Selection lists in theinstrument clusterThe conceptDepending on your vehicle's optional features,the following can be displayed or operated us‐ing the buttons and the thumbwheel on thesteering wheel as well as the displays in the in‐strument cluster and the Head-up Display:▷ Current audio source.▷ Redial phone feature.

Seite 96

Controls Displays

96Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 101: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

▷ Turn on voice activation system.

Display

Depending on your vehicle's optional features,the list in the instrument cluster can differ fromthe illustration shown.

Activating a list and adjusting thesetting

On the right side of the steering wheel, turnthe thumbwheel to activate the correspondinglist.Using the thumbwheel, select the desired set‐ting and confirm it by pushing the thumbwheel.

ComputerIndication in the info display

The information from the com‐puter is shown in the info displayin the instrument cluster.

Calling up information on the infodisplay

Press the onboard computer button on theturn signal lever.Information is displayed in the info display ofthe instrument cluster.

Information at a glanceRepeatedly pressing the button on the turnsignal lever calls up the following information inthe info display:▷ Range.▷ Average fuel consumption.▷ Miles and trip miles.

For a multi-functional instrument display.▷ Average speed.▷ Date.▷ Speed limit detection.

Not for a multi-functional instrument dis‐play.

▷ Time of arrival.When destination guidance is activated inthe navigation system.

▷ Distance to destination.When destination guidance is activated inthe navigation system.

▷ ECO PRO bonus range.

Adjusting the info displayDepending on the vehicle equipment version,you can select what information from the com‐

Seite 97

Displays Controls

97Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 102: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

puter is to be displayed on the info display ofthe instrument cluster.On the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Instrument cluster"3. Select the desired displays.

Information in detail

RangeDisplays the estimated cruising range availablewith the remaining fuel.It is calculated based on your driving style overthe last 20 miles/30 km.If there is only enough fuel left for less than45 miles/80 km, the color of the displaychanges.

Average fuel consumptionThe average fuel consumption is calculated forthe period while the engine is running.The average fuel consumption is calculated forthe distance traveled since the last reset by thecomputer.

Average speedPeriods in which the vehicle is parked with theengine manually stopped are not included inthe calculation of the average speed.

Resetting average valuesPress and hold the onboard computer buttonon the turn signal lever.

Distance to destinationThe distance remaining to the destination isdisplayed if a destination is entered in the navi‐gation system before the trip is started.The distance to the destination is adopted au‐tomatically.

Time of arrivalThe estimated time of arrival isdisplayed if a destination is en‐tered in the navigation systembefore the trip is started.The time must be correctly set.

Speed limit detectionDescription of the speed limit detection, referto page 95, function.

Trip computerThe vehicle features two types of board com‐puters.▷ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as

often as necessary.▷ "Trip computer": the values provide an

overview of the current trip.

Resetting the trip computerOn the Control Display:

1. "Vehicle info"2. "Trip computer"3. "Reset": all values are reset.

"Automatically reset": all values are resetapprox. 4 hours after the vehicle came to astandstill.

Display on the Control DisplayDisplay the computer or trip computer on theControl Display.

1. "Vehicle info"2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"

Resetting the fuel consumption orspeedOn the Control Display:

1. "Vehicle info"2. "Onboard info"

Seite 98

Controls Displays

98Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 103: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

3. "Consumpt." or "Speed"4. "Yes"

Sport displaysThe conceptOn the Control Display, the current values forperformance and torque can be displayed ifthe vehicle is appropriately equipped.

Displaying sport displays on theControl Display1. "Vehicle info"2. "Sport displays"

Speed warningThe conceptDisplays a speed, when reached, should causea warning to be issued.The warning is repeated if the vehicle speeddrops below the set speed once by at least3 mph/5 km/h.

Displaying, setting or changing thespeed warningOn the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Speed"3. "Warning at:"4. Turn the controller until the desired speed

is displayed.5. Press the controller.Speed warning is stored.

Activating/deactivating the speedwarningOn the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Speed"3. "Warning"4. Press the controller.

Setting your current speed as thespeed warningOn the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Speed"3. "Select current speed"4. Press the controller.

The current vehicle speed is stored as thespeed warning.

Settings on the ControlDisplayTime

Setting the time zone1. "Settings"2. "Time/Date"3. "Time zone:"4. Select the desired time zone.The time zone is stored.

Setting the time1. "Settings"2. "Time/Date"3. "Time:"4. Turn the controller until the desired hours

are displayed.5. Press the controller.

Seite 99

Displays Controls

99Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 104: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

6. Turn the controller until the desired mi‐nutes are displayed.

7. Press the controller.The time is stored.

Setting the time format1. "Settings"2. "Time/Date"3. "Format:"4. Select the desired format.The time format is stored.

Automatic time settingDepending on your vehicle's optional features,the time, date and, if needed, the time zone areupdated automatically.

1. "Settings"2. "Time/Date"3. "Auto time set"

Date

Setting the date1. "Settings"2. "Time/Date"3. "Date:"4. Turn the controller until the desired day is

displayed.5. Press the controller.6. Make the necessary settings for the month

and year.The date is stored.

Setting the date format1. "Settings"2. "Time/Date"3. "Format:"4. Select the desired format.The date format is stored.

Language

Setting the languageTo set the language on the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Language/Units"3. "Language:"4. Select the desired language.Settings are stored for the profile currently inuse.

Setting the voice dialogVoice dialog for the voice activation system,refer to page 27.

Units of measure

Setting the units of measureTo set the units for fuel consumption, route/distance and temperature:

1. "Settings"2. "Language/Units"3. Select the desired menu item.4. Select the desired unit.Settings are stored for the profile currently inuse.

Brightness

Setting the brightnessTo set the brightness of the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Control display"3. "Brightness"4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐

ness is set.5. Press the controller.Settings are stored for the profile currently inuse.

Seite 100

Controls Displays

100Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 105: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐ness settings may not be clearly visible.

Head-up DisplayThe concept

This system projects important informationinto the driver's field of vision, e.g., the speed.The driver can get information without avertinghis or her eyes from the road.

Display visibilityThe visibility of the displays in the Head-upDisplay is influenced by the following factors:▷ Certain sitting positions.▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐

play.▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.▷ Wet roads.▷ Unfavorable light conditions.If the image is distorted, check the basic set‐tings.

Switching on/off

Press button.

Display

Overview▷ Speed.▷ Navigation system.▷ Check Control messages.▷ Selection list from the instrument cluster.▷ Driver assistance systems.Some of this information is only displayedbriefly as needed.

Selecting displays in the Head-upDisplayOn the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Head-Up Display"3. "Displayed information"4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up

Display.Settings are stored for the profile currently inuse.

Setting the brightnessThe brightness is automatically adjusted to theambient brightness.The basic setting can be adjusted manually.

Seite 101

Displays Controls

101Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 106: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

On the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Head-Up Display"3. "Brightness"4. Turn the controller.When the low beams are activated, the bright‐ness of the Head-up Display can be addition‐ally influenced using the instrument lighting.Settings are stored for the profile currently inuse.

Adjusting the heightOn the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Head-Up Display"3. "Height"4. Turn the controller.Settings are stored for the profile currently inuse.

Setting the rotationOn the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Head-Up Display"3. "Rotation"4. Turn the controller.Settings are stored for the profile currently inuse.

Special windshieldThe windshield is part of the system.The shape of the windshield makes it possibleto display a precise image.A film in the windshield prevents double im‐ages from being displayed.Therefore, have the special windshield re‐placed by a service center only.

Seite 102

Controls Displays

102Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 107: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

LightsVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems.

At a glance

1 Rear fog lights2 Front fog lights3 Depending on the equipment: automatic

headlight control, Adaptive Light Control,High-beam Assistant, Welcome lights,Daytime running lights

4 Lights off, daytime running lights5 Parking lights, daytime running lights6 Depending on the equipment: low beams,

welcome lights, High-beam Assistant7 Instrument lighting

Parking lights/low beams,headlight controlGeneral informationPosition of switch: 0, ,

If the driver door is opened with the ignitionswitched off, the exterior lighting is automati‐cally switched off at these reel settings.

Parking lightsPosition of switch : the vehicle's lightslight up on all sides, e.g., for parking.Do not use the parking lights for extended pe‐riods; otherwise, they might drain the batteryand it would then be impossible to start the en‐gine.When parking, it is preferable to reel on theone-sided roadside parking lights, refer topage 104.

Low beamsPosition of switch with the ignitionswitched on: the low beams light up.

Welcome lightsWhen parking the vehicle, leave the reel in po‐sition or : the parking and interiorlights light up briefly when the vehicle is un‐locked.

Activating/deactivatingOn the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Lighting"3. "Welcome lights"Settings are stored for the profile currently inuse.

Headlight courtesy delay featureThe low beams stay lit for a short while afterthe radio-ready state is switched off if thelights are turned off and the headlight flasher isswitched on.

Seite 103

Lights Controls

103Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 108: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Setting the durationOn the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Lighting"3. "Pathway lighting:"4. Set length of time.Settings are stored for the profile currently inuse.

Automatic headlight controlPosition of switch : the low beams are acti‐vated and off automatically, e.g., in tunnels, intwilight or if there is precipitation. The indicatorlamp in the instrument cluster lights up.When emerging from a tunnel during the day,the low beams are not switched off immedi‐ately but instead only after approx. 2 minutes.A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon cancause the lights to be switched on.The low beams always stay on when the foglights are activated.

Personal responsibilityThe automatic headlight control cannot

serve as a substitute for your personal judg‐ment in determining when to turn the lights onin response to ambient lighting conditions.E. g. the sensors are unable to detect fog orhazy weather. To avoid safety risks underthese conditions, you should always switch onthe lights manually.◀

Daytime running lightsWith the ignition switched on, the daytime run‐ning lights light up in position 0, or .After the ignition is switched off, the parkinglights light up in position .

Activating/deactivatingIn some countries, daytime running lights aremandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐vate the daytime running lights.

On the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Lighting"3. "Daytime running lamps"Settings are stored for the profile currently inuse.

Roadside parking lights

The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.

Switching onWith the ignition switched off, press the levereither up or down past the resistance point forapprox. 2 seconds.

Switch offBriefly press the lever to the resistance point inthe opposite direction.

Adaptive Light ControlThe conceptAdaptive Light Control is a variable headlightcontrol system that enables dynamic illumina‐tion of the road surface.Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐rameters, the light from the headlight followsthe course of the road.In tight curves, e.g., on mountainous roads orwhen turning, an additional, corner-illuminatinglamp is switched on that lights up the inside ofthe curve when the vehicle is moving below acertain speed.

Seite 104

Controls Lights

104Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 109: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

ActivatingPosition of switch with the ignitionswitched on.To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv‐er's side when the vehicle is at a standstill.The turning lights are automatically switchedon depending on the steering angle or the useof turn signals.When driving in reverse, the turning lights maybe automatically switched on regardless of thesteering angle.

Self-leveling headlightsThe self-leveling headlights compensate foracceleration and braking operations in ordernot to blind the oncoming traffic and to achieveoptimum illumination of the roadway.

MalfunctionA Check Control message is displayed.Adaptive Light Control is malfunctioning or hasfailed. Have the system checked as soon aspossible.

High-beam AssistantThe conceptWhen the low beams are activated, this systemautomatically switches the high beams on andoff or suppresses the light in the areas thatblind oncoming traffic. The procedure is con‐trolled by a camera on the front of the interiorrearview mirror. The assistant ensures that thehigh beams are activated whenever the trafficsituation allows. The driver can intervene atany time and reel the high beams on and off asusual.

Activating

1. Depending on the equipment, turn the lightswitch into position or .

2. Press button on the turn signal lever, ar‐row.

The indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up.

When the low beams are on, the lights are au‐tomatically brightened or dimmed.The system responds to light from oncomingtraffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and toadequate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.

The blue indicator lamp in the instru‐ment cluster lights up when the systemswitches on the high beams. Depend‐

ing on the version of the system in the vehicle,the high beams may not reel off for oncomingvehicles, but may only be dimmed in the areasthat blind oncoming traffic. In this case, theblue indicator light will stay on.

Switching the high beams on and offmanually

▷ High beams on, arrow 1.

Seite 105

Lights Controls

105Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 110: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.

The High-beam Assistant can be switched offwhen manually adjusting the light. To reacti‐vate the High-beam Assistant, press the but‐ton on the turn signal lever.

System limitsPersonal responsibilityThe High-beam Assistant cannot serve

as a substitute for the driver's personal judg‐ment of when to use the high beams. There‐fore, manually reel off the high beams in situa‐tions where required to avoid a safety risk.◀

The system is not fully functional in situationssuch as the following, and driver interventionmay be necessary:▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,

such as fog or heavy precipitation.▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such

as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback ridersand wagons; when driving close to train orship traffic; and at animal crossings.

▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres‐sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on‐coming traffic on freeways.

▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in thepresence of highly reflective signs.

▷ At low speeds.▷ When the windshield behind the interior

rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐ered with stickers, etc.

Fog lightsFront fog lightsThe parking lights or low beams must beswitched on.

Press button. The green indicatorlamp lights up.

If the automatic headlight control, refer topage 104, is activated, the low beams willcome on automatically when you reel on thefront fog lights.When the high beams or headlight flasher areactivated, the front fog lights are not switchedon.

Instrument lightingAdjusting

The parking lights or low beamsmust be switched on to adjustthe brightness.Adjust the brightness with thethumbwheel.

Interior lightsGeneral informationThe interior lights, footwell lights, access lightsand courtesy lights are controlled automati‐cally.Thumb wheel for the instrument lighting con‐trols brightness of some of these features.

1 Interior lights2 Reading lamp

Switching the interior lights on and offPress button.

Seite 106

Controls Lights

106Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 111: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

To reel off permanently: press the button forapprox. 3 seconds.Switch back on: press button.

Reading lightsPress button.

Reading lights are located at the front and rearnext to the interior lights.

Bang & Olufsen High End SurroundSound System

Adjusting speaker lightingSome speakers in the vehicle are illuminated.The lighting can be individually set.

1. "Settings"2. "Lighting"3. "B&O"4. Select the desired lighting setting.

▷ "Off": no lighting.▷ "Reduced": the speakers in the field of

view are faded while driving.▷ "On": the speakers are always illumi‐

nated.

Ambient lightDepending on the equipment, the lighting canbe individually adjusted in the interior for somelights.

Selecting color scheme1. "Settings"2. "Lighting"3. "Ambient:"4. Select desired setting.With a color scheme selected and welcomelights activated they illuminate in the line'scolor when vehicle is unlocked.

Setting the brightnessThe brightness of the ambient light can be ad‐justed via the thumbwheel for the instrumentlighting or on the Control Display.

1. "Settings"2. "Lighting"3. "Brightness:"4. Adjust the brightness.

Seite 107

Lights Controls

107Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 112: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

SafetyVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems.

Airbags

1 Front airbag, driver2 Front airbag, front passenger3 Head airbag

4 Side airbag5 Knee airbags

Front airbagsFront airbags help protect the driver and frontpassenger by responding to frontal impacts inwhich safety belts alone would not provide ad‐equate restraint.

Side airbagsIn a lateral impact, the side airbag supports theside of the body in the chest and lap area.

Head airbagsIn a lateral impact, the head airbag supportsthe head.

Knee airbagThe knee airbag supports the legs in a frontalimpact.

Seite 108

Controls Safety

108Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 113: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Protective actionAirbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-endcollisions.

Information on how to ensure the optimalprotective effect of the airbags

▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags.▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the

steering wheel rim, holding your hands atthe 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, tokeep the risk of injury to your hands orarms as low as possible when the airbag istriggered.

▷ There should be no person, animals, or ob‐jects between an airbag and a person.

▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag onthe front passenger side as a storage area.

▷ Dashboard and windshield on the frontpassenger side must stay clear - do not at‐tach adhesive labels or coverings and donot attach brackets or cables, e. g., for GPSdevices or' mobile phones.

▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet andlegs in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuriesmight occur when front airbag is activated.

▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions orother objects on the front passenger seatthat are not approved specifically for seatswith integrated side airbags.

▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such asjackets, over the backrests.

▷ Make sure that occupants keep their headsaway from the side airbag and do not restagainst the head airbag; otherwise, injuriesmight occur when airbag is activated.

▷ Do not remove the airbag system.▷ Do not remove the steering wheel.▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐

bag cover panels, do not cover them ormodify them in any way.

▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐nents or the wiring in the airbag system.This also applies to steering wheel covers,the dashboard, the seats, the roof pillarsand the sides of the roofliner.◀

Even when you follow all instructions veryclosely, injury from contact with the airbagscannot be ruled out in certain situations.The ignition and inflation noise may lead toshort-term and, in most cases, temporaryhearing impairment in sensitive individuals.

Malfunction, deactivation and after de‐ploying the airbags

Do not touch the individual components imme‐diately after the system has been triggered;otherwise, you may risk burns.Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐mantled and the airbag generator scrapped bythe service center or an authorized repair shopfor handling explosives.Non-professional attempts to service the sys‐tem could lead to failure in an emergency orunintentional activation of the airbag - bothmay lead to injury.◀

Warnings and information on the airbags arealso found on the sun visors.

Functional readiness of the airbagsystem

When the ignition is reel on, the warn‐ing lamp in the instrument cluster lightsup briefly and thereby indicates the op‐

erational readiness of the entire airbag systemand the belt tensioner.

Airbag system malfunctioning▷ Warning lamp does not come on when the

ignition is turned on.▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously.

Seite 109

Safety Controls

109Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 114: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

In case of a malfunction have airbag sys‐tem checked immediately.

In case of a malfunction have airbag systemchecked immediately; otherwise, there is a riskthat the system does not function as expectedin case of a severe accident.◀

Automatic deactivation of the front-seat passenger airbagsThe system reads if the front passenger seat isoccupied by measuring the human body's re‐sistance.Front, knee and side airbag on the front pas‐senger's side are either activated or deacti‐vated.

Leave feet in the footwellMake sure that the front passenger

keeps his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise,proper functioning of the front passenger air‐bag might not be assured.◀

Child restraint fixing system in the frontpassenger seat

Before transporting a child on the front pas‐senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in‐structions for children on the front passengerseat, see Children.◀

Malfunction of the automaticdeactivation systemWhen transporting older children and adults,the front-seat passenger airbags may be deac‐tivated in certain sitting positions. In this case,the indicator lamp for the front-seat passengerairbags lights up.In this case, change the sitting position so thatthe front-seat passenger airbags are activatedand the indicator lamp goes out.If it is not possible to activate the airbags, havethe person sit in the rear.To enable correct recognition of the occupiedseat cushion

▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball matsor other items to the front passenger seatunless they are specifically recommendedby your vehicle's manufacturer.

▷ Do not place any electronic devices on thepassenger seat if a child restraint system isto be installed on it.

▷ Do not place objects under the seat thatcould press against the seat from below.

▷ No moisture in or on the seat.

Indicator lamp for the front-seatpassenger airbags

The indicator lamp for the front-seat passen‐ger airbags indicates the operating state of thefront-seat passenger airbags.The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ei‐ther activated or deactivated.

▷ The indicator lamp lights upwhen a child is properlyseated in a child restraint fix‐ing system or when the seatis empty. The airbags on thefront passenger side are notactivated.

▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,e.g., a correctly seated person of sufficientsize is detected on the seat. The airbagson the front passenger side are activated.

Detected child seatsThe system generally detects children seatedin a child seat, particularly in child seats re‐quired by NHTSA when the vehicle was manu‐

Seite 110

Controls Safety

110Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 115: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

factured. After installing a child seat, makesure that the indicator lamp for the front-seatpassenger airbags lights up. This indicatesthat the child seat has been detected and thefront-seat passenger airbags are not activated.

Strength of the driver's and front-seatpassenger airbagThe explosive power that activates driver's/front passenger's airbags very much dependson the positions of the driver's/front passeng‐er's seat.With a respective message appearing on Con‐trol Display calibrate the front seats to keepthe accuracy of this function over the long-term.

Calibrating the front seatsA corresponding message appears on theControl Display.

1. Press the reel and move the respectiveseat all the way forward.

2. Press the reel forward again. The seat stillmoves forward slightly.

3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.The calibration procedure is completed whenthe message on the Control Display disap‐pears.If the message continues to be displayed, re‐peat the calibration.If the message does not disappear after a re‐peat calibration, have the system checked assoon as possible.

Unobstructed area of movementEnsure that the area of movement of the

seats is unobstructed to avoid personal injuryor damage to objects.◀

Tire Pressure Monitor TPMThe conceptThe system monitors tire inflation pressure inthe four mounted tires. The system warns youif there is a significant loss of pressure in oneor more tires. For this purpose, sensors in thetire valves measure the tire inflation pressureand tire temperature.

HintsTire damage due to external factorsSudden tire damage caused by external

circumstances cannot be recognized in ad‐vance.◀

With use of the system observe further infor‐mation found under Tire inflation pressure, re‐fer to page 211.

Functional requirementsThe system must have been reset with thecorrect tire inflation pressure; otherwise, relia‐ble signaling of tire inflation pressure loss isnot assured.Reset the system after each adjustment of thetire inflation pressure and after every tire orwheel change.Always use wheels with TPM electronics toensure that the system will operate properly.

Status displayThe current status of the Tire Pressure Moni‐tor TPM can be displayed on the Control Dis‐play, e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.

1. "Vehicle info"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)"The status is displayed.

Seite 111

Safety Controls

111Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 116: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Status control displayTire and system status are indicated by thecolor of the wheels and a text message on theControl Display.

All wheels greenSystem is active and will issue a warning rela‐tive to the tire inflation pressures stored duringthe last reset.

One wheel is yellowA flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure inthe indicated tire.

All wheels are yellowA flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure inseveral tires.

Wheels, grayThe system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasonsfor this may be:▷ The system is being reset.▷ Malfunction.

Status informationThe status control display additionally showsthe current tire inflation pressures and possiblytire temperatures. It shows the actual valuesread; they may vary depending on driving styleor weather conditions.

Carry out resetReset the system after each adjustment of thetire inflation pressure and after every tire orwheel change.On the Control Display and on the vehicle:

1. "Vehicle info"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Perform reset"4. Start the engine - do not drive off.

5. Reset tire inflation pressure:"Performreset".

6. Drive away.The tires are shown in gray and the status isdisplayed.After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for ashort period, the set tire inflation pressures areaccepted as reference values. The reset iscompleted automatically while driving.After a successfully completed Reset, thewheels on the Control Display are shown ingreen and "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)active" is displayed.You may interrupt this trip at any time. Whenyou continue the reset resumes automatically.

Low tire pressure messageThe yellow warning lamp lights up. ACheck Control message is displayed.▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in

tire inflation pressure.▷ No reset was performed for the system.

The system therefore issues a warningbased on the tire inflation pressures beforethe last reset.

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐vers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted withregular tires or run-flat tires.Run-flat tires, refer to page 224, are la‐beled with a circular symbol containing theletters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.

Do not continue driving without run-flattires

Do not continue driving if the vehicle is notequipped with run-flat tires; continued drivingmay result in serious accidents.◀

A low tire inflation pressure might turn on DSCDynamic Stability Control.

Seite 112

Controls Safety

112Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 117: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires1. Identify the damaged tire.

Do this by checking the air pressure in allfour tires.If the tire inflation pressure in all four tiresis shown to be correct, it is possible thatthe Tire Pressure Monitor did not performa reset. Then perform the reset.If an identification is not possible, pleasecontact the service center.

2. Fixing a flat tire, where applicable with theMobility System.

Run-flat tires

Maximum speedYou may continue driving with a damaged tireat speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tireIf continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐vers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at

the next opportunity.If the tire inflation pressure in all four tiresis shown to be correct, it is possible thatthe Tire Pressure Monitor did not performa reset. In that case, carry out a reset.

Possible driving distance with complete loss oftire inflation pressure:The possible driving distance after a loss of tireinflation pressure depends on cargo load, driv‐ing style and road conditions.A vehicle with an average load has a possibledriving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km.A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differ‐ently, e.g., it has reduced lane stability duringbraking, a longer braking distance and different

self-steering properties. Adjust your drivingstyle accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐neuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs,potholes, etc.Because the possible driving distance de‐pends on how the vehicle is used during thetrip, the actual distance may be shorter or lon‐ger depending on the driving speed, road con‐ditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.

Continued driving with a flat tireDrive moderately and do not exceed a

speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.Your car handles differently when you lose tireinflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability is re‐duced when braking, braking distances arelonger and the self-steering properties willchange.◀

Final tire failureVibrations or loud noises while driving

can indicate the final failure of a tire. Reducespeed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tirecould come loose and cause an accident. Donot continue driving and contact your servicecenter.◀

Required tire inflation pressure checkmessageA Check Control message is displayed in thefollowing situations▷ The system has detected a wheel change,

but no reset was done.▷ Inflation was not carried out according to

specifications.▷ The tire inflation pressure has fallen below

the level of the last confirmation.In this case:▷ Check the tire pressure and correct as

needed.▷ Carry out a reset of the system after a tire

change.

Seite 113

Safety Controls

113Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 118: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

System limitsThe system does not function properly if a re‐set has not been carried out, e.g., a flat tire isreported though tire inflation pressures arecorrect.The tire inflation pressure depends on thetire's temperature. Driving or exposure to thesun will increase the tire's temperature, thusincreasing the tire inflation pressure. The tireinflation pressure is reduced when the tiretemperature falls again. These circumstancesmay cause a warning when temperatures fallvery sharply.

MalfunctionThe yellow warning lamp flashes andthen lights up continuously. A CheckControl message is displayed. No flat

tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be de‐tected.

Display in the following situations:▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted:

have the service center check it if needed.▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by

your service center.▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset.

Reset the system again.▷ Interference through systems or devices

with the same radio frequency: after leav‐ing the area of the interference, the systemautomatically becomes active again.

Declaration according to NHTSA/FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure MonitoringSystemEach tire, including the spare (if provided)should be checked monthly when cold and in‐flated to the inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicleplacard or tire inflation pressure label. (If yourvehicle has tires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label, you should determine the

proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equipped with a tire pressure monitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐sure telltale when one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated. Accordingly, whenthe low tire pressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires as soon aspossible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflatedtire causes the tire to overheat and can lead totire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stopping ability. Pleasenote that the TPMS is not a substitute forproper tire maintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,even if under-inflation has not reached thelevel to trigger illumination of the TPMS lowtire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has alsobeen equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi‐cator to indicate when the system is not oper‐ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica‐tor is combined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects a malfunc‐tion, the telltale will flash for approximately oneminute and then remain continuously illumi‐nated. This sequence will continue upon sub‐sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐function exists. When the malfunction indicatoris illuminated, the system may not be able todetect or signal low tire pressure as intended.TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety ofreasons, including the installation of replace‐ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehiclethat prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐tale after replacing one or more tires or wheelson your vehicle to ensure that the replacementor alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMSto continue to function properly.

Seite 114

Controls Safety

114Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 119: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

FTM Flat Tire MonitorThe conceptThe system detects tire inflation pressure losson the basis of rotation speed differences be‐tween the individual wheels while driving.In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, thediameter and therefore the rotational speed ofthe corresponding wheel changes. This will bedetected and reported as a flat tire.The system does not measure the actual infla‐tion pressure in the tires.

Functional requirementsThe system must have been initialized whenthe tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐wise, reliable flagging of a flat tire is not as‐sured. Initialize the system after each correc‐tion of the tire inflation pressure and afterevery tire or wheel change.

Status displayThe current status of the Flat Tire Monitor canbe displayed on the Control Display, e.g.,whether or not the FTM is active.On the Control Display:

1. "Vehicle info"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)"The status is displayed.

InitializationWhen initializing the once set inflation tirepressures serve as reference values in order todetect a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐firming the tire inflation pressures.Do not initialize the system when driving withsnow chains.On the Control Display:

1. "Vehicle info"2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Perform reset"4. Start the engine - do not drive off.5. Start the initialization with "Perform reset".6. Drive away.The initialization is completed while driving,which can be interrupted at any time.The initialization automatically continues whendriving resumes.

Indication of a flat tireThe yellow warning lamp lights up. ACheck Control message is displayed.There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire

inflation pressure.

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐vers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted withregular tires or run-flat tires.Run-flat tires, refer to page 224, are la‐beled with a circular symbol containing theletters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.

Do not continue driving without run-flattires

Do not continue driving if the vehicle is notequipped with run-flat tires; continued drivingmay result in serious accidents.◀

When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐bility Control is switched on if needed.

System limitsSudden tire damageSudden serious tire damage caused by

external circumstances cannot be recognizedin advance.◀

A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in allfour tires will not be recognized. Therefore,check the tire inflation pressure regularly.The system could be delayed or malfunction inthe following situations:

Seite 115

Safety Controls

115Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 120: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

▷ When the system has not been initialized.▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road

surface.▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction

wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting).▷ When driving with snow chains.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires1. Identify the damaged tire.

Do this by checking the air pressure in allfour tires.If the tire inflation pressure in all four tiresis correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may nothave been initialized. In this case, initializethe system.If an identification is not possible, pleasecontact the service center.

2. Fix the flat tire.

Run-flat tires

Maximum speedYou may continue driving with a damaged tireat speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tireIf continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐vers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at

the next opportunity.If the tire inflation pressure in all four tiresis correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may nothave been initialized. In this case, initializethe system.

Possible driving distance with complete loss oftire inflation pressure:

The possible driving distance after a loss of tireinflation pressure depends on cargo load, driv‐ing style and road conditions.A vehicle with an average load has a possibledriving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km.A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differ‐ently, e.g., it has reduced lane stability duringbraking, a longer braking distance and differentself-steering properties. Adjust your drivingstyle accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐neuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs,potholes, etc.Because the possible driving distance de‐pends on how the vehicle is used during thetrip, the actual distance may be shorter or lon‐ger depending on the driving speed, road con‐ditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.

Continued driving with a flat tireDrive moderately and do not exceed a

speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.Your car handles differently when you lose tireinflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability is re‐duced when braking, braking distances arelonger and the self-steering properties willchange.◀

Final tire failureVibrations or loud noises while driving

can indicate the final failure of a tire. Reducespeed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tirecould come loose and cause an accident. Donot continue driving and contact your servicecenter.◀

Intelligent SafetyThe conceptIntelligent Safety enables central operation ofthe driver assistance system.Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, In‐telligent Safety consists of one or more sys‐tems that can help prevent a imminent colli‐sion. These systems are active automatically

Seite 116

Controls Safety

116Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 121: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

every time the engine is started using theStart/Stop button:▷ Front-end collision warning, refer to

page 117.▷ Pedestrian warning, refer to page 123.

NotePersonal responsibilityThe system does not serve as a substi‐

tute for the driver's personal judgment of thetraffic situation.Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci‐dents are still possible despite all warnings.◀

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Camera

The camera is found near the interior rearviewmirror.

Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐terior rearview mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/offThe Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐cally active after every departure.

Press button: the systems are turnedoff. The LED goes out.

Press button: the systems are turned on. TheLED lights up.

Settings can be made on the Control Display.

Front-end collision warningDepending on the equipment, the collisionwarning system consists of one of the two sys‐tems:▷ Front-end collision warning with City Brak‐

ing function, refer to page 117.▷ Front-end collision warning with braking

function, refer to page 120.

Front-end collision warningwith City Braking functionThe conceptThe ystem can help prevent accidents. If anaccident cannot be prevented, the system willhelp reduce the collision speed.The system sounds a warning before an immi‐nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐ently if needed.The automatic braking intervention is donewith limited force and duration.A camera in the area of the rearview mirrorcontrols the system.The front-end collision warning is availableeven if cruise control has been deactivated.

Seite 117

Safety Controls

117Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 122: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

With the vehicle approaching another vehicleintentionally the collision warning is delayedavoiding false alarm.

NotePersonal responsibilityThe system does not serve as a substi‐

tute for the driver's personal judgment of thetraffic situation.Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci‐dents are still possible despite all warnings.◀

General informationThe system warns at two levels of an imminentdanger of collision at speeds from approx.3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may vary withthe current driving situation.Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of up to35 mph/60 km/h.

Detection range

It responds to objects if they are detected bythe system.

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Camera

The camera is found near the interior rearviewmirror.Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐terior rearview mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off

Switching on automaticallyThe system is automatically active after everydriving-off.

Switch offPress button: the system is switchedoff. The LED goes out.

Re-press button: the system is switched on.The LED lights up.

Seite 118

Controls Safety

118Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 123: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Setting the warning timeThe warning time can be set via iDrive.

1. "Settings"2. "Frontal Coll. Warning"3. Activate the desired time on the Control

Display.The selected time is stored for the profile cur‐rently in use.

Warning with braking function

NoteAdapting your speed and driving styleThe warning does not relieve the driver

of the responsibility to adapt his or her drivingspeed and style to the traffic conditions.◀

DisplayIf a collision with a recognized vehicle is immi‐nent a warning symbol appears in the instru‐ment cluster and in the Head-Up Display.

Symbol Measure

The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐ing.Brake and increase distance.

The vehicle flashes red and anacoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐ing.You are requested to intervene bybraking or make an evasive maneu‐ver.

PrewarningThis warning is issued, e.g., when there is theimpending danger of a collision or the distanceto the vehicle ahead is too small.The driver must intervene actively when thereis a prewarning.

Acute warning with braking functionWarning of the imminent danger of a collisionwhen the vehicle approaches another object ata relatively high differential speed.The driver must intervene actively when thereis an acute warning. If necessary, the driver isassisted by a minor automatic braking inter‐vention in a possible risk of collision.Acute warnings can also be triggered withoutprevious prewarning.

Braking interventionThe warning prompts the driver himself/herselfto react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping onthe brake pedal. The system can assist withsome braking intervention if there is risk of acollision. At low speeds vehicles may thuscome to a complete stop.Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐vention up to a complete stop, the engine maybe shut down.The braking intervention is executed only ifDSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched onand Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐vated.The braking intervention can be interrupted bystepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐tively moving the steering wheel.Object detection can be restricted. Limitationsof the detection range and functional restric‐tions are to be considered.

Tow-starting and towingFor towing the vehicle turn, switch off the

Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐tions of the individual braking systems mightlead to accidents.◀

Seite 119

Safety Controls

119Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 124: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

System limitsBe alertDue to system limitations, warnings may

be not issued at all, or may be issued late orimproperly. Therefore, always be alert andready to intervene; otherwise, there is the riskof an accident.◀

Detection rangeThe system's detection potential is limited.Thus a warning might not be issued or be is‐sued late.E. g. the following situations may not be de‐tected:▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach

them at high speed.▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of

you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.

Functional limitationsThe system may not be fully functional in thefollowing situations:▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐

fall.▷ In tight curves.▷ If the driving stability control systems are

limited or deactivated, e.g., DSC OFF.▷ If, depending on the vehicle equipment

version, the field of view of the camera inthe mirror or the radar sensor is dirty or ob‐scured.

▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐gine, via the Start/Stop knob.

▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ately after vehicle shipment.

▷ If there is constant blinding effects be‐cause of oncoming light, e.g., from the sunlow in the sky.

Warning sensitivityThe more sensitive the warning settings are,the more warnings are displayed. However,there may also be an excess of false warnings.

Front-end collision warningwith braking functionThe conceptThe ystem can help prevent accidents. If anaccident cannot be prevented, the system willhelp reduce the collision speed.The system sounds a warning before an immi‐nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐ently if needed.The automatic braking intervention may beexecuted with maximum braking force and fora brief period only as necessary.If the vehicle is equipped with Active CruiseControl with Stop & Go, the front-end collisionwarning is controlled via the cruise control ra‐dar sensor in conjunction with a camera.The front-end collision warning is availableeven if cruise control has been deactivated.With the vehicle approaching another vehicleintentionally the collision warning is delayedavoiding false alarm.

NotePersonal responsibilityThe system does not serve as a substi‐

tute for the driver's personal judgment of thetraffic situation.Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci‐dents are still possible despite all warnings.◀

General informationThe system issues a two-phase warning of apossible danger of collision with vehicles atspeeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. Time of

Seite 120

Controls Safety

120Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 125: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

warnings may vary with the current driving sit‐uation.

Detection range

It responds to objects if they are detected bythe system.

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Radar sensor

The radar sensor is located in the lower area ofthe front bumper.

Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐structed.

Camera

The camera is found near the interior rearviewmirror.Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐terior rearview mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off

Switching on automaticallyThe system is automatically active after everydriving-off.

Switch offPress button: the system is switchedoff. The LED goes out.

Re-press button: the system is switched on.The LED lights up.

Setting the warning timeThe warning time can be set via iDrive.

1. "Settings"2. "Frontal Coll. Warning"3. Activate the desired time on the Control

Display.The selected time is stored for the profile cur‐rently in use.

Seite 121

Safety Controls

121Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 126: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Warning with braking function

NoteAdapting your speed and driving styleThe warning does not relieve the driver

of the responsibility to adapt his or her drivingspeed and style to the traffic conditions.◀

DisplayIf a collision with a recognized vehicle is immi‐nent a warning symbol appears in the instru‐ment cluster and in the Head-Up Display.

Symbol Measure

The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐ing.Brake and increase distance.

The vehicle flashes red and anacoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐ing.You are requested to intervene bybraking or make an evasive maneu‐ver.

PrewarningThis warning is issued, e.g., when there is theimpending danger of a collision or the distanceto the vehicle ahead is too small.The driver must intervene actively when thereis a prewarning.

Acute warning with braking functionWarning of the imminent danger of a collisionwhen the vehicle approaches another object ata relatively high differential speed.The driver must intervene actively when thereis an acute warning. If necessary, the driver isassisted by an automatic braking interventionin a possible risk of collision.Acute warnings can also be triggered withoutprevious prewarning.

Braking interventionThe warning prompts the driver himself/herselfto react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping onthe brake pedal. The system can assist withautomatic braking intervention if there is risk ofa collision. The intervention can bring the vehi‐cle to a complete stop.Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐vention up to a complete stop, the engine maybe shut down.The braking intervention is executed only ifDSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched onand Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐vated.Above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h the brakingintervention occurs as a brief braking pressure.No automatic delay occurs.The braking intervention can be interrupted bystepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐tively moving the steering wheel.Object detection can be restricted. Limitationsof the detection range and functional restric‐tions are to be considered.

Tow-starting and towingFor towing the vehicle turn, switch off the

Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐tions of the individual braking systems mightlead to accidents.◀

System limitsBe alertDue to system limitations, warnings may

be not issued at all, or may be issued late orimproperly. Therefore, always be alert andready to intervene; otherwise, there is the riskof an accident.◀

Detection rangeThe system's detection potential is limited.

Seite 122

Controls Safety

122Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 127: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Thus a warning might not be issued or be is‐sued late.E. g. the following situations may not be de‐tected:▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach

them at high speed.▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of

you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.

Functional limitationsThe system may not be fully functional in thefollowing situations:▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐

fall.▷ In tight curves.▷ If the driving stability control systems are

limited or deactivated, e.g., DSC OFF.▷ If, depending on the vehicle equipment

version, the field of view of the camera inthe mirror or the radar sensor is dirty or ob‐scured.

▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐gine, via the Start/Stop knob.

▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ately after vehicle shipment.

▷ If there is constant blinding effects be‐cause of oncoming light, e.g., from the sunlow in the sky.

Warning sensitivityThe more sensitive the warning settings are,the more warnings are displayed. However,there may also be an excess of false warnings.

Pedestrian warningDepending on how the vehicle is equipped, thefunction warns of an imminent collision withpedestrians during daytime or nighttime.

The function is subdivided into the followingsystems:▷ During daytime: Pedestrian warning with

city braking function, refer to page 123▷ At night: Night vision, refer to page 125

Pedestrian warning with citybraking functionThe conceptThe ystem can help prevent accidents with pe‐destrians.The system issues a warning in the city drivingspeed area if there is imminent danger of a col‐lision with pedestrians and includes a brakingfunction.The camera in the area of the rearview mirrorcontrols the system.

NotePersonal responsibilityThe system does not serve as a substi‐

tute for the driver's personal judgment of thetraffic situation.Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci‐dents are still possible despite all warnings.◀

General informationIn daylight the system warns of possible colli‐sions with pedestrians at speeds from about6 mph/10 km/h to about 35 mph/60 km/hshortly before a collision the system supportsyou with a braking intervention.Under those circumstances it reacts to peoplewho are within the detection range of the sys‐tem.

Seite 123

Safety Controls

123Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 128: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Detection range

The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐ided into two areas.▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the

vehicle.▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and

left.A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐cated within the central area. A warning is is‐sued about pedestrians who are located withinthe extended area only if they are moving inthe direction of the central area.

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Camera

The camera is found near the interior rearviewmirror.Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐terior rearview mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off

Switching on automaticallyThe system is automatically active after everydriving-off.

Switch offPress button: the systems are turnedoff. The LED goes out.

Press button: the systems are turned on. TheLED lights up.

Warning with braking function

NoteAdapting your speed and driving styleThe warning does not relieve the driver

of the responsibility to adapt his or her drivingspeed and style to the traffic conditions.◀

DisplayIf a collision with a person detected in this wayis imminent, a warning symbol appears on theinstrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.

The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐nal sounds.

Seite 124

Controls Safety

124Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 129: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

With instrument display: The red sym‐bol is displayed and a signal sounds.

Intervene immediately by braking or make anevasive maneuver.

Braking interventionThe warning prompts the driver himself/herselfto react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping onthe brake pedal. The system can assist withsome braking intervention if there is risk of acollision. At low speeds vehicles may thuscome to a complete stop.Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐vention up to a complete stop, the engine maybe shut down.The braking intervention is executed only ifDSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched onand Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐vated.The braking intervention can be interrupted bystepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐tively moving the steering wheel.Object detection can be restricted. Limitationsof the detection range and functional restric‐tions are to be considered.

Tow-starting and towingFor towing the vehicle turn, switch off the

Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐tions of the individual braking systems mightlead to accidents.◀

System limitsBe alertDue to system limitations, warnings may

be not issued at all, or may be issued late orimproperly. Therefore, always be alert andready to intervene; otherwise, there is the riskof an accident.◀

Detection rangeThe detection potential of the camera is lim‐ited.Thus a warning might not be issued or be is‐sued late.E. g. the following situations may not be de‐tected:▷ Partially covered pedestrians.▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such

because of the viewing angle or contour.▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than

32 in/80 cm.

Functional limitationsThe system may not be fully functional or maynot be available in the following situations:▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐

fall.▷ In tight curves.▷ If the driving stability control systems are

deactivated, e.g. DSC OFF.▷ If the camera viewing field or the front

windshield are dirty or covered.▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐

gine, via the Start/Stop knob.▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐

ately after vehicle shipment.▷ If there is constant blinding effects be‐

cause of oncoming light, e.g., from the sunlow in the sky.

▷ When it is dark outside.

Night Vision with Pedestrianand Animal DetectionThe conceptNight Vision with pedestrian and animal detec‐tion is a night vision system.

Seite 125

Safety Controls

125Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 130: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

An infrared camera scans the area in front ofthe vehicle and issues a warning if it detectspedestrians and animals on the street. Warmobjects that are similar in shape to human be‐ings or animals are detected by the system. Ifnecessary, the heat image can be displayed onthe Control Display.

Heat image

The image shows the heat radiated by objectsin the field of view of the camera.Warm objects have a light appearance andcold objects, a dark appearance.The ability to detect an object depends on thetemperature difference between the objectand the background and on the level of heatradiation emitted by the object. Objects thatare similar in temperature to the environmentor that radiate very little heat are difficult to de‐tect.

For safety reasons, when driving at speedsabove approx. 3 mph/5 km/h and in low ambi‐ent light, the image is only displayed when thelow beams are activated.A still image is displayed at regular intervals fora fraction of a second.

Pedestrian and animal detection

Object detection and warning only functions indarkness.Warm objects that are similar in shape to hu‐man beings are detected by the system.In addition, the system also detects animalsabove a certain minimum size, e.g., deer.With heat image activated on the Control Dis‐play:People detected by the system are displayedwith a slight yellow hue.Animals detected by the system are displayedin a darker yellow.

Under good ambient conditions, the object de‐tection operates within the following distanceranges:▷ Pedestrian detection: up to approx.

330 ft/100 m▷ Detection of large animals: up to approx.

490 ft/150 m▷ Detection of medium animals: up to ap‐

prox. 230 ft/70 mEnvironmental influences can limit the availa‐bility of object detection.If the vehicle systems detect that the vehicle islocated in a residential area, the animal detec‐tion is temporarily switched off.

Seite 126

Controls Safety

126Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 131: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

HintsPersonal responsibilityNight Vision cannot replace the driver's

personal judgment of the visibility conditionsand the traffic situation. The view ahead andthe actual visibility conditions must always bethe basis on which the vehicle speed is ad‐justed; otherwise, there is a risk to roadsafety.◀

At a glance

Buttons in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Switch on/reel off heat image

Camera

The camera is automatically heated when theexternal temperatures are low.The camera is automatically cleaned togetherwith the headlights.

Switching on/off

Switching on automaticallyWhen it is dark outside, the system is automat‐ically active after every driving-off.

Switch offThe system is only switched off until the nexttime the engine is started with the Start/Stopbutton.

Press button.

The LED goes out.

Switching on heat image additionallyThe heat image from the Night Vision cameracan also be displayed on the Control Display.This function has no effect on object detec‐tion.

Press button.

The image from the camera is displayed on theControl Display.

Adjustments via the iDriveWith heat image switched on:

1. Press the controller.2. Select brightness or contrast.

▷ Select the symbol.▷ Select the symbol.

3. Turn the controller until the desired settingis reached, and press the controller.

Display

Warning of people or animals indangerIf a collision with a person or an animal de‐tected in this way is imminent, a warning sym‐bol appears on the instrument cluster and inthe Head-up Display.

Seite 127

Safety Controls

127Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 132: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Although both the shape and the heat radiationare analyzed, false warnings cannot be ruledout.

Warning area in front of the vehicle

The warning area for the pedestrian warningconsists of two parts:▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the

vehicle.▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and

left.With animal warnings, no distinction is madebetween the central or expanded area.The entire area moves along with the vehicle inthe direction of the steering angle and changeswith the vehicle speed. As the vehicle speedincreases, the area becomes longer and wider,e.g.

PrewarningThe yellow symbol is displayed when aperson is detected in the central area,arrow 1, immediately in front of the ve‐

hicle.The yellow symbol is displayed when a personin the extended area, arrow 2, is moving fromthe right or left towards the central area.The displayed symbol can vary with the peopledetected.Intervene actively by braking or make an eva‐sive maneuver.

When animals are detected, an animalsymbol is displayed. The symbol alsoshows the side of the road on which

the animal was detected. Intervene actively bybraking or make an evasive maneuver.

Acute warningThe red symbol is displayed and a sig‐nal sounds.

With instrument display: The red sym‐bol is displayed and a signal sounds.

When animals are detected, an red animalsymbol is displayed with the signal tone.

Red symbol in the instrument cluster.

Red symbol in the instrument display.

Intervene immediately by braking or make anevasive maneuver.

Display in the Head-up DisplayThe warning is displayed simultane‐ously in the Head-up Display and onthe instrument cluster. The displayed

symbol can vary with the people detected.When animals are detected, an animal symbolis displayed.

System limits

Basic limitsSystem operation is limited in situations suchas the following:▷ On steep hills, in steep depressions or in

tight curves.▷ When the camera is dirty or the protective

glass is damaged.▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.▷ At very high external temperatures.

Seite 128

Controls Safety

128Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 133: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Limits of pedestrian and animaldetectionIn some situations, it may occur that pedes‐trians are detected as animals or animals aspedestrians.Small animals are not detected by the objectdetection function, even if they are clearly visi‐ble in the image.Limited detection:▷ People or animals who are fully or partially

covered, especially when their heads arecovered.

▷ People who are not in an upright position,e.g., lying down.

▷ Cyclists on unconventional bicycles (e.g.,recumbent bicycles).

▷ After physical damage to the system, e.g.,after an accident.

No display on the rear screenThe image from Night Vision cannot be dis‐played on the rear screen.

Lane departure warningThe conceptStarting at a specific speed, this system alertsyou when the vehicle on streets with lanemarkings is about to leave the lane. Thisspeed, depending on the country version, isbetween 35 mph/55 km/h and45 mph/70 km/h.When switching on the system below thisspeed, a message is displayed in the instru‐ment cluster.The steering wheel begins vibrating gently inthe event of warnings. The time of the warningmay vary depending on the current driving sit‐uation.The system does not provide a warning if theturn signal is set before leaving the lane.

HintsPersonal responsibilityThe system cannot serve as a substitute

for the driver's personal judgment of thecourse of the road and the traffic situation.In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steer‐ing wheel, as you may lose control of the vehi‐cle.◀

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Lane departure warning

Camera

The camera is found near the interior rearviewmirror.Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐terior rearview mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/offPress button.

Seite 129

Safety Controls

129Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 134: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

▷ On: the LED lights up.▷ Off: the LED goes out.Settings are stored for the profile currently inuse.

Display in the instrument cluster▷ Lines: system is activated.▷ Arrows: at least one lane marking

was detected and warnings can beissued.

Display in the instrument display▷ Symbol orange: system is acti‐

vated.▷ Symbol green: at least one lane

marking was detected and warn‐ings can be issued.

Issued warningIf you leave the lane and if a lane marking hasbeen detected, the steering wheel begins vi‐brating.If the turn signal is set before changing thelane, a warning is not issued.

End of warningThe warning ends:▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.▷ When returning to your own lane.▷ When braking hard.▷ When using the turn signal.

System limitsThe system may not be fully functional in thefollowing situations:▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visi‐

ble, merging, diverging, or multiple lanemarkings such as in construction areas.

▷ When lane markings are covered in snow,ice, dirt or water.

▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.▷ When the lane markings are covered by

objects.▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in

front of you.▷ When driving toward bright lights.▷ When the windshield in front of the interior

rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐ered with stickers, etc.

▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ately after vehicle shipment.

Active Blind Spot DetectionThe concept

Two radar sensors below the rear bumpermonitor the area behind and next to the vehicleat speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.The system indicates whether there are vehi‐cles in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approachingfrom behind on the adjacent lane, arrow 2.The lamp in the exterior mirror housing is dim‐med.

Before you change lanes after setting the turnsignal, the system issues a warning in the sit‐uations described above.The lamp in the exterior mirror housing flashesand the steering wheel vibrates.

Seite 130

Controls Safety

130Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 135: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

HintsPersonal responsibilityThe system does not serve as a substi‐

tute for the driver's personal judgment of thetraffic situation.Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci‐dents are still possible despite all warnings.◀

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Active Blind Spot Detection

Radar sensors

The radar sensors are located under the rearbumper.

Switching on/offPress button.

▷ On: the LED lights up.▷ Off: the LED goes out.

The system can issue warnings at speedsabove approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.Settings are stored for the profile currently inuse.

Display

Lamp in the exterior mirror housing

Information stageThe dimmed lamp in the exterior mirror hous‐ing indicates when there are vehicles in theblind spot or approaching from behind.

WarningIf the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in thecritical zone, the steering wheel vibrates brieflyand the lamp in the exterior mirror housingflashes brightly.The warning stops when the turn signal isswitched off, or the other vehicle leaves thecritical zone.

System limitsThe system may not be fully functional in thefollowing situations:▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed

much faster than your own.▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.▷ If the bumper is dirty or iced up, or covered

with stickers.A Check Control message is displayed whenthe system is not fully functional.

Seite 131

Safety Controls

131Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 136: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

For US owners onlyThe transmitter and receiver units comply withpart 15 of the FCC/Federal CommunicationCommission regulations. Operation is gov‐erned by the following:FCC ID:▷ NBG009014A.Compliance statement:This device complies with part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐

ference, and▷ this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications or changes tothese devices could void the user's authority tooperate this equipment.

Brake force displayThe concept

▷ During normal brake application, the outerbrake lights light up.

▷ During heavy brake application, the innerbrake lights light up in addition.

Active ProtectionGeneral informationThe Active Protection safety package consistsof systems that are independent of each other:▷ Attentiveness assistant.▷ PreCrash▷ PostCrash

Attentiveness assistant

The conceptThe system can detect increasing lack of alert‐ness or fatigue of the driver during long, mo‐notonous journeys, e.g., on highways. In thissituation, it is recommended that the drivertakes a break.

NotePersonal responsibilityThe system cannot act as a substitute for

the personal assessment of one's physicalstate and may not detect an increasing lack ofalertness or fatigue or may not detect it cor‐rectly. Therefore, make sure that the driver isrested and alert; otherwise, risks may be de‐tected too late and an accident be caused as aresult.◀

FunctionThe system is activated each time the engineis started and cannot be switched off.After travel has begun, the system is trainedabout the driver, so that increasing lack ofalertness or fatigue can be detected.This procedure takes the following criteria intoaccount:▷ Personal driving style, e.g., steering behav‐

ior.▷ Driving conditions, e.g., length of trip.

Seite 132

Controls Safety

132Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 137: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, thesystem is active and can display a recommen‐dation to take a break.

Break recommendationIf the driver becomes increasingly less alert orfatigued, a message is displayed in the ControlDisplay with the recommendation to take abreak.A recommendation to take a break is displayedonly once during an uninterrupted trip.After a break, another recommendation to takea break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐mately 45 minutes.

System limitsThe function may be limited in the followingsituations, for instance, and will either outputan incorrect warning or no warning at all:▷ When the clock is set incorrectly.▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below

about 43 mph/70 km/h.▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during

rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.▷ In active driving situations, such as when

changing lanes frequently.▷ When the road surface is poor.▷ In the event of strong side winds.

PreCrash

The conceptWith this system critical driving situations thatmight result in an accident can be detectedabove a speed of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. Inthese situations, preventive measures are au‐tomatically taken to minimize the risk of an ac‐cident as much as possible.Critical driving situations may include:▷ Emergency stop.▷ Severe understeering.▷ Severe oversteering.

If the vehicle includes the front-end collisionwarning or front-end collision warning withbraking feature, impending collisions with vehi‐cles driving ahead or stopped in front of youcan also be detected within the system'srange.

NotePersonal responsibilityThe system cannot possibly serve as a

substitute for the driver's personal judgment ofthe traffic situation. The system may not al‐ways detect critical situations reliably and in atimely manner. Adapt speed to traffic situationand drive alertly; otherwise, a risk to safety mayresult.◀

FunctionAfter the safety belt is buckled, the front beltsare automatically pretensioned once after thevehicle is driven is away.In critical driving situations, the following indi‐vidual functions become active as needed:▷ The front belts are automatically preten‐

sioned.▷ Automatic closing of the windows.▷ Automatic closing of the glass sunroof.▷ For vehicles equipped with power backrest

adjustment: automatic positioning of thebackrest for the front passenger seat.

After a critical driving situation without an acci‐dent, the front belts are loosened again. Allother systems can be restored to the desiredsetting.If the belt tension does not loosen automati‐cally, stop the vehicle and unbuckle the beltusing the red button in the buckle. Fasten thebelt before continuing on your trip.

PostCrashIn the event of an accident, the system canbring the car to a halt automatically without in‐tervention by the driver in certain situations.

Seite 133

Safety Controls

133Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 138: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

This can reduce the risk of a further collisionand the consequences thereof.Depressing the brake pedal can cause the ve‐hicle to brake harder. This interrupts automaticbraking. Destepping on the gas pedal also in‐terrupts automatic braking.After coming to a halt, the brake is releasedautomatically. Secure the vehicle against roll‐ing.

Seite 134

Controls Safety

134Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 139: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Driving stability control systemsVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems.

Antilock Brake System ABSABS prevents locking of the wheels duringbraking.The vehicle contains its steering power evenduring full brake applications, thus increasingactive safety.ABS is operational every time you start the en‐gine.

Brake assistantWhen you apply the brakes rapidly, this systemautomatically produces the greatest possiblebraking force boost. It reduces the braking dis‐tance to a minimum during emergency stop.This system utilizes all of the benefits providedby ABS.Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedalfor the duration of the emergency stop.

Adaptive brake assistantIn combination with the Active Cruise Control,this system ensures that the brakes respondeven more rapidly when braking in critical sit‐uations.

Drive-off assistantThis system supports driving off on inclines.The parking brake is not required.

1. Hold the vehicle in place with the footbrake.

2. Release the foot brake and drive off with‐out delay.

After the foot brake is released, the vehicle isheld in place for approx. 2 seconds.Depending on the vehicle load or when a traileris used, the vehicle may roll back slightly.

Driving off without delayAfter releasing the foot brake, start driv‐

ing without delay, since the drive-off assistantwill not hold the vehicle in place for more thanapprox. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin toroll back.◀

DSC Dynamic StabilityControlThe conceptDSC prevents traction loss in the powerwheels when driving off and accelerating.DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐tions such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Withinthe physical limits DSC helps to keep the vehi‐cle on a steady course by reducing enginespeed and by applying brakes to the individualwheels.

NoteAdjust your driving style to the situationAn appropriate driving style is always the

responsibility of the driver.The laws of physics cannot be repealed, noteven with DSC.

Seite 135

Driving stability control systems Controls

135Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 140: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Therefore, do not reduce the additional safetymargin by driving in a risky manner.◀

Do not deactivate DSC when driving withroof load

Do not deactivate Dynamic Stability ControlDSC when driving with roof load, e.g. roof-mounted luggage rack.Otherwise, driving safety is not given in driv‐ing-critical situation due to the elevated centerof gravity.◀

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

DSC OFF button

Indicator/warning lightsThe indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐trols the drive and braking forces.The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has

failed.

Deactivating DSC: DSC OFFWhen DSC is deactivated, driving stability isreduced during acceleration and when drivingin curves.Stabilizing interventions by the Integral ActiveSteering system are only performed by therear axle steering.To increase vehicle stability, activate DSCagain as soon as possible.

Deactivating DSCPress and hold this button but not lon‐ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the

indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐strument cluster and displays DSC OFF.The DSC system is switched off.The steering and, depending on the equip‐ment, suspension are tuned for sporty driving.

Activating DSCPress button.DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator

lamp go out.

Indicator/warning lightsWhen DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐played in the instrument cluster.

The indicator lamp lights up: DSC isdeactivated.

DTC Dynamic TractionControlThe conceptThe DTC system is a version of the DSC whereforward momentum is optimized.The system ensures maximum headway onspecial road conditions or loose road surfaces,e.g., unplowed snowy roads, but with some‐what limited driving stability.Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTCprovides maximum traction. Driving stability islimited during acceleration and when driving incurves.Therefore drive with appropriate caution.You may find it useful to briefly activate DTCunder the following special circumstances:▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,

snow-covered roads.

Seite 136

Controls Driving stability control systems

136Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 141: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

▷ When freeing vehicle from deep snow ordriving off from loose grounds.

▷ When driving with snow chains.

Deactivating/activating DTC DynamicTraction Control

Activating DTCPress button.TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐

ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSCOFF lights up.

Deactivating DTCPress button again.TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica‐

tor lamp go out.

Indicator/warning lightsIf DTC is activated, TRACTION is displayed inthe instrument cluster.

The indicator lamp lights up: DTC Dy‐namic Traction Control is activated.

xDrivexDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve‐hicle. Concerted action by the xDrive and DSCfurther optimize traction and driving dynamics.The xDrive all-wheel-drive system variably dis‐tributes the drive forces to the front and rearaxles as demanded by the driving situation androad surface.

HDC Hill Descent ControlThe conceptHDC is a downhill driving assistant that auto‐matically controls vehicle speed on steepdownhill gradients. Without applying the

brakes, the vehicle moves at slightly more thanwalking speed.Hill Descent Control can be activated atspeeds below approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. Whendriving downhill, the vehicle reduces its speedto approx. walking speed and then keeps itsspeed constant.As long as there is active braking, the systemis on standby. The system does not brake thevehicle during this time.Only use HDC in low gears or in selector leverposition D or R.

Increasing or decreasing vehiclespeedSpecify desired speed in the range from ap‐prox. 4 mph/6 km/h to approx. 15 mph/25 km/husing the rocker reel of the cruise control onthe steering wheel. Vehicle speed can bechanged by lightly accelerating.

▷ Press the rocker reel up to the point of re‐sistance: the speed increases gradually.

▷ Press up the rocker reel past the point ofresistance: the speed increases while therocker reel is pressed.

▷ Press the rocker reel down to the point ofresistance: the speed decreases gradually.

▷ Press the rocker reel down past the pointof resistance: when driving forward, thespeed decreases to approx.6 mph/10 km/h; when reversing, the speeddecreases to approx. 4 mph/6 km/h.

Seite 137

Driving stability control systems Controls

137Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 142: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Activating HDC

Press button; the LED above the buttonlights up.

Deactivating HDCPress button again and the LED goesout. HDC is automatically deactivated

above approx. 37 mph/60 km/h.

Display in the instrument clusterThe selected speed is displayedin the speedometer.▷ Green: the system is actively

braking the vehicle.▷ Orange: the system is on

standby.

MalfunctionA message is displayed in the instrument clus‐ter. HDC is not available, e.g., due to elevatedbrake temperatures.

Adaptive DriveThe conceptAdaptive Drive includes the following systems:▷ Dynamic Drive, refer to page 138.▷ Dynamic Damping Control, refer to

page 138.The system increases driving stability and driv‐ing comfort.

Dynamic DriveThe conceptThe system reduces the lateral inclination ofthe vehicle that occurs during rapid driving incurves or during quick evasive maneuvers.Driving stability and driving comfort are in‐creased under all driving conditions. The sys‐tem utilizes active stabilizer bars on the frontand rear axles that react immediately to all driv‐ing situations.

ProgramsThe system offers two different programs.Select the programs via the Driving DynamicsControl, refer to page 139.

SPORTSporty tuning for greater driving agility.

COMFORTComfort-oriented tuning for optimal comfort.

Dynamic Damping ControlThe conceptThis system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐eling on uneven road surfaces.The system enhances driving dynamics andcomfort fitting road surface and driving style.

ProgramsThe system offers several different programs.Select the programs via the Driving DynamicsControl, refer to page 139.

SPORT/SPORT+Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐sorbers for greater driving agility.

Seite 138

Controls Driving stability control systems

138Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 143: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

COMFORT/ECO PROBalanced tuning.

COMFORT+Comfort-oriented tuning of the shock absorb‐ers for optimal traveling comfort.

Integral Active SteeringThe conceptIntegral Active Steering is a combination of Ac‐tive Steering and rear axle steering.Active Steering varies the steering angle of thewheels in relation to the steering wheel move‐ment as a function of the speed.At speeds up to approx. 37 mph/60 km/h, e.g.,in curves, the steering angle is increased, i.e.,steering becomes more direct.The rear axle steering acts to increase maneu‐verability by turning the rear wheels slightly ina direction opposite to the front wheels.At higher speeds, the steering angle is increas‐ingly reduced.The rear wheels are turned to the same angleas the front wheels.In critical situations, Integral Active Steeringcan specifically steer the front and rear wheelsto stabilize the vehicle before the driver inter‐venes, e.g., when braking where road condi‐tions differ on the left and right sides of the ve‐hicle.

InitializingIn rare cases, it may become necessary to initi‐alize the Integral Active Steering.

The warning lamp lights up. A CheckControl message is displayed.

1. With the engine running, turn the steeringwheel all the way to the left and right sev‐eral times in a uniform manner until thewarning lamp disappears.

2. Have the system checked if the warninglamp does not go out after moving thesteering wheel approx. 6 times or if thesteering wheel is at an angle.

Using snow chains

NoteWhen snow chains are in use, refer topage 225, rear wheel steering is deactivated.

ProgramsThe system offers several different programs.Select the programs via the Driving DynamicsControl, refer to page 139.

SPORTConsistently sporty tuning of the Integral Ac‐tive Steering for greater driving agility.

MalfunctionIn the event of a malfunction, the steeringwheel must be turned further, while the vehicleresponds more sensitively to steering wheelmovements in the higher speed range.The stability-enhancing intervention may bedeactivated.Proceed cautiously and drive defensively.Have the system checked.

Driving Dynamics ControlThe conceptThe Driving Dynamics Control can be used toadjust the driving dynamics of the vehicle. Forthis purpose various programs are available forselection that are activated via the two buttonsof the Driving Dynamics Control and the DSCOFF-button.

Seite 139

Driving stability control systems Controls

139Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 144: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Operating the programs

Press button Program

DSC OFFTRACTION

SPORT+SPORTCOMFORTCOMFORT+ECO PRO

Automatic program changeThe system may automatically reel to COM‐FORT in the following situations:▷ Failure of Integral Active Steering.▷ Failure of Dynamic Damping Control.▷ Failure of DSC Dynamic Stability Control.▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.▷ When activating cruise control in TRAC‐

TION or DSC OFF mode.

DSC OFFWhen DSC OFF, refer to page 136, is active,driving stability is limited during accelerationand when driving in curves.

TRACTIONWhen TRACTION is active, the vehicle hasmaximum traction on loose road surfaces. DTCDynamic Traction Control, refer to page 137, isactivated. Driving stability is limited during ac‐celeration and when driving in curves.

SPORT+Sporty driving with optimized suspension andadapted engine control with limited driving sta‐bilization.Dynamic Traction Control is switched on.The driver handles several of the stabilizationtasks.

Activating SPORT+Press button repeatedly until SPORT+appears in the instrument cluster and

the DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up.

Automatic program changeWhen switching on the adjustable speed limitor activating cruise control, the program auto‐matically switches to SPORT mode.

Indicator/warning lightsSPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster.

The DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up:Dynamic Traction Control is activated.

SPORTConsistently sporty tuning of the suspensionand engine control for greater driving agilitywith maximum driving stabilization.The program can be configured to individualspecifications.The configuration is stored for the profile cur‐rently in use.

Seite 140

Controls Driving stability control systems

140Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 145: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Activating SPORTPress button repeatedly until SPORTis displayed in the instrument cluster.

Configuring SPORTWhen the display is activated on the ControlDisplay, refer to page 142, the SPORT drivingmode can be set.After the SPORT driving mode is activated, se‐lect "Configure SPORT" on the displayedpanel and configure the program.SPORT can also be configured before it is acti‐vated:

1. "Settings"2. "SPORT mode" or: "Driving mode"3. Configure driving mode.This configuration is retrieved when theSPORT driving mode is activated.

COMFORTFor a balanced tuning with maximum drivingstabilization.

Activating COMFORTPress button repeatedly until COM‐FORT is displayed in the instrument

cluster.

In certain situations, the system automaticallychanges to the NORMAL program, automaticprogram change, refer to page 140.

COMFORT+Comfort-oriented tuning of the shock absorb‐ers and adapted engine control for optimaltraveling comfort with maximum driving stabili‐zation.

COMFORT+ activationPress button repeatedly until COM‐FORT+ is displayed in the instrument

cluster.

ECO PROECO PRO, refer to page 196, provides consis‐tent tuning to minimize fuel consumption formaximum range with maximum driving stabili‐zation.Comfort functions and the engine controllerare adjusted.The program can be configured to individualspecifications.

Activating ECO PROPress button repeatedly until ECOPRO is displayed in the instrument

cluster.

Configuring ECO PRO1. Activate ECO PRO.2. "Configure ECO PRO"Make the desired settings.

Configure driving modeSettings can be made for the following drivingmodes in Driving mode:▷ SPORT mode, refer to page 141.▷ ECO PRO mode, refer to page 197.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Selected programThe instrument cluster displaysthe selected program.

Program selectionPressing the button displays alist of the selectable programs.Depending on your vehicle's op‐tional features, the list in the in‐strument cluster can differ from

the illustration shown.

Seite 141

Driving stability control systems Controls

141Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 146: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Display on the Control DisplayProgram changes can be displayed briefly onthe Control Display.To do so, make the following settings:

1. "Settings"2. "Driving mode"3. "Driving mode info"

Seite 142

Controls Driving stability control systems

142Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 147: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Driving comfortVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems.

Active Cruise Control withStop & Go function, ACCThe conceptUse this system to select a desired speed thatthe vehicle will maintain automatically on clearroads.To the extent possible, the system automati‐cally adjusts the speed to a slower vehicleahead of you.The distance that the vehicle maintains to thevehicle ahead of you can be varied.For safety reasons, it depends on the speed.To maintain a certain distance, the system au‐tomatically reduces the speed, applies thebrakes lightly, or accelerates again if the vehi‐cle ahead begins moving faster.If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, andthen proceeds to drive again within a brief pe‐riod, the system is able to detect this within thegiven system limits. Your own vehicle willbrake automatically and then accelerate again.If the vehicle ahead of you drives away againafter a prolonged period, briefly press the ac‐celerator pedal or press the appropriate buttonto reactivate the system. The vehicle will auto‐matically accelerate.As soon as the road is clear, the vehicle accel‐erates to the desired speed.

The speed is also maintained downhill, butmay not be maintained uphill if engine power isinsufficient.

General informationDepending on the driving settings, the featuresof the cruise control can change in certainareas.

HintsPersonal responsibilityEven an active system holds the driver

responsible for his or her driving, particularlyfor staying in your lane, adjusting your speed,keeping your distance and for your drivingstyle all in relation to traffic.Technically the system has its limits, it cannotindependently react to all traffic situations.Monitor your driving, be on the alert, observethe vehicle surroundings and other traffic andreact when needed, e.g. through braking,steering or make evasive maneuvers - risk ofaccident.◀

Unfavorable weather conditionsIn the event of unfavorable weather and

light conditions, e. g. if there is rain, snowfall,slush, fog or glare, this may result in poorerrecognition of vehicles as well as short-terminterruptions for vehicles that are already de‐tected. Drive attentively, and react to the cur‐rent traffic situation. Intervene actively whennecessary, e.g., by braking, steering or makingan evasive maneuver, otherwise, there is therisk of an accident.◀

Before leaving the vehicle, secure itagainst moving on its own.

Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐ning: set the parking brake and ensure that the

Seite 143

Driving comfort Controls

143Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 148: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Steptronic transmission is in position P. Other‐wise, the vehicle may begin to move.◀

At a glance

Buttons on the steering wheel

Press but‐ton

Function

Cruise control on/off, interrupt,refer to page 144

Store/maintain speed, refer topage 145

Resume speed, refer topage 146

Reduce distance, refer topage 146

Increase distance, refer topage 146

Rocker reel:Maintain, store, change speed,refer to page 145

Buttons are arranged according to vehicle'sseries, optional features and country specifica‐tions.

Radar sensorA radar sensor is located in the front bumperfor detecting vehicles on the road ahead of thevehicle.

A dirty or covered sensor may prevent the de‐tection of vehicles.

▷ If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re‐move layers of snow and ice carefully.

▷ Do not cover the view field of the radarsensor.

Camera

The camera is found near the interior rearviewmirror.Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐terior rearview mirror clean and clear.A dirty or covered area in front of the interiormirror may hinder the detection of vehicles.If necessary, clean the area in front of the inte‐rior mirror, e.g., carefully remove salt residue inthe winter.

Switching on/off and interruptingcruise control

Switching onPress button on the steering wheel.

Seite 144

Controls Driving comfort

144Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 149: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

The indicator lights in the instrument clusterlight up and the mark in the speedometer is setto the current speed.Cruise control can be used.

Switch offDeactivated or interrupted systemWith deactivated or interrupted system

use your brakes, steering and moves as usualto avoid the chance of an accident.◀

To switch off the system while standing, stepon brake pedal at the same time.

Press button on the steering wheel.

▷ If active: press twice.▷ If interrupted: press once.The displays go out. The stored desired speedand distance are deleted.

InterruptingPress button on the steering wheel.

If interrupting the system while stationary,press on the brake pedal at the same time.The system is automatically interrupted in thefollowing situations:▷ When the brakes are applied.▷ When the clutch pedal is depressed.▷ When selector lever position D is disen‐

gaged.▷ When DTC Dynamic Traction Control is

activated or DSC is deactivated.▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving

Dynamics Control.▷ If the safety belt and the driver's door are

opened while the vehicle is standing still.▷ If the system has not detected objects for

an extended period, e.g., on a road with

very little traffic without curb or shouldermarkings.

▷ If the detection range of the radar is dis‐rupted, e.g., by dirt or heavy fog.

Maintaining, storing, and changing thespeed

HintsAdjusting the desired speedModify desired speed to road conditions

and be ready to brake at all times; otherwise,there is the risk of an accident.◀

Differences in speedLarge differences in speed relative to

other vehicles cannot be compensated by thesystem such as in the following situations:▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving

vehicle.▷ When another vehicle suddenly swerves

into the wrong lane.▷ When stationary objects are approached at

high speed.◀

Maintaining/storing the speedPress button.Or:

Press the rocker reel while the system is inter‐rupted.

When the system is switched on, the currentspeed is maintained and stored as the desiredspeed.

Seite 145

Driving comfort Controls

145Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 150: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

This is displayed in the speedometer andbriefly in the instrument cluster. Displays in theinstrument cluster, refer to page 147.When cruise control is maintained or stored,DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be turnedon if needed.

Changing the speedPress the rocker reel up or down repeatedlyuntil the desired speed is set.If active, the displayed speed is stored and thevehicle reaches the stored speed when theroad is clear.▷ Each time the rocker reel is pressed to the

point of resistance, the desired speed in‐creases or decreases by approx.1 mph/1 km/h.

▷ Each time the rocker reel is pressed pastthe point of resistance, the desired speedincreases or decreases by a maximum of5 mph/10 km/h.

Hold the rocker reel in position to repeat theaction.

DistanceSelect a distanceAdjust the distance according to the traf‐

fic and weather conditions; otherwise, there isthe risk of an accident. Maintain the prescribedsafety distance.◀

Reduce distancePress button repeatedly until the de‐sired distance is set.

Instrument cluster will display selected dis‐tance, refer to page 147.

Increase distancePress button repeatedly until the de‐sired distance is set.

Instrument cluster will display selected dis‐tance, refer to page 147.

Calling up the desired speed anddistance

While drivingPress button with the systemswitched on.

In the following cases, the stored speed valueis deleted and cannot be called up again:▷ When the system is switched off.▷ When the ignition is switched off.

While standingThe system brought the vehicle to a completestandstill:▷ Green marking in the speedometer:

Your vehicle accelerates automatically assoon as the vehicle in the range of the ra‐dar sensor moves off.

▷ Speedometer markings turn orange: no au‐tomatic driving off.To accelerate to the desired speed auto‐matically, press the accelerator or pressthe RES or SET button.

Rolling bars in the distance display indicatethat the the vehicle detected by the radar sen‐sor has driven off.Your vehicle was brought down to a haltthrough stepping on the brake pedal and it isstanding behind another vehicle:

1. Press button to call up a storeddesired speed.

2. Release the brake pedal.3. Step on the accelerator briefly, or press the

RES rocker reel when the vehicle ahead ofyou drives away.

Seite 146

Controls Driving comfort

146Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 151: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Displays in the instrument cluster

Desired speed▷ The marking lights up green:

the system is active.▷ The marking lights up or‐

ange: the system has beeninterrupted.

▷ The marking does not light up: the systemis switched off.

With instrument display: the symbol isdisplayed in the speedometer similarlyto the mark for the desired speed.

Brief status displaySelected desired speed.

If --- appears briefly on the display for CheckControl messages, it is possible that the sys‐tem requirements are currently not ready foroperations.

Distance to vehicle ahead of youShown is selected distance to the vehicle driv‐ing ahead of you.

Distance display

Distance 1

Distance 2

Distance 3

Distance 4This value is set after the system isswitched on.

Distance display

The system has been interrupted ordistance control is temporarily sup‐pressed because the acceleratorpedal is being pressed; a vehiclewas not detected.

Distance control is temporarily sup‐pressed because the acceleratorpedal is being pressed; a vehiclewas detected.

Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has drivenaway.ACC is no longer accelerating. To acceleratefurther, activate ACC by briefly stepping onthe accelerator pedal, pressing the RES but‐ton or rocker reel.

Indicator/warning lightsPersonal responsibilityThe indicator and warning lights do not

relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapthis or her desired driving speed and style tothe traffic conditions.◀

The vehicle symbol lights up orange:A vehicle has been detected ahead ofyou.

The vehicle symbol flashes orange:The conditions are not adequate forthe system to work.

The system was deactivated but applies thebrakes until you actively resume control bypressing on the brake pedal or acceleratorpedal.

The vehicle symbol flashes red and anacoustic signal sounds:You are requested to intervene by

braking or make an evasive maneuver.

Seite 147

Driving comfort Controls

147Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 152: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Displays in the Head-up DisplaySome system information can also be dis‐played in the Head-up Display.

Distance informationThe symbol is displayed when the dis‐tance from the vehicle traveling aheadis too short.

▷ Active Cruise Control switched off.▷ Display in the Head-up Display selected,

refer to page 101▷ Distance too short.▷ Speed greater than approx.

40 mph/70 km/h.

System limits

Speed rangeThe system is best used on well-constructedroads.The minimum speed that can be set is20 mph/30 km/h. The maximum speed thatcan be set depends on the vehicle.The system can also be activated when sta‐tionary.Comply with the legal speed limit in every sit‐uation when using the system.

Detection range

The detection lidacity of the system and theautomatic braking lidacity are limited.Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might notbe detected.

Limited detection potentialBecause of the limited possible detec‐

tion, you should be alert at all times so that youcan intervene if needed; otherwise, there is therisk of an accident.◀

DecelerationThe system does not decelerate for:▷ Pedestrians or similar slow-moving road

users.▷ Red traffic lights.▷ Cross traffic.▷ Oncoming traffic.

Swerving vehicles

A vehicle driving in front of you is not detecteduntil it is completely within the same lane asyour vehicle.

Swerving vehiclesIf a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly

swerves into your lane, the system may not beable to automatically restore the selected dis‐tance. This also applies to major speed differ‐ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g.,when rapidly approaching a truck. When a ve‐hicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected,the system requests that the driver interveneby braking and carrying out evasive maneu‐vers, if needed. You must react yourself; other‐wise, there is the risk of an accident.◀

Seite 148

Controls Driving comfort

148Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 153: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Cornering

If the desired speed is too high for a curve, thespeed is reduced slightly, although curves can‐not be anticipated in advance. Therefore, driveinto a curve at an appropriate speed.In tight curves the system offers only restricteddetection where a vehicle ahead of you mightbe detected late or not at all.

When you approach a curve the system maybriefly report vehicles in the next lane due tothe bend of the curve. If the system deceler‐ates you may compensate it by briefly acceler‐ating.After releasing the gas pedal the system is re‐activated and controls speed independently.

Driving awayIn some situations, the vehicle cannot drive offautomatically; for example:▷ On steep inclines.▷ From behind bumps in the road.In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.

Radar sensor

For US owners onlyThe transmitter and receiver units comply withpart 15 of the FCC/Federal CommunicationCommission regulations. Operation is gov‐erned by the following:FCC ID:▷ OAYARS3-ACompliance statement:This device complies with part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐

ference, and▷ this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications or changes tothese devices could void the user's authority tooperate this equipment.

MalfunctionThe system cannot be activated if the radarsensor is not aligned correctly. This may becaused by damage incurred during parking,e.g.A Check Control message is displayed if thesystem fails.The function for detecting and respondingwhen approaching stationary vehicles may belimited in the following situations:▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐

ately after vehicle shipment.▷ If the camera is malfunctioning or dirty. A

Check Control message is displayed.

Seite 149

Driving comfort Controls

149Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 154: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Cruise controlThe conceptThe system maintains a preset speed via thebuttons on the steering wheel. The systembrakes on downhill gradients if engine brakingis insufficient.

General informationDepending on the driving settings, the featuresof the cruise control can change in certainareas.

HintsUnfavorable conditionsDo not use the system if unfavorable

conditions make it impossible to drive at a con‐stant speed, e.g.:▷ On winding roads.▷ In heavy traffic.▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or

on a loose road surface.Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehi‐cle and cause an accident.◀

Controls

At a glance

Press but‐ton

Function

Cruise control on/off, interrupt,refer to page 150

Store/maintain speed, refer topage 151

Resume speed, refer topage 151

Rocker reel:Maintain, store, change speed,refer to page 151

Buttons are arranged according to vehicle'sseries, optional features and country specifica‐tions.

Switching onPress button on the steering wheel.

The marking in the speedometer is set to thecurrent speed.The cruise control can be used.

Switch offDeactivated or interrupted systemWith deactivated or interrupted system

use your brakes, steering and moves as usualto avoid the chance of an accident.◀

Press button on the steering wheel.

▷ If active: press twice.▷ If interrupted: press once.The displays go out. The stored desired speedis deleted.

InterruptingWhen active, press the button.

The system is automatically interrupted if:▷ The brakes are applied.▷ The clutch pedal is depressed for a few

seconds or released while a gear is not en‐gaged.

▷ Selector lever position D is disengaged.▷ DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated

or DSC is deactivated.▷ DSC is actively controlling stability.▷ HDC is activated.▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving

Dynamics Control.

Seite 150

Controls Driving comfort

150Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 155: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Maintaining, storing, and changing thespeed

HintsAdjusting the desired speedModify desired speed to road conditions

and be ready to brake at all times; otherwise,there is the risk of an accident.◀

Maintaining/storing the speedPress button.Or:

Press the rocker reel while the system is inter‐rupted.When the system is switched on, the currentspeed is maintained and stored as the desiredspeed.This is displayed, refer to page 151, in thespeedometer and briefly in the instrumentcluster.When cruise control is maintained or stored,DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be turnedon if needed.

Changing the speedPress the rocker reel up or down repeatedlyuntil the desired speed is set.If active, the displayed speed is stored and thevehicle reaches the stored speed when theroad is clear.▷ Each time the rocker reel is pressed to the

point of resistance, the desired speed in‐

creases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/ km/

▷ Each time the rocker reel is pressed pastthe point of resistance, the desired speedincreases or decreases by a maximum of5 mph/10 km/h.The maximum speed that can be set de‐pends on the vehicle.

▷ Pressing the rocker reel to the resistancepoint and holding it accelerates or deceler‐ates the vehicle without requiring pressureon the accelerator pedal.After the rocker reel is released, the vehiclemaintains its final speed. Pressing the reelbeyond the resistance point causes the ve‐hicle to accelerate more rapidly.

Resuming the desired speedPress button.

The stored speed is reached and maintained.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Indicator lampDepending on how the vehicle is equip‐ped, the indicator lamp in the instru‐ment cluster indicates whether the sys‐

tem is switched on.

Desired speed▷ The marking lights up green:

the system is active.▷ The marking lights up or‐

ange: the system has beeninterrupted.

▷ The marking does not light up: the systemis switched off.

With instrument display: the symbol isdisplayed in the speedometer similarlyto the mark for the desired speed.

Seite 151

Driving comfort Controls

151Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 156: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Brief status displaySelected desired speed.

If --- appears briefly on the display for CheckControl messages, it is possible that the sys‐tem requirements are currently not ready foroperations.

Displays in the Head-up DisplaySome system information can also be dis‐played in the Head-up Display.

PDC Park Distance ControlThe conceptPDC is a support when parking. When youslowly approach an object in the rear - or alsoin the front of the vehicle if the feature is availa‐ble - then the object is reported through:▷ Signal tones.▷ Visual display.

General informationUltrasound sensors in the bumpers measurethe distances from objects.The maneuvering range, depending on the ob‐stacle and environmental conditions, is approx.6 ft/2 m.An acoustic warning is first given:▷ By the front sensors and the two rear cor‐

ner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm.▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx.

5 ft/1.50 m.To ensure full functionality:▷ Do not cover sensors, e.g., with stickers,

bicycle racks and the like.▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not

spray the sensors for long periods andmaintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.

HintsPersonal responsibilityEven an active system does not relieve

the driver from personal responsibility whiledriving.Technically the system has its limits, it cannotindependently react to all traffic situations.Monitor your driving, be on the alert, observethe vehicle surroundings and other traffic andreact when needed - risk of accident.◀

Avoid driving fast with PDCAvoid approaching an object too fast.

Avoid driving off fast while PDC is not yet ac‐tive.For technical reasons, the system may other‐wise be too late in issuing a warning.◀

At a glance

With front PDC: button in vehicle

PDC Park Distance Control

Switching on/off

Switching on automaticallyWith the engine running, engage lever in posi‐tion P R.The rearview camera also switches on.

Seite 152

Controls Driving comfort

152Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 157: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Automatic deactivation during forwardtravelThe system switches off when a certain drivingdistance or speed is exceeded.Switch the system back on if needed.

With front PDC: switching on/offmanually

Press button.

▷ On: the LED lights up.▷ Off: the LED goes out.The rearview camera image is displayed whenthe reverse gear is engaged by pressing thebutton.

Display

Signal tonesWhen approaching an object, an intermittentsound indicates the position of the object. E. g.if an object is detected to the left rear of thevehicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rearspeaker.The shorter the distance to the object, theshorter the intervals.If the distance to a detected object is less thanapprox. 10 in/25 cm, a continuous tone issounded.With front PDC: if objects are located both infront of and behind the vehicle, an alternatingcontinuous signal is sounded.An interval tone is interrupted with the appro‐priate equipment after about 3 seconds:▷ If the vehicle stops in front of an object that

is detected by only one of the corner sen‐sors.

▷ If moving parallel to a wall.The signal tone is switched off:▷ When the vehicle moves away from an ob‐

ject by more than approx. 4 in/10 cm.

▷ When selector lever position P is engagedon vehicles with Steptronic transmission.

VolumeThe volume of the PDC signal tone can be ad‐justed similar to the sound and volume set‐tings of the radio.Settings are stored for the profile currently inuse.

Visual warningThe approach of the vehicle to an object canbe shown on the Control Display. Objects thatare farther away are already displayed on theControl Display before a signal sounds.A display appears as soon as Park DistanceControl (PDC) is activated.The range of the sensors is represented in thecolors green, yellow and red.When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐played, the reel can be made to PDC:

"Rear view camera"

System limits

Limits of ultrasonic measurementUltrasonic measuring might not function underthe following circumstances:▷ For small children and animals.▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g.

coats.▷ With external interference of the ultra‐

sound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loudmachines.

▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐aged or out of position.

▷ Under certain weather conditions such ashigh relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐treme heat or strong wind.

▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of othervehicles.

▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.

Seite 153

Driving comfort Controls

153Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 158: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

▷ With moving objects.▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as

ledges or cargo.▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.▷ With objects with a fine surface structure

such as fences.▷ For objects with porous surfaces.Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, canmove into the blind area of the sensors beforeor after a continuous tone sounds.

False warningsPDC may issue a warning under the followingconditions even though there is no obstaclewithin the detection range:▷ In heavy rain.▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered

with ice.▷ When sensors are covered in snow.▷ On rough road surfaces.▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed

bumps.▷ In large buildings with right angles and

smooth walls, e.g., in underground ga‐rages.

▷ Through heavy pollution.▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,

sweeping machines, high pressure steamcleaners or neon lights.

MalfunctionA Check Control message is displayed.The range of the sensors is shown as a shadedarea on the Control Display.PDC has failed. Have the system checked.To ensure full functionality:▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.▷ dimmedDo not put any stickers on sen‐

sors.

▷ When using high-pressure washers, do notspray the sensors for long periods andmaintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.

Surround ViewThe conceptSurround View comprises various camera as‐sistance systems that help the driver whenparking, maneuvering, and at complex exitsand intersections.▷ Rearview camera, refer to page 154▷ Side View, refer to page 157.▷ Top View, refer to page 158.

Rearview cameraThe conceptThe rearview camera provides assistance inparking and maneuvering backwards. The areabehind the vehicle is shown on the ControlDisplay.

HintsCheck the traffic situation as wellCheck the traffic situation around the ve‐

hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐dent could result from road users or objectsthat are not lidtured by the camera.◀

Seite 154

Controls Driving comfort

154Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 159: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Rearview camera

Camera

The camera lens is located in the handle of thetrunk lid. The image quality may be impairedby dirt.Clean the lens, refer to page 251.

Switching on/off

Switching on automaticallyWith the engine running, engage lever in posi‐tion P R.

Automatic deactivation during forwardtravelThe system switches off when a certain drivingdistance or speed is exceeded.Switch the system back on if needed.

Switching on/off manuallyPress button.

▷ On: the LED lights up.▷ Off: the LED goes out.The PDC is shown on the Control Display.The rearview camera image is displayed whenthe reverse gear is engaged by pressing thebutton.

Switching the view via iDriveWith PDC activated or Top View switched on:

"Rear view camera"The rearview camera image is displayed.

Display on the Control Display

Functional requirement▷ The rearview camera is switched on.▷ The trunk lid is fully closed.

Activating assistance functionsMore than one assistance function can be ac‐tive at the same time.▷ Parking aid lines

"Parking aid lines"Lanes and turning radius are indicated.

▷ Obstacle marking "Obstacle marking"

Spatially-shaped markings are displayed.

Seite 155

Driving comfort Controls

155Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 160: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Pathway lines

▷ Pathway lines can be superimposed on theimage of the rearview camera.

▷ They help you to estimate how muchspace is needed when parking and maneu‐vering on level pavement.

▷ They are dependent on the current steer‐ing angle and are continuously adjusted tothe steering wheel movements.

Turning circle lines

▷ Turning circle lines can only be superim‐posed on the rearview camera image to‐gether with pathway lines.

▷ They show the course of the smallest pos‐sible turning radius on a level road.

▷ Only one turning radius line is displayed af‐ter the steering wheel is turned past a cer‐tain angle.

Obstacle marking

Obstacle markings can be faded into the imageof the rearview camera.Their colored margins match the markings ofthe PDC. This simplifies estimation of the dis‐tance to the object shown.

Parking using pathway and turningradius lines1. Position the vehicle so that the turning ra‐

dius lines lead to within the limits of theparking space.

2. Turn the steering wheel to the point wherethe pathway line covers the correspondingturning radius line.

Seite 156

Controls Driving comfort

156Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 161: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Display settings

BrightnessWith the rearview camera switched on:

1. Select the symbol.2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached, and press the controller.

ContrastWith the rearview camera switched on:

1. Select the symbol.2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached, and press the controller.

System limits

Detection of objectsVery low obstacles as well as high, protrudingobjects such as ledges may not be detected bythe system.Assistance functions also take into accountdata of the PDC.Follow instructions in the PDC chapter, refer topage 152.The objects displayed on the Control Displayunder certain circumstances are closer thanthey appear. Do not estimate the distance fromthe objects on the display.

Side ViewThe conceptSide View provides an early look at cross trafficat blind driveways and intersections. Roadusers concealed by obstacles to the left andright of the vehicle can only be detected rela‐tively late from the driver's seat. To improvevisibility, two cameras in the front of the vehi‐cle record the traffic situation on each side.

HintsThe images from both cameras are shown si‐multaneously on the Control Display.

Check the traffic situation as wellCheck the traffic situation around the ve‐

hicle on blind driveways and intersections withyour own eyes. Otherwise, an accident couldresult from road users or objects located out‐side the picture area of the Side View cam‐eras.◀

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Side View

Cameras

Two cameras integrated in the bumpers lidturethe image.The two camera lenses are located on thesides of the bumper.The image quality may be impaired by dirt.Clean the lens, refer to page 251.

Seite 157

Driving comfort Controls

157Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 162: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Switching on/off

Switching on/off manuallyPress button.

Automatic deactivation during forwardtravelThe system switches off when a certain drivingdistance or speed is exceeded.Switch the system back on if needed.

DisplayThe traffic area to the left and right is displayedon the Control Display.

Guidelines at the bottom of the image showthe position of the front of the vehicle.

BrightnessWith the Side View switched on:

1. "Brightness"2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached, and press the controller.

ContrastWith the Side View switched on:

1. "Contrast"2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached, and press the controller.

System limitsThe cameras lidture a maximum range of330 ft/100 m.

Top ViewThe conceptTop View provides assistance in parking andmaneuvering. The area around the doors andthe road area around the vehicle are shown onthe Control Display for this purpose.

General informationThe image is lidtured by two camerasintegrated in the exterior mirrors and by therearview camera.The range is at least 7 ft/2 m to the side andrear.In this way, obstacles up to the height of theexterior mirrors are detected early.

HintsCheck the traffic situation as wellCheck the traffic situation around the ve‐

hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐dent could result from road users or objectsthat are not lidtured by the camera.◀

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Top View

Seite 158

Controls Driving comfort

158Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 163: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Cameras

The lenses of the Top View camera are locatedat the bottom in the mirror housings. The im‐age quality may be impaired by dirt.Clean the lens, refer to page 251.

Switching on/off

Switching on automaticallyWith the engine running, engage lever in posi‐tion P R.The rearview camera image is displayed. Toswitch to the Top View:

"Rear view camera"

Automatic deactivation during forwardtravelThe system switches off when a certain drivingdistance or speed is exceeded.Switch the system back on if needed.

Switching on/off manuallyPress button.

▷ On: the LED lights up.▷ Off: the LED goes out.Top View is displayed.The rearview camera image is displayed whenthe reverse gear is engaged by pressing thebutton.

Display

Visual warningThe approach of the vehicle to an object canbe shown on the Control Display.When the distance to an object is small, a redbar is shown in front of the vehicle, as it is inthe PDC display.

The display appears as soon as Top View isactivated.

When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐played, it is possible to reel to top view:

"Rear view camera"

BrightnessWith Top View switched on:

1. Select the symbol.2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached, and press the controller.

ContrastWith Top View switched on:

1. Select the symbol.2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached, and press the controller.

Displaying the turning radius andpathway lines▷ The static, red turning radius line shows

the space needed to the side of the vehiclewhen the steering wheel is turned all theway.

Seite 159

Driving comfort Controls

159Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 164: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

▷ The variable, green pathway line assistsyou in assessing the amount of space ac‐tually needed to the side of the vehicle.The lane line depends on the engagedgear and the current steering angle. Thetrack line is continuously adjusted for thesteering wheel movement.

"Parking aid lines"Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed.

System limitsTop View cannot be used in the following sit‐uations:▷ With a door open.▷ With the trunk lid open.▷ With an exterior mirror folded in.▷ In poor light.A Check Control message is displayed in someof these situations.

Parking assistantThe concept

This system assists the driver in parking paral‐lel to the road.Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaceson both sides of the vehicle.Manual transmission:The parking assistant calculates the best pos‐sible parking line and takes control of steeringduring the parking procedure.Steptronic transmission:

The parking assistant calculates the best pos‐sible parking line and during the parking proce‐dure takes control of steering, the accelerationand braking and if needed changes the gears.Hold down the parking assistant button for theduration of the parking procedure. At the endof the parking procedure, the P selector leverposition is set.When parking, also take note of the visual andacoustic information and instructions issuedby the PDC, the parking assistant and the rear‐view camera and react accordingly.A component of the parking assistant is thePDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 152.

HintsPersonal responsibilityEven an active system does not relieve

the driver from personal responsibility whiledriving.Technically the system has its limits, it cannotindependently react to all traffic situations.Monitor your driving, be on the alert, observethe vehicle surroundings and other traffic andreact when needed - risk of accident.◀

Changes to the parking spaceChanges to the parking space after it was

measured are not taken into account by thesystem.Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐vene; otherwise, there is the risk of an acci‐dent.◀

Transporting cargoCargo that extends beyond the perimeter

of the vehicle is not taken into account by thesystem during the parking procedure.Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐vene; otherwise, there is the risk of an acci‐dent.◀

Seite 160

Controls Driving comfort

160Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 165: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

CurbsThe parking assistant may steer the vehi‐

cle over or onto curb if need be.Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐vene; otherwise, the wheels, tires, or the vehi‐cle may become damaged.◀

An engine that has been switched off by theAuto Start Stop function is restarted automati‐cally when the parking assistant is activated.

Requirements

For measuring parking spaces▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐

prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐

cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.

Suitable parking space▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum

length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.▷ Min. length of gap between two objects:

your vehicle's length plus approx.4 ft/1.2 m.

▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.

Regarding the parking procedure▷ Doors and trunk lid closed.▷ Parking brake released.▷ When parking in parking spaces on the

driver's side, the corresponding turn signalmust be set where applicable.

Steptronic transmission:▷ Driver's safety belt fastened.

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Parking assistant

Ultrasound sensors

The ultrasound sensors for measuring parkingspaces are located on the side of the vehicle.To ensure full functionality:▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not

spray the sensors for long periods andmaintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.

▷ Do not put stickers over sensors.

Switching on/off

Switching on with the buttonPress button.The LED lights up.

The current status of the parking space searchis indicated on the Control Display.

Seite 161

Driving comfort Controls

161Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 166: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Parking assistant is activated automatically.

Switching on with the reverse gearShift into reverse.The current status of the parking space searchis indicated on the Control Display.To activate: "Parking Assistant"

Switch offThe system can be deactivated as follows:▷ Press button.

▷ Switch off the ignition.

Display on the Control Display

System activated/deactivated

Symbol Meaning

Gray: the system is not available.White: the system is available butnot activated.

The system is activated.

System status

▷ Colored symbols, see arrows, on the sideof the vehicle illustrated. Parking assistantis activated and search for parking spaceactive.

▷ Control Display shows suitable parkingspaces at the edge of the road next to thevehicle symbol. When the parking assistant

is active, suitable parking spaces are high‐lighted.

▷ The parking procedure is ac‐tive. Steering control hasbeen taken over by system.

▷ Parking space search is always activewhenever the vehicle is moving forwardslow and straight, even if the system is de‐activated. When the system is deactivated,the displays on the Control Display areshown in gray.

Parking using the parking assistantCheck the traffic situation as wellLouds noises outside and inside the ve‐

hicle can drown out the parking assistant's andPDC's signals.Check the traffic situation around the vehiclewith your own eyes; otherwise, there is a dan‐ger of an accident.◀

1. Switch on the parking assistant and acti‐vate it if needed.The status of the parking space search isindicated on the Control Display.

2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐play.The best possible parking position willcome after gear change on the stationaryvehicle - wait for the automatic steeringwheel move.The end of the parking procedure is indi‐cated on the Control Display.

3. Adjust the parking position yourself ifneeded.

Interrupting manuallyThe parking assistant can be interrupted at anytime:▷ "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol

on the Control Display.

Seite 162

Controls Driving comfort

162Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 167: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

▷ Press button.

Interrupting automaticallyThe system is interrupted automatically in thefollowing situations:▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or if

he takes over steering.▷ If a gear is selected that does not match

the instruction on the Control Display.▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.

6 mph/10 km/h.▷ Possible on snow-covered or slippery road

surfaces.▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to

overcome, such as curbs.▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly

arise.▷ If the Park Distance Control PDC displays

clearances that are too small.▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts

or the time taken for parking is exceeded.▷ If a turn signal has been actuated contrary

to the desired side for parking.▷ When switching to another function on the

Control Display.Steptronic transmission:▷ When the button is released.▷ If the trunk lid is open.▷ If doors are open.▷ When setting the parking brake.▷ During acceleration.▷ When braking.▷ When unfastening the driver's safety belt.A Check Control message is displayed.

ResumeAn interrupted parking procedure can be con‐tinued if needed.

Follow the instructions on the Control Displayto do this.

System limits

No parking assistanceThe parking assistant does not offer assis‐tance in the following situations:▷ In tight curves.

Functional limitationsThe system may not be fully functional in thefollowing situations:▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel

roads.▷ On slippery ground.▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the

parking space.

Limits of ultrasonic measurementUltrasonic measuring might not function underthe following circumstances:▷ For small children and animals.▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g.

coats.▷ With external interference of the ultra‐

sound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loudmachines.

▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐aged or out of position.

▷ Under certain weather conditions such ashigh relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐treme heat or strong wind.

▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of othervehicles.

▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.▷ With moving objects.▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as

ledges or cargo.▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.

Seite 163

Driving comfort Controls

163Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 168: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

▷ With objects with a fine surface structuresuch as fences.

▷ For objects with porous surfaces.Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, canmove into the blind area of the sensors beforeor after a continuous tone sounds.The parking assistant may identify parkingspaces that are not suitable for parking.

MalfunctionA Check Control message is displayed.The parking assistant failed. Have the systemchecked.

Seite 164

Controls Driving comfort

164Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 169: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Climate controlVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems.

Automatic climate control

1 Air distribution, left2 Temperature, left3 AUTO program, left4 Air flow, AUTO intensity, left, residual heat5 Remove ice and condensation6 Maximum cooling7 Display8 Air flow, AUTO intensity, right9 AUTO program, right10 Temperature, right

11 Air distribution, right12 Seat heating, right  5613 Active seat ventilation, right  5714 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐

lated-air mode15 Cooling function16 Rear window defroster17 SYNC program18 Active seat ventilation, left  5719 Seat heating, left  56

Seite 165

Climate control Controls

165Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 170: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

HintsSufficient ventilationWhen remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐

tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recir‐culated-air mode; otherwise the air quality inthe interior continuously worsens.◀

Climate control functions in detail

Manual air distributionPress button repeatedly to select aprogram:

▷ Upper body region.▷ Upper body region and footwell.▷ Footwell.▷ Windows and footwell.▷ Windows, upper body region, and footwell.▷ Windows: driver's side only.▷ Windows and upper body region.If the windows are fogged over, press theAUTO button on the driver's side to utilize thecondensation sensor.

TemperatureTurn the ring to set the desiredtemperature.

The automatic climate control achieves thistemperature as quickly as possible, if neededby using the maximum cooling or heating li‐dacity, and then keeps it constant.Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐just the set temperature.

AUTO programPress button.Air flow, air distribution and tempera‐

ture are controlled automatically.

Depending on the selected temperature,AUTO intensity program and outside influen‐ces, the air is directed to the windshield, sidewindows, upper body, and into the footwell.The cooling function, refer to page 167, isswitched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐gram.At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐trols the program so as to prevent windowcondensation as much as possible.

Intensity of the AUTO programWith the AUTO program activated, the auto‐matic intensity control can be changed.

Press the left or right side of the but‐ton: decrease or increase the inten‐

sity.

The selected intensity is shown on the displayof the automatic climate control.

Air flow, manualTo manually adjust air flow turn off AUTO pro‐gram first.

Press the left or right side of the but‐ton: decrease or increase air flow.

The selected air flow is shown on the display ofthe automatic climate control.The air flow of the automatic climate controlmay be reduced automatically to save batterypower.

Defrosts windows and removescondensation

Press button.

Seite 166

Controls Climate control

166Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 171: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Ice and condensation are quickly removedfrom the windshield and the front side win‐dows.For this purpose, point the side vents onto theside windows as needed.

Adjust air flow with the program active.If the windows are fogged over, you can alsoreel on the cooling function or press the AUTObutton to utilize the condensation sensor.

Maximum coolingPress button.The system is set to the lowest tem‐

perature, optimum air flow and air circulationmode.

Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐gion. The vents need to be open for this.The function is available above an externaltemperature of approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with theengine running is indicated.Adjust air flow with the program active.

Automatic recirculated-air control/recirculated-air modeYou may respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐rarily suspending the supply of outside air. Thesystem then recirculates the air currentlywithin the vehicle.

Press button repeatedly to select anoperating mode:

▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air

control: a sensor detects pollutants in theoutside air and shuts off automatically.

▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: thesupply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐manently blocked.

If the windows are fogged over, reel off the re‐circulated-air mode and press the AUTO but‐ton on the driver's side to utilize the condensa‐

tion sensor. Make sure that air can flow to thewindshield.

Sufficient ventilationWhen remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐

tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recir‐culated-air mode; otherwise the air quality inthe interior continuously worsens.◀

Cooling functionThe car's interior can only be cooled with theengine running.

Press button.The air will be cooled and dehumidi‐

fied and, depending on the temperature set‐ting, warmed again.

Depending on the weather, the windshield andside windows may fog up briefly when the en‐gine is started.The cooling function is switched on automati‐cally with the AUTO program.When using the automatic climate control,condensation water, refer to page 191, devel‐ops that exits underneath the vehicle.

Rear window defrosterPress button.The rear window defroster switches

off automatically after a certain period of time.

SYNC programThe current settings on the driver'sside for temperature, air flow, air distri‐

bution, and AUTO program are transferred tothe front passenger side and to the left andright rear.The program is switched off if the settings onthe front passenger side or in the rear arechanged.

Seite 167

Climate control Controls

167Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 172: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Residual heatThe heat stored in the engine is used to heatthe interior.

Functional requirement▷ Up to 15 minutes after switching off the

engine.▷ Warm engine.▷ The battery is sufficiently charged.▷ External temperature below 77 ℉/25 ℃.The availability of the function is shown on thedisplay of the automatic climate control.

Switching on1. Switch off the ignition.

2. Press the right side of the buttonon the driver's side.

The symbol appears on the automatic cli‐mate Control Display.The interior temperature, air volume and airdistribution can be adjusted with the ignitionswitched on.

Switch offAt the lowest fan speed, press the left side ofthe button on the driver's side.

The symbol on the display of the automaticclimate control flashes.

Switching the system on/off

Switch off▷ Complete system:

Press and hold the left button onthe driver's side until the control

clicks off.▷ On the front passenger side:

Press and hold the left button onthe front passenger side.

Switching onPress any button except:▷ Rear window defroster.▷ Left side of Air volume button.▷ Seat heating.▷ Seat ventilation.▷ If necessary, SYNC program.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filterThe microfilter removes dust and pollen fromthe incoming air.The activated-charcoal filter removes gaseouspollutants from the outside air that enters thevehicle.This combined filter should be replaced duringscheduled maintenance, refer to page 233, ofyour vehicle.

VentilationFront ventilation

▷ Thumbwheels to vary the temperature inthe upper body region, arrow 1.Toward blue: colder.Toward red: warmer.The set interior temperature for the driverand passenger are not changed.

▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,arrow 2.

▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing thevents continuously, arrows 3.

Seite 168

Controls Climate control

168Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 173: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Ventilation levels▷ Draft-free ventilation:

Thumbwheel, arrow 3, in level : the aircurrent is fanned out.

▷ Maximum air flow:Thumbwheel, arrow 3, in level : the airis partially fanned out and partially bundled.This maximizes the air supply.

▷ Direct ventilation:Thumbwheel, arrow 3, in level : the airis bundled and can be directed to a specificpoint.

Adjusting the ventilation▷ Ventilation for cooling:

Direct vent in your direction when vehicle'sinterior is too hot.

▷ Draft-free ventilation:Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.

Ventilation in rear, center

▷ Thumbwheels to vary the temperature, ar‐row 1.Toward blue: colder.Toward red: warmer.

▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,arrow 2.

▷ Thumbwheels for continuous opening andclosing of the vents, arrow 3.

Ventilation, side

▷ Thumbwheel for continuous opening andclosing of the vents, arrow 1.

▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,arrow 2.

Rear automatic climatecontrolAt a glance

1 Temperature2 AUTO program3 Vent settings4 Air flow, AUTO intensity5 Display6 Maximum cooling7 Seat heating  56

Switching the rear automatic climatecontrol on/off1. "Settings"2. "Climate"

Seite 169

Climate control Controls

169Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 174: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

3. "Rear climate"The rear automatic climate control is not op‐erational if the automatic climate control isswitched off or if the function for defrosting ordefogging the windows is active.

AUTO programPress button.Air flow, air distribution, and tempera‐

ture are controlled automatically:

Depending on the selected temperature, theAUTO intensity, and outside influences, the airis directed to the upper body and into the foot‐well.The cooling function is switched on automati‐cally with the AUTO program.

Intensity of the AUTO programWith the AUTO program activated, the auto‐matic intensity control can be changed:

Press the left or right side of the but‐ton: decrease or increase the inten‐

sity.

The selected intensity is shown on the displayof the automatic climate control.

TemperatureTurn the ring to set the desiredtemperature.

The automatic climate control achieves thistemperature as quickly as possible, if neededby using the maximum cooling or heating ca‐pacity, and then keeps it constant.Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐perature settings. The automatic climate con‐trol will not have sufficient time to adjust theset temperature.

Manual air distributionThe air distribution can be adjusted to individ‐ual needs.

Press button repeatedly to select aprogram:

▷ Upper body region.▷ Upper body region and footwell.▷ Footwell.

Air flow, manualTo manually adjust air flow turn off AUTO pro‐gram first.

Press the left or right side of the but‐ton: decrease or increase air flow.

The selected air flow is shown on the display ofthe automatic climate control.

Switching the system on/off

Switch offPress and hold the left button.

Switching onPress any button except:▷ Left side of Air volume button.▷ Seat heating.

Maximum coolingPress button.The system is set to the lowest tem‐

perature, maximum air flow and air circulationmode.

Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐gion. The vents need to be open for this.Air is cooled as quickly as possible:▷ At an external temperature of approx.

32 ℉/0 ℃.▷ When the engine is running.

Seite 170

Controls Climate control

170Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 175: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Parked-car ventilationThe conceptThe parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehi‐cle interior and lowers its temperature, ifneeded.Operation can be performed via iDrive.

Functional requirements

Parked-car ventilation▷ Using the preset reel-on time or when op‐

erated directly: any external temperature.Open the vents to allow air to flow out.

Switching on/off directlyOn the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Climate"3. "Activate comf. ventilation"

The symbol on the automatic climate con‐trol flashes if the system is switched on.The system continues to run for some time af‐ter being switched off.

Preselecting the reel-on timeOn the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Climate"3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"4. Set the desired time.

Activating the reel-on timeOn the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Climate"3. "Activate timer 1" or "Activate timer 2"

The symbol on the automatic climate con‐trol lights up when the reel-on time is acti‐vated.

The symbol on the automatic climate con‐trol flashes when the system has beenswitched on.The system will only be switched on within thenext 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reacti‐vated.

Seite 171

Climate control Controls

171Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 176: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Interior equipmentVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems.

Universal Integrated RemoteControlThe conceptThe universal garage door opener can operateup to 3 functions of remote-controlled sys‐tems such as garage door drives or lightingsystems. The universal garage door opener re‐places up to 3 different hand-held transmitters.To operate the remote control, the buttons onthe interior rearview mirror must be program‐med with the desired functions. The hand-heldtransmitter for the particular system is requiredin order to program the remote control.

During programmingDuring programming and before activat‐

ing a device using the universal garage dooropener, ensure that there are no people, ani‐mals or objects in the area of the remote-con‐trolled device; otherwise, there is a risk of in‐jury or damage.Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-held transmitter.◀

Before selling the vehicle, delete the storedfunctions for the sake of security.

CompatibilityIf this symbol is printed on the packag‐ing or in the instructions of the systemto be controlled, the system is gener‐

ally compatible with the universal garage dooropener.If you have any questions, please contact:▷ Your service center.▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.

HomeLink is a registered trademark of GentexCorporation.

Control elements on the interiorrearview mirror

▷ LED, arrow 1.▷ Buttons, arrow 2.▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐

quired for programming.

Programming

General information1. Switch on the ignition.2. Initial setup:

Press and hold the left and right button onthe interior rearview mirror simultaneouslyfor approximately 20 seconds until the LEDon the interior rearview mirror flashes. Thiserases all programming of the buttons onthe interior rearview mirror.

3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to8 cm away from the buttons of the interior

Seite 172

Controls Interior equipment

172Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 177: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

rearview mirror. The required distance de‐pends on the manual transmitter.

4. Simultaneously press and hold the buttonof the desired function on the hand-heldtransmitter and the button to be program‐med on the interior rearview mirror. TheLED on the interior rearview mirror will be‐gin flashing slowly.

5. Release both buttons as soon as the LEDflashes more rapidly. The LED flashingfaster indicates that the button on the inte‐rior rearview mirror has been programmed.If the LED does not flash faster after atleast 60 seconds, change the distance be‐tween the interior rearview mirror and thehand-held transmitter and repeat the step.Several more attempts at different distan‐ces may be necessary. Wait at least15 seconds between attempts.Canada: if programming with the hand-held transmitter was interrupted, holddown the interior rearview mirror buttonand repeatedly press and release thehand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐onds.

6. To program other functions on other but‐tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.

The systems can be controlled using the inte‐rior rearview mirror buttons.

Special feature of the alternating-code wireless systemIf you are unable to operate the system afterrepeated programming, please check if thesystem to be controlled features an alternat‐ing-code system.Read the system's operating manual, or pressthe programmed button on the interior rear‐view mirror longer. If the LED on the interiorrearview mirror starts flashing rapidly and thenstays lit constantly for 2 seconds, the systemfeatures an alternating-code system. Flashingand continuous illumination of the LED will re‐peat for approximately 20 seconds.

For systems with an alternating-code system,the universal garage door opener and the sys‐tem also have to be synchronized.Please read the operating manual to find outhow to synchronize the system.Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec‐ond person.To synchronize:

1. Park the vehicle within range of the re‐mote-controlled system.

2. Program the relevant button on the interiorrearview mirror as described.

3. Locate and press the synchronizing buttonon the system being programmed. Youhave approx. 30 seconds for the next step.

4. Hold down the programmed button on theinterior rearview mirror for approximately3 seconds and then release it. If necessary,repeat this step up to three times in orderto finish synchronization. Once synchroni‐zation is complete, the programmed func‐tion will be carried out.

Reprogramming individual buttons1. Switch on the ignition.2. Press and hold the interior rearview mirror

button to be programmed.3. As soon as the interior rearview mirror LED

starts flashing slowly, hold the hand-heldtransmitter for the system to be controlledapprox. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from thebuttons of the interior rearview mirror. Therequired distance depends on the manualtransmitter.

4. Likewise, press and hold the button of thedesired function on the hand-held trans‐mitter.

5. Release both buttons as soon as the inte‐rior rearview mirror LED flashes more rap‐idly. The LED flashing faster indicates thatthe button on the interior rearview mirrorhas been programmed. The system can

Seite 173

Interior equipment Controls

173Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 178: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

then be controlled by the button on the in‐terior rearview mirror.If the LED does not flash faster after atleast 60 seconds, change the distance andrepeat the step. Several more attempts atdifferent distances may be necessary. Waitat least 15 seconds between attempts.Canada: if programming with the hand-held transmitter was interrupted, holddown the interior rearview mirror buttonand repeatedly press and release thehand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐onds.

ControlsBefore operationBefore operating a system using the uni‐

versal garage door opener, ensure that thereare no people, animals, or objects within therange of movement of the remote-controlledsystem; otherwise, there is a risk of injury ordamage.Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-held transmitter.◀

The system, such as the garage door, can beoperated using the button on the interior rear‐view mirror while the engine is running or whenthe ignition is started. To do this, hold downthe button within receiving range of the systemuntil the function is activated. The interior rear‐view mirror LED stays lit while the wireless sig‐nal is being transmitted.

Deleting stored functionsPress and hold the left and right button on theinterior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap‐proximately 20 seconds until the LED flashesrapidly. All stored functions are deleted. Thefunctions cannot be deleted individually.

Sun visorGlare shieldFold the sun visor down or up.

Vanity mirrorA vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be‐hind a cover. When the cover is opened, themirror lighting switches on.

Ashtray/cigarette lighterManual transmission: Front

Opening

Press on the cover.

EmptyingTake out the insert.

LighterPush in the lighter.The lighter can be removed assoon as it pops back out.

Danger of burnsOnly hold the hot lighter by its knob; oth‐

erwise, there is a danger of getting burned.

Seite 174

Controls Interior equipment

174Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 179: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Switch off the ignition and take the remotecontrol with you when leaving the vehicle sothat children cannot use the lighter and burnthemselves.◀

Replace the cover after useReinsert the lighter or socket cover after

use, otherwise objects may get into the lightersocket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀

Steptronic transmission: Front

Opening

Press on the cover.

EmptyingTake out the insert.

Lighter

Press on the cover.

Push in the lighter.The lighter can be removed assoon as it pops back out.

Danger of burnsOnly hold the hot lighter by its knob; oth‐

erwise, there is a danger of getting burned.Switch off the ignition and take the remotecontrol with you when leaving the vehicle sothat children cannot use the lighter and burnthemselves.◀

Replace the cover after useReinsert the lighter or socket cover after

use, otherwise objects may get into the lightersocket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀

Rear

Opening

Press on the cover.

EmptyingTake out the insert.

Lighter

Push in the lighter.

Seite 175

Interior equipment Controls

175Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 180: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

The lighter can be removed as soon as it popsback out.

Danger of burnsOnly hold the hot lighter by its knob; oth‐

erwise, there is a danger of getting burned.Take the remote control with you when leavingthe vehicle so that children cannot use thelighter and burn themselves.◀

Replace the cover after useReinsert the lighter or socket cover after

use, otherwise objects may get into the lightersocket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀

Connecting electricaldevicesHints

Do not connect charging devices to the12 volt socket in the vehicle

Do not connect battery chargers to the fac‐tory-installed 12 volt sockets in the vehicle asthis may damage the vehicle battery due to anincreased power consumption.◀

Replace the cover after useReinsert the lighter or socket cover after

use, otherwise objects may get into the lightersocket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀

Sockets

General informationThe lighter socket can be used as a socket forelectrical equipment while the engine is run‐ning or when the ignition is switched on.

NoteThe total load of all sockets must not exceed140 watts at 12 volts.

Do not damage the socket by using unsuitableconnectors.

Front center console: manualtransmission

Press on the cover.Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.

Front center console: Steptronictransmission

Press on the cover.Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.

Center armrest

Remove the cover.

Seite 176

Controls Interior equipment

176Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 181: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Rear center console

Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.

In the front passenger footwell

Socket is located below the glove compart‐ment.To access the socket: fold open the cover.

In the cargo areaThe socket is located in the cover of the load‐ing lip.To access the socket: fold open the cover.

USB interface for datatransferThe conceptConnection for importing and exporting dataon USB devices, e.g.:▷ Personal Profile settings, refer to page 35.▷ Music collection, see user's manual for

Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐cation.

HintsObserve the following when connecting:▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐

nector into the USB interface.▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or

lights to the USB interface.▷ Do not connect USB hard drives.▷ Do not use the USB interface for recharg‐

ing external devices.

With navigation system Professionalor TV: at a glance

The USB interface is located in the center arm‐rest.

Through-loading systemThe conceptThe cargo area can be enlarged by foldingdown the rear seat backrest.The rear seat backrest is divided into two partsat a ratio of 60 to 40.The sides can be folded down separately or to‐gether.

HintsDanger of jammingBefore folding down the rear seat back‐

rests, ensure that the area of movement of thebackrests is clear. In particular, ensure that noone is located in or reaches into the area ofmovement of the rear seat backrests when the

Seite 177

Interior equipment Controls

177Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 182: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

middle section is folded down. Otherwise, in‐jury or damage may result.◀

Ensuring the stability of the child seatWhen installing child restraint systems,

make sure that the child seat is securely fas‐tened to the backrest of the seat. Angle andheadrest of the backrest might need to be ad‐justed or possibly be removed. Make sure thatall backrests are securely locked. Otherwisethe stability of the child seat can be affected,and there is an increased risk of injury becauseof unexpected movement of the rear seatbackrest.◀

OpeningMove the front seats to an upright posi‐tion

Before folding down the rear backrests, ensurethat the front seats are moved forward slightlyand are in an upright position. Otherwise, thehead restraint and screen could be damaged.◀

1. Unlock the belt lock of the center safetybelt in the rear using the latch plate of an‐other safety belt.

2. Insert the latch plate at the end of the beltinto the specially designated fixture on therear window shelf.

3. Push the corresponding head restraintdown as far as it will go.

4. Pull the corresponding lever in the cargoarea to release the rear seat backrest.

5. The unlocked rear seat backrest movesforward slightly.

6. Fold backrest forward.

Closing1. Return the rear seat backrest to the upright

seating position and engage it.Ensure that the lock is securely en‐gaged

Make sure that the lock engages properlywhen folding back, otherwise transportedcargo could enter the car's interior duringbraking or evasive maneuvers and endan‐ger the vehicle's occupants.◀

2. Release the belt tongue from the fixture onthe rear window shelf.

3. Insert the belt tongue in the belt lock of thecenter safety belt. Make sure you hear thelatch plate engage.

To secure cargo, refer to page 193, with netsor draw straps, the cargo area is fitted withlashing eyes.

Seite 178

Controls Interior equipment

178Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 183: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Ski bagCapacityThe ski bag can be used to transport up to fourpairs of skis with a length of up to 6 ft/2.10 mor, depending on the binding, up to two snow‐boards with a length of up to 5 ft/1.60 m.

Preparing and loading the ski bag1. Fold open the center armrest on the inside.2. Open the inside cover and cargo area by

pressing the button.

3. Lay out the ski bag.4. Load the ski bag. If necessary, wrap the

sharp edges of the skis.

5. Insert the tongue plate into the belt buckle.

6. Tighten the retaining strap.

Securing the ski bagSecure the ski bag by tightening the re‐

taining strap; otherwise, the contents couldpresent a source of danger to the passengers,for example during braking or evasive maneu‐vers.◀

Removing the ski bagThe ski bag can be removed entirely, e.g., todry quickly or to use other inserts.

1. Pull the handle forward and lift the ski bagout.

2. Close the cover in the cargo area.

Seite 179

Interior equipment Controls

179Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 184: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

More information on the various inserts availa‐ble can be obtained from your service center.

Seite 180

Controls Interior equipment

180Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 185: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Storage compartmentsVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems.

HintsNo loose objects in the car's interiorDo not stow any objects in the car's inte‐

rior without securing them; otherwise, theymay present a danger to occupants e.g., duringbraking and evasive maneuvers.◀

Do not place anti-slip mats on the dash‐board

Do not place anti-slip mats on the dashboard.The mat materials could damage the dash‐board.◀

Storage compartmentsThe following storage compartments are avail‐able in the vehicle interior:▷ Glove compartment on the driver's and

front passenger side, refer to page 181.▷ Storage compartment on the center con‐

sole: manual transmission.▷ Storage compartment, refer to page 184,

in the center console for remote control:Steptronic transmission.

▷ Storage compartment in the center arm‐rest, refer to page 182, in the front andrear.

▷ Compartments in the doors.

▷ Pockets on the backrests of the frontseats.

▷ Net in the front passenger footwell.

Glove compartmentFront passenger side

NoteClose the glove compartment again im‐mediately

Close the glove compartment immediately af‐ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc‐cur during accidents.◀

Opening

Pull the handle.The light in the glove compartment switcheson.

ClosingFold cover closed.

Seite 181

Storage compartments Controls

181Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 186: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Driver's side

NoteClose the glove compartment again im‐mediately

Close the glove compartment immediately af‐ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc‐cur during accidents.◀

Opening

Pull the handle.

ClosingFold cover closed.

Center armrestFrontA storage compartment is located in the centerarmrest between the front seats.

Opening

Press button.

Locking the storage compartment

The storage compartment in the armrest canbe locked with an integrated key to separatelysecure the trunk lid, refer to page 42, e.g.

After the storage compartment is locked, theremote control can be handed out without theintegrated key, refer to page 34, for instance ata hotel.This prevents access to the storage compart‐ment and to the cargo area.

Connection for an external audiodevice

An external audio device, e.g.,an MP3 player, can be con‐nected via the AUX-IN port orthe USB audio interface in thecenter armrest.

RearThe center armrest contains a storage com‐partment.

Seite 182

Controls Storage compartments

182Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 187: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Folding down

Pull on the opener and fold the armrest for‐ward.

Opening

Pull on the handle and fold open the cover.

CupholdersHints

Shatter-proof containers and no hotdrinks

Use light and shatter-proof containers and donot transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there isthe increased danger of injury in an accident.◀

Unsuitable containersDo not forcefully push unsuitable con‐

tainers into the cupholders. This may result indamage.◀

Manual transmission: Front

On the center console

To open: press the button.The insert folds out.To use as a storage compartment, fold the in‐sert back in.

Steptronic transmission: Front

To open: press on the cover.

RearIn the front center armrest.

The cupholder can be adjusted for three differ‐ent container sizes.

Seite 183

Storage compartments Controls

183Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 188: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

To open: press the button.To reduce in size: fold closed to the desiredposition.To close: fold all the way closed. The cu‐pholder must be closed before it can beopened fully.

Remote control storagecompartmentOpening

Press on the cover.

Remote control storage compartment

Storage is possible in a vertical position in thecenter armrest.

Clothes hooksThe clothes hooks are located next to the grabhandles in the rear and on the door pillar in therear.

Do not obstruct viewWhen suspending clothing from the

hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driv‐er's view.◀

No heavy objectsDo not hang heavy objects from the

hooks; otherwise, they may present a dangerto passengers during braking and evasive ma‐neuvers.◀

Storage compartments in thecargo areaNetSmaller objects can be stored in the net on theside of the cargo area.To transport larger objects, it can be pusheddown.

Multi-function hookA multi-function hook is available on the leftcargo area wall.

Light and suitable objects onlyOnly hang light bags or suitable objects

from the holders. Otherwise, there is a dangerof objects flying about during braking and eva‐sive maneuvers.Only transport heavy luggage in the cargo areaif it has been appropriately secured.◀

Seite 184

Controls Storage compartments

184Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 189: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Storage under the cargo floor panel

Fold up the cargo floor panel.

Storage compartment on the sideA storage compartment is located at the sideof the cargo area.

Lashing eyesTo secure the cargo, refer to page 193, thereare lashing eyes in the cargo area.

Seite 185

Storage compartments Controls

185Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 190: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 191: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Driving tipsThis chapter provides you with information

useful in dealing with specific driving andoperating modes.

Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 192: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Things to remember when drivingVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems.

Breaking-in periodGeneral informationMoving parts need time to adjust to one an‐other (break-in time).The following instructions will help accomplisha long vehicle life and good efficiency.During break-in, do not use the Launch Con‐trol, refer to page 82.

Engine, transmission, and axle driveAlways obey the official speed limit.

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 kmDo not exceed the maximum engine and roadspeed:▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and

100 mph/160 km/h.▷ For diesel engine 3,500 rpm and

93 mph/150 km/h.Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐stances.

From 1,200 miles/2,000 kmThe engine and vehicle speed can gradually beincreased.

TiresTire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;they achieve their full traction potential after abreak-in time.Drive conservatively for the first200 miles/300 km.

Brake systemBrakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimal per‐formance between brake discs and brakepads. Drive moderately during this break-in pe‐riod.

ClutchThe function of the clutch reaches its optimallevel only after a distance driven of approx.300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,engage the clutch gently.

Following part replacementThe same break-in procedures should be ob‐served if any of the components above-men‐tioned have to be renewed in the course of thevehicle's operating life.

General driving notesClosing the trunk lid

Drive with the trunk lid closedOnly drive with the tailgate closed; other‐

wise, in the event of an accident or braking andevasive maneuvers, passengers and other traf‐fic may be injured, and the vehicle may bedamaged. In addition, exhaust fumes may en‐ter the vehicle interior.◀

If driving with the tailgate open cannot beavoided:

Seite 188

Driving tips Things to remember when driving

188Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 193: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.▷ Drive moderately.

Hot exhaust systemHot exhaust systemHigh temperatures are generated in the

exhaust system.Do not remove the heat shields installed andnever apply undercoating to them. Make surethat flammable materials, e. g. hay, leaves,grass, etc. do not come in contact with the hotexhaust system while driving, while in idle po‐sition mode, or when parked. Such contactcould lead to a fire, resulting in an increasedrisk of serious personal injury as well as prop‐erty damage.Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise,there is a danger of getting burned.◀

Diesel particulate filterThe diesel particulate filter collects soot parti‐cles and burns them periodically at high tem‐peratures.During several minutes of cleaning the follow‐ing may occur:▷ Temporarily, the engine may run less

smoothly.▷ Noises and a slight amount of smoke com‐

ing from the exhaust until shortly after theengine is shut down.

▷ A somewhat higher engine speed is neces‐sary to reach usual performance.

Climate control windshield

The marked area is not covered with heat re‐flective coating.Use this area for garage door openers, devicesfor electronic toll collection, etc.

Climate control laminated tintedsafety glassThe vehicle glass provides full protectionagainst the harmful effects of UV radiation onthe skin.

Mobile communication devices in thevehicle

Mobile communication devices in the ve‐hicle

It is not recommended to use mobile phones,such as mobile phones, in the vehicle interiorwithout a direct connection to an external aer‐ial. Otherwise, the vehicle's electronics andmobile communication devices can interferewith each other. In addition, there is no assur‐ance that the radiation generated during trans‐mission will be conducted away from the vehi‐cle interior.◀

HydroplaningHydroplaningWhen driving on wet or slushy roads, re‐

duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.◀

On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water canform between the tires and road surface.

Seite 189

Things to remember when driving Driving tips

189Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 194: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐ing. It is characterized by a partial or completeloss of contact between the tires and the roadsurface, ultimately undermining your ability tosteer and brake the vehicle.

Driving through waterObserve water level and speedDo not exceed the maximum water level

and maximum speed; otherwise, the vehicle'sengine, the electrical systems and the trans‐mission may be damaged.◀

Drive though calm water only and only if it isnot deeper than 9.8 inches/25 cm and at thisheight, no faster than walking speed, up to3 mph/5 km/h.

Braking safelyYour vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand‐ard feature.Applying the brakes fully is the most effectiveway of braking in situations needed.Steering is still responsive. You can still avoidany obstacles with a minimum of steering ef‐fort.Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds fromthe hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in itsactive mode.In certain braking situations, the perforatedbrake discs can cause functional problems.However, this has no effect on the perform‐ance and operational reliability of the brake.

Objects within the range of movementof the pedals

No objects in the area around the pedalsKeep floor mats, carpets, and any other

objects out of the pedal area; otherwise, thefunction of the pedals could be impeded whiledriving and create the risk of an accident.Do not place additional floor mats over existingmats or other objects.

Only use floor mats that have been approvedfor the vehicle and can be properly attached tofloor.Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐tened again after they were removed for clean‐ing, e.g.◀

Driving in wet conditionsWhen roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain,press brake pedal ever so gently every fewmiles.Ensure that this action does not endangerother traffic.The heat generated in this process helps drythe brake discs and pads.In this way braking efficiency will be availablewhen you need it.

HillsAvoid stressing the brakesAvoid placing excessive stress on the

brake system. Light but consistent brake pres‐sure can lead to high temperatures, brakeswearing out and possibly even brake failure.◀

Do not drive in neutralDo not drive in neutral or with the engine

stopped, as doing so disables engine braking.In addition, steering and brake assist are un‐available with the engine stopped.◀

Drive long or steep downhill gradients in thegear that requires least braking efforts. Other‐wise the brakes may overheat and reducebrake efficiency.You can increase the engine's braking effectby shifting down, going all the way to first gear,if needed.

Brake disc corrosionBrake disc corrosion and contamination of thebrake pads are favored by:▷ Low mileage.

Seite 190

Driving tips Things to remember when driving

190Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 195: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is notused at all.

▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.Corrosion will built up when the maximumpressure applied to the brake pads duringbraking is not reached - thus discs don't getcleaned.Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will causea pulsating effect on the brakes in their re‐sponse - generally that cannot be corrected.

Condensation under the parkedvehicleWhen using the automatic climate control,condensation water develops collecting under‐neath the vehicle.These traces of water under the vehicle arenormal.

Seite 191

Things to remember when driving Driving tips

191Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 196: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

LoadingVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems.

HintsOverloading the vehicleTo avoid exceeding the approved ca‐

pacity of the tires, never overload the vehicle.Overloading can lead to overheating and in‐creases the rate at which damage develops in‐side the tires. This could result in a suddenloss of tire inflation pressure.◀

No fluids in the cargo areaMake sure that fluids do not leak into the

cargo area; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam‐aged.◀

Heavy and hard objectsDo not stow any heavy and hard objects

in the car's interior without securing them; oth‐erwise, they may present a danger to occu‐pants, e.g., during braking and evasive maneu‐vers.◀

Determining the load limit1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐

hicle’s placard:▷ The combined weight of occupants

and cargo should never exceed XXX kgor YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the

vehicle and unstable driving situationsmay result.

2. Determine the combined weight of thedriver and passengers that will be riding inyour vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kilograms orYYY pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load ca‐pacity.For example, if the YYY amount equals1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbspassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacityis 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs =400 lbs.

5. Determine the combined weight of lug‐gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐cle. That weight may not safely exceed theavailable cargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

Seite 192

Driving tips Loading

192Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 197: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Load

The maximum load is the sum of the weight ofthe occupants and the cargo.The greater the weight of the occupants, theless cargo that can be transported.

Stowing cargo▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the

cargo.▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐

ble, directly behind and at the bottom ofthe rear passenger seat backrests.

▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is notoccupied, secure each of the outer safetybelts in the opposite buckle.

▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backreststo stow cargo.

▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge ofthe backrests.

Securing cargoLashing eyes in the cargo area

To secure the cargo there are four lashingeyes in the cargo area.

Securing cargo▷ Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐

taining straps or with a cargo net or drawstraps.

▷ Larger and heavy objects: secure withcargo straps.

Cargo straps, cargo netting, retaining straps ordraw straps on the lashing eyes in the cargoarea.

Securing cargoStow and secure the cargo as described

above; otherwise it may present a danger tothe occupants, e.g., during braking and evasivemaneuvers.◀

Roof-mounted luggage rackNoteRoof racks are available as special accessories.

SecuringFollow the installation instructions of the roofrack.

Seite 193

Loading Driving tips

193Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 198: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Roof drip rail with flaps

The anchorage points are located in the roofdrip rail above the doors.Fold the cover outward.

LoadingBe sure that adequate clearance is maintainedfor tilting and opening the glass sunroof.Because roof racks raise the vehicle's centerof gravity when loaded, they have a major ef‐fect on vehicle handling and steering re‐sponse.Therefore, note the following when loadingand driving:▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle

loads and the approved gross vehicleweight.

▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.▷ The roof load should not extend past the

loading area.▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the

bottom.▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, e.g., tie

with ratchet straps.▷ Do not let objects project into the opening

path of the trunk lid.▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler‐

ation and braking maneuvers. Take cornersgently.

Seite 194

Driving tips Loading

194Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 199: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Saving fuelVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems.

General informationYour vehicle contains advanced technology forthe reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐sions.Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐ferent factors.Carrying out certain measures, such as a mod‐erate driving style and regular maintenance,can influence fuel consumption and the envi‐ronmental impact.

Remove unnecessary cargoAdditional weight increases fuel consumption.

Remove attached partsfollowing useRemove auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear luggageracks which are no longer required followinguse.Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.

Close the windows and glasssunroofDriving with the glass sunroof and windowsopen results in increased air resistance andthereby reduces the range.

TiresGeneral informationTires can affect fuel consumption in variousways, e.g., tire size may influence fuel con‐sumption.

Check the tire inflation pressureregularlyCheck and, if needed, correct the tire inflationpressure at least twice a month and beforestarting on a long trip.Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐sistance and thus raises fuel consumption andtire wear.

Drive away immediatelyDo not wait for the engine to warm-up whilethe vehicle remains stationary. Start drivingright away, but at moderate engine speeds.This is the quickest way of warming the coldengine up to operating temperature.

Look well ahead whendrivingAvoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐cle driving ahead of you.Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuelconsumption.

Seite 195

Saving fuel Driving tips

195Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 200: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Avoid high engine speedsAs a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowersfuel consumption and reduces wear.Use 1st gear to get the vehicle moving. Start‐ing with the 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. Whenaccelerating, shift up before reaching high en‐gine speeds.When you reach the desired speed, shift intothe highest applicable gear and drive with theengine speed as low as possible and at a con‐stant speed.If necessary, observe the gear shift indicator ofthe vehicle, refer to page 95.

Use coastingWhen approaching a red light, take your footoff the accelerator and let the vehicle coast toa halt.For going downhill take your foot off the accel‐erator and let the vehicle roll.The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.

Switch off the engine duringlonger stopsSwitch off the engine during longer stops, e.g.,at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in trafficcongestion.

Auto Start/Stop functionThe Auto Start/Stop function of your vehicleautomatically switches off the engine during astop.If the engine is switched off and then restartedrather than leaving the engine running con‐stantly, fuel consumption and emissions arereduced. Savings can begin within a few sec‐onds of switching off the engine.In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐mined by other factors, such as driving style,

road conditions, maintenance or environmentalfactors.

Switch off any functions thatare not currently neededFunctions such as seat heating and the rearwindow defroster require a lot of energy andreduce the range, especially in city and stop-and-go traffic.Reel off these functions if they are not needed.The ECO PRO driving program supports theenergy conserving use of comfort features.These functions are automatically deactivatedpartially or completely.

Have maintenance carriedoutHave vehicles maintained regularly to achieveoptimal vehicle efficiency and operating life.The maintenance should be carried out byyour service center.Also note the BMW Maintenance System, referto page 233.

ECO PROThe conceptECO PRO supports a driving style that saveson fuel consumption. For this purpose, the en‐gine control and comfort features, e. g. the cli‐mate control output, are adjusted.Under certain conditions the engine is auto‐matically decoupled from the transmission inthe D selector lever position. The vehicle con‐tinues traveling with the engine idling to re‐duce fuel consumption. Selector lever positionD remains engaged.In addition, context-sensitive instructions aredisplayed to assist with an optimized fuel con‐sumption driving style.

Seite 196

Driving tips Saving fuel

196Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 201: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

The achieved extended range is displayed inthe instrument cluster as bonus range.

At a glanceThe system includes the followingEfficientDynamics functions and displays:▷ ECO PRO bonus range, refer to page 197.▷ ECO PRO tips driving instruction, refer to

page 198▷ ECO PRO climate control, refer to

page 197.▷ ECO PRO coasting driving status, refer to

page 199.

Activate ECO PROPress button repeatedly until ECOPRO is displayed in the instrument

cluster.

Configuring ECO PRO

Via the Driving Dynamics Control1. Activate ECO PRO.2. "Configure ECO PRO"3. Configure the program.

Via the iDrive1. "Settings"2. "ECO PRO mode"Or

1. "Settings"2. "Driving mode"3. "Configure ECO PRO"Configure the program.

ECO PRO Tip▷ "Tip at:":

Adjust the ECO PRO speed.▷ "ECO PRO speed warning":

The output is reduced once the set ECOPRO speed is reached.

CoastingFuel-efficiency can be optimized by disengag‐ing the engine and Coasting, refer topage 199, with the engine idling.This function is only available in ECO PROmode.

ECO PRO climate control"ECO PRO climate control"Climate control is set to be fuel-efficient.By making a slight change to the set tempera‐ture, or slowly adjusting the rate of heating orcooling of the car's interior, fuel consumptioncan be economized.The mirror heating is made available when out‐side temperatures are very cold.

ECO PRO potentialShows potential savings with the current set‐tings in percentages.

Display in the instrument cluster

Display in the instrument displayWhen ECO PRO mode is activated, the displayswitches to a special configuration.Some of the displays may differ from the dis‐play in the instrument cluster.

ECO PRO bonus rangeAn adjusted driving style helpsyou extend your driving range.This may be displayed as thebonus range in the instrumentcluster.

The bonus range is shown in the range display.The bonus range is automatically reset everytime the vehicle is refueled.

Seite 197

Saving fuel Driving tips

197Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 202: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Driving styleDisplay in the instrument cluster with ex‐panded scope.

A bar display in the instrument cluster indi‐cates your current driving efficiency.Mark in the area of arrow 1: display of the en‐ergy recovered by coasting or when braking.Mark in the area of arrow 2: display when ac‐celerating.Your driving style's efficiency is shown by thebar's color:▷ Blue display: efficient driving style as long

as the mark moves within the blue range.▷ Gray display: adjust driving style, e. g. by

backing off the accelerator pedal.The display switches to blue as soon as allconditions for fuel-efficiency-optimized drivingare met.

ECO PRO tip, driving tipThe arrow indicates that the drivingstyle can be adjusted to be more fuelefficient by backing off the accelerator

for instance.

NoteThe driving style display and ECO PRO tips inthe instrument cluster appear when the ECOPRO display is activated.Activating driving style and ECO PRO tips:

1. "Settings"

2. "Instrument cluster"3. "ECO PRO Info"In the instrument display:

1. "Settings"2. "Instrument cluster"3. "Driving mode view"

ECO PRO tip, symbolsAn additional symbol and text instructions aredisplayed.

Symbol Measure

For efficient driving back off the ac‐celerator or delay accelerating to al‐low time to assess road conditions.

Reduce speed to the selected ECOPRO speed.

Steptronic transmission: shift fromM/S to D.

Steptronic transmission/manualtransmission: follow shifting instruc‐tions.

Manual transmission: engage neu‐tral for engine stop.

Indications on the Control Display

EfficientDynamicsInformation on fuel consumption and technol‐ogy can be displayed while driving.

1. "Vehicle info"2. "EfficientDynamics"

Displaying fuel consumption historyThe average fuel consumption can be dis‐played within an adjustable time frame.Vertical bars show consumption for the se‐lected time frame.

Seite 198

Driving tips Saving fuel

198Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 203: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Trip interruptions are represented below thebar on the time axis.

"Consumption history"

Adjusting fuel consumption historytime frame

Select the symbol.

Resetting fuel consumption history1. Open "Options".2. "Reset consumption history"

Displaying EfficientDynamics infoThe current efficiency can be displayed.

"EfficientDynamics info"The following systems are displayed:▷ Automatic engine Start/Stop function.▷ Energy recovery.▷ Climate control output.▷ Coasting.

Display ECO PRO tips "ECO PRO Tips"

Settings are stored for the profile currently inuse.

Coasting

The conceptThe system helps to conserve fuel.To do this, under certain conditions the engineis automatically decoupled from the transmis‐sion when selector lever position D is set. Thevehicle continues traveling with the engineidling to reduce fuel consumption. Selectorlever position D remains engaged.This driving condition is referred to as coast‐ing.As soon as you step on the brake or accelera‐tor pedal, the engine is automatically coupledagain.

HintsCoasting is a component of the ECO PRO, re‐fer to page 196, driving mode.Coasting is automatically activated when ECOPRO mode is called via the Driving DynamicsControl.The function is available in a certain speedrange.A proactively driving style helps the driver touse the function as often as possible and sup‐ports the fuel-conserving effect of coasting.

Safety modeThe function is not available under one of thefollowing conditions.▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated.▷ Driving in the dynamic limit range and on

steep uphill or downhill grades.▷ Battery charge status temporarily too low

or vehicle electrical system drawing exces‐sive current.

▷ Cruise control activated.

Functional requirementsIn ECO PRO mode, this function is available ina speed range from approximately 30 mph, ap‐prox. 50 km/h to 100 mph, approx. 160 km/h, ifthe following conditions are met:▷ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not

operated.▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐

tion D.▷ Engine and transmission are at operating

temperature.The driving status Coast can be influencedwith the shift paddles.

Seite 199

Saving fuel Driving tips

199Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 204: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Display

Display in the instrument clusterThe mark in the bar display be‐low the tachometer is backlit inblue and is located at the zeropoint. The tachometer approxi‐mately indicates idle speed.

The coasting point indicator is illuminated atthe zero point during coasting.

Indications on the Control DisplayThe Coasting driving condition is displayed inEfficientDynamics Info while this driving modeis active.

Color code blue, arrow 1, and symbol, arrow 2:driving condition Coasting.

Displaying EfficientDynamics info1. "Vehicle info"2. "EfficientDynamics"3. "EfficientDynamics info"

Deactivating the system manuallyThe function can be deactivated in the Config‐ure ECO PRO, refer to page 197, menu, e.g., touse the braking effect of the engine when trav‐eling downhill.Settings are stored for the profile currently inuse.

Seite 200

Driving tips Saving fuel

200Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 205: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Seite 201

Saving fuel Driving tips

201Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 206: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 207: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

MobilityIn order to always ensure your mobility, you will

find important information on operating fluids,wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside

Assistance in the following.

Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 208: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

RefuelingVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems.

HintsRefuel promptlyRefuel no later than at a range of

30 miles/50 km or engine operation might failand damage might occur.◀

Diesel enginesThe filler neck is designed for refueling at die‐sel fuel pumps.

Fuel lidOpening1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler

flap.

2. Turn the tank lid counterclockwise.

3. Place the tank lid in the bracket attached tothe fuel filler flap.

Closing1. Fit the lid and turn it clockwise until you

clearly hear a click.2. Close the fuel filler flap.

Do not pinch the retaining strapDo not pinch the retaining strap attached

to the lid; otherwise, the lid cannot be closedproperly and fuel vapors can escape.◀

Manually unlocking fuel filler flapIn the event of an electrical malfunction, e.g.The release is located in the cargo area.

Seite 204

Mobility Refueling

204Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 209: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Pull the green knob with the fuel pump symbol.This releases the fuel filler flap.

Observe the following whenrefuelingThe fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicksoff the first time.

Do not overfill the fuel tankDo not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise

fuel may eslide, causing harm to the environ‐ment and damaging the vehicle.◀

Handling fuelsObserve safety regulations posted at the

gas station.◀

Seite 205

Refueling Mobility

205Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 210: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

FuelVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems.

Fuel recommendationNote

General fuel qualityEven fuels that conform to the specifica‐

tions can be of low quality. This may cause en‐gine problems, for instance poor engine start-up behavior, poor handling and/or poorperformance. Switch gas stations or use abrand name fuel with a higher octane rating.◀

GasolineFor the best fuel efficiency, the gasolineshould be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur con‐tent.Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐taining metal must not be used.

Refuel only with unleaded gasoline with‐out metallic additives.

Do not refuel with any leaded gasoline or gaso‐line with metallic additives, e. g. manganese oriron, as this can cause permanent damage tothe catalytic converter and other compo‐nents.◀

Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of10 %, i. e., E10, may be used for refueling.Ethanol should satisfy the following qualitystandards:US: ASTM 4806–xx

CAN: CGSB-3.511–xxxx: comply with the current standard in eachcase.

Do not use a fuel with a higher percent‐age of ethanol

Do not use a fuel with a higher ethanol per‐centage than recommended or one with othertypes of alcohol, e.g. M5 to M100; otherwisethis could damage the engine and fuel supplysystem.◀

Recommended fuel gradeBMW recommends AKI 91.

Minimum fuel gradeBMW recommends AKI 89.

Minimum fuel gradeDo not use any gasoline below the mini‐

mum fuel grade as this may impair engine per‐formance.◀

If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐ing, the engine may produce knocking soundswhen starting at high outside temperatures.This has no effect on the engine life.

Fuel qualityThe use of poor-quality fuels may result

in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi‐tionally, problems relating to drivability, start‐ing and stalling, especially under certain envi‐ronmental conditions such as high ambienttemperature and high altitude, may occur.If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐ommend switching to a high quality gasolinebrand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐gine deposits, it is highly recommended topurchase gasoline from BP or Top Tier retail‐ers.

Seite 206

Mobility Fuel

206Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 211: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Failure to comply with these recommendationsmay result in the need for unscheduled main‐tenance.◀

Diesel

Low-Sulfur DieselThe engine of your BMW is designed for dieselwith low sulfur content:Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel ASTM D 975-xx.xx: comply with the current standard in eachcase.

Use only Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel.The fraction of biodiesel in the fuel must

not exceed 5 %, referred to as B5. Do not usegasoline. If you do fill the tank with the wrongfuel, e.g., gasoline, do not start the engine asthis may damage the engine.◀

After adding the wrong fuel, contact your serv‐ice center or Roadside Assistance.If the fuel pump nozzle does not fit in the fillerpipe of your BMW, please check to ensure thatyou are refueling at a diesel fuel pump that isequipped with a diesel fuel pump nozzle.In the event the Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel fuelcannot be fully inserted into the fuel filler neck,please contact BMW Roadside Assistance forinstructions on how to add fuel. For more infor‐mation on Roadside Assistance, refer topage 243.

Winter dieselTo ensure that the diesel engine remains op‐erational in the winter, use winter diesel.It is available at gas stations during wintermonths.The fuel filter heating system, included as astandard feature, prevents disruption of thefuel supply while driving.

Do not add any diesel additivesDo not add additives, including gasoline;

otherwise, engine damage may occur.◀

BMW Advanced DieselThe conceptBMW Advanced Diesel reduces nitrogen ox‐ides in the diesel emissions by injecting dieselexhaust fluid reducing agent into the exhaustsystem. A chemical reaction takes place insidethe catalytic converter that minimizes nitrogenoxides.The vehicle has a tank that can be refilled.To be able to start the engine as usual, theremust be an adequate reducing agent.Reducing agent is added by the service center.

Warming up the systemIn order to warm the engine up to its operatingtemperature after a cold start, the Steptronictransmission may subsequently shift up to thenext higher gear.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Reserve indicationThis display in the instrument cluster providesinformation about the distance that can still bedriven with the current reserve level.

▷ Lamp white: refill with re‐duction agent at the nextopportunity.

▷ Lamp yellow: not enough re‐duction agent present. Theremaining range is displayedin the instrument cluster. Im‐mediately refill with reduc‐

Seite 207

Fuel Mobility

207Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 212: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

tion agent, refer to page 208.

Diesel exhaust fluid on minimum▷ The remaining range is dis‐

played in the instrumentcluster: refill with reductionagent. The engine will con‐tinue to run as long as it isnot switched off and allother operating conditionsare satisfied; sufficient fuel,e.g.

Engine does not startDo not continue driving to the limit of the

remaining travel distance. Otherwise, you willnot be able to restart the engine after switch‐ing it off. In certain cases, this could causesafety to be impaired.◀

Filling with an incorrect fluidA Check Control message is displayed whenan incorrect fluid is added.After adding the incorrect fluid, contact yourservice center.

System defectA Check Control message is displayed whenthere is a system defect.

Have the diesel exhaust fluidreplenishedThe reducing agent is added by the servicecenter within the context of regular mainte‐nance.It may be necessary to have the fluid replen‐ished several times under particular circum‐stances, e.g., if the vehicle is driven in a partic‐ularly sporty style or if it is driven at highaltitudes.The reducing agent must be replenished assoon as the reserve display appears in the in‐

strument cluster to avoid not being able to re‐start the engine.

Diesel exhaust fluid at lowtemperaturesDue to its physical properties, it is possiblethat the reducing agent may also need to bereplenished between regular maintenance ap‐pointments if it is exposed to temperatures un‐der + 23 ℉/- 5 ℃. In this case, add reducingagent only immediately before driving off.The need to replenish it is indicated by the Re‐serve display in the instrument cluster.At temperatures below + 12 ℉/- 11 ℃, the fill‐ing level cannot be measured in some cases.After adding reducing agent, the Reserve Dis‐play is displayed only until the fill level can bemeasured again.

Replenishing Diesel exhaust fluidyourself in exceptional casesYou can replenish reducing agent yourself inexceptional cases, e.g., to get to the servicecenter.

Avoid contact with Diesel exhaust fluidDo not come into contact with the reduc‐

ing agent. Otherwise, skin or eye irritationsmay result.◀

Handling Diesel exhaust fluidWhen working with reducing agent in

closed spaces, ensure good ventilation. Whenthe bottle or container is opened, acrid smell‐ing fumes may eslide.◀

Keeping Diesel exhaust fluid out of reachof children

Keep reducing agent out of reach of children.◀

Avoid contact with surfacesAvoid contact of reduction agent with

surfaces of the vehicle; otherwise, damagecould occur.◀

Seite 208

Mobility Fuel

208Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 213: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Suitable Diesel exhaust fluid▷ Preferred: BMW Diesel Exhaust Fluid. With

this bottle and its special adapter, Dieselexhaust fluid can be replenished simplyand safely.

▷ Alternative: NOx reduction agent AUS 32Diesel exhaust fluid can be purchased at yourservice center.

Refill quantityWhen the Reserve display starts, add at least3 bottles of reducing agent.This corresponds to approx. 1.5 US gal/6 liters.

Tank for reducing agent

The tank for the reducing agent is located nextto the fuel tank.

Adding the reducing agentAdd the reducing agent when the ignition isswitched on.

1. Open the fuel filler flap, refer to page 204.2. Turn the tank lid counterclockwise and re‐

move.

3. Place the bottle on it and turn it as far as itwill go, see arrow.

4. Press the bottle down, see arrow.The vehicle tank will be filled.The tank is full when the fill level in the bot‐tle no longer changes. It is not possible tooverfill.

5. Pull back the bottle, see arrow, and un‐screw it.

6. Replace the tank lid and turn it clockwise.7. Close the fuel filler flap.

Seite 209

Fuel Mobility

209Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 214: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

After adding Diesel exhaust fluid

NoteIncorrect fluidsAfter filling with incorrect fluids, such as

antifreeze for washer fluid, do not start the en‐gine, otherwise there is risk of fire.◀

Contact your service center.

Disposing of bottlesYou take your empty Diesel exhaustfluid bottles to your service center fordisposal.

Do not dispose of empty bottles with house‐hold waste unless this is permitted by localregulations.

Reserve indicationThe Reserve display will still ap‐pear along with the remainingrange after refilling.Engine can be started.After several minutes of driving,

the Reserve indication goes out.

Diesel exhaust fluid on minimumAfter filling, the indication -- isstill displayed.Only after the display goes outcan the engine -- be started.

1. Switch on the ignition.Display -- goes out after approx. 1 minute.

2. Engine can be started.

Seite 210

Mobility Fuel

210Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 215: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Wheels and tiresVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems.

Tire inflation pressureSafety informationThe tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐sure influence the following:▷ The service life of the tires.▷ Road safety.▷ Driving comfort.

Checking the tire inflation pressureCheck the tire inflation pressure regularlyRegularly check the tire inflation pres‐

sure, and correct it as needed: at least twice amonth and before a long trip. If you fail to ob‐serve this precaution, you may be driving ontires with incorrect tire pressures, a conditionthat may not only compromise your vehicle'sdriving stability, but also lead to tire damageand the risk of an accident.◀

Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire in‐flation pressure.Tires heat up while driving, and the tire infla‐tion pressure increases along with the tire'stemperature. The tire inflation pressure speci‐fications relate to cold tires or tires with theambient temperature.Only check the tire inflation pressure when thetires are cold. This means after driving no more

than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle hasbeen parked for at least 2 hours.The displays of inflation devices may under-read by up to 1.45 psi/0.1 bar.For Flat Tire Monitor: after correcting the tireinflation pressure, reinitialize the Flat TireMonitor.For Tire Pressure Monitor: after correcting thetire inflation pressure, reset the Tire PressureMonitor.

Tire inflation pressure specificationsThe tire inflation pressure table, refer topage 212, contains all tire inflation pressurespecifications for the specified tire sizes at theambient temperature. Tire inflation pressurespecifications apply to approved tire sizes andrecommended tire brands. This informationcan be obtained from your service center.To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,please note the following:▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.

Tire inflation pressures up to100 mph/160 km/hFor speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and foroptimum driving comfort, note the pressurevalues in the tire inflation pressure table, referto page 212, and adjust as necessary.

Seite 211

Wheels and tires Mobility

211Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 216: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

These pressure values can also be found onthe tire inflation pressure label on the driver'sdoor pillar.

Maximum permissible speedDo not exceed 100 mph/160 km/h; other‐

wise, tire damage and accidents may result.◀

Tire inflation pressure values up to100 mph/160 km/h

528i

Tire size Pressure specifica‐tions in bar/PSI

Specifications inbar/PSI with coldtires

225/55 R 17 97 V M+S A/S RSC225/55 R 17 97 H M+S RSC

2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35

245/45 R 18 100 VM+S XL A/S RSC245/40 R 19 98 V M+S XL A/S RSC245/45 R 18 96 YRSC245/45 R 18 100 VM+S XL RSC

2.4 / 35 2.6 / 38

Tire size Pressure specifica‐tions in bar/PSI

Front: 245/45 R 1896 Y RSCRear:275/40 R 18 99 YRSC

2.4 / 35-

-2.4 / 35

Front: 245/40 R 1994 Y RSCRear: 275/35 R 1996 Y RSC

2.4 / 35-

-2.6 / 38

Front: 245/35 R 2095 Y XL RSCRear: 275/30 R 2097 Y XL RSC

2.4 / 35-

-2.9 /42

Emergency wheel:T 135/90 R 17 104M

Speed up to a max. of50 mph / 80 km/h4.2 / 60

535i, 535d

Tire size Pressure specificationsin bar/PSI

Specifications inbar/PSI with coldtires

245/45 R 18 100 VM+S XL A/S RSC245/40 R 19 98 VM+S XL A/S RSC245/45 R 18 96 YRSC225/55 R 17 97 HM+S RSC245/45 R 18 100 VM+S XL RSC

2.4 / 35 2.7 / 39

Seite 212

Mobility Wheels and tires

212Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 217: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Tire size Pressure specificationsin bar/PSI

Front: 245/45 R 1896 Y RSCRear: 275/40 R 1899 Y RSC

2.4 / 35-

-2.4 / 35

Front: 245/40 R 1994 Y RSCRear: 275/35 R 1996 Y RSC

2.4 / 35-

-2.6 / 38

Front: 245/35 R 2095 Y XL RSCRear: 275/30 R 2097 Y XL RSC

2.4 / 35-

-2.9 /42

Emergency wheel:T 135/90 R 17 104M

Speed up to a max. of50 mph / 80 km/h4.2 / 60

550i

Tire size Pressure specificationsin bar/PSI

Specifications inbar/PSI with coldtires

245/45 R 18 100 VM+S XL A/S RSC245/40 R 19 98 V M+S XL A/S RSC245/45 R 18 96 YRSC245/45 R 18 100 VM+S XL RSC

2.5 / 36 2.7 / 39

Front: 245/45 R 1896 Y RSCRear: 275/40 R 1899 Y RSC

2.5 / 36-

-2.5 / 36

Tire size Pressure specificationsin bar/PSI

Front: 245/40 R 1994 Y RSCRear: 275/35 R 1996 Y RSC

2.5 / 36-

-2.6 / 38

Front: 245/35 R 2095 Y XL RSCRear: 275/30 R 2097 Y XL RSC

2.6 / 38-

-2.9 /42

528i xDrive

Tire size Pressure specificationsin bar/PSI

Specifications inbar/PSI with coldtires

225/55 R 17 97 V M+S A/S RSC225/55 R 17 97 H M+S RSC245/45 R 18 100 VM+S XL A/S RSC245/40 R 19 98 V M+S XL A/S RSC245/45 R 18 96 YRSC245/45 R 18 100 VM+S XL RSC

2.4 / 35 2.6 / 38

Front: 245/45 R 1896 Y RSCRear: 275/40 R 1899 Y RSC

2.4 / 35-

-2.4 / 35

Front: 245/40 R 1994 Y RSCRear: 275/35 R 1996 Y RSC

2.4 / 35-

-2.6 / 38

Seite 213

Wheels and tires Mobility

213Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 218: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Tire size Pressure specificationsin bar/PSI

Front: 245/35 R 2095 Y XL RSCRear: 275/30 R 2097 Y XL RSC

2.5 / 36-

-3.0 / 44

Emergency wheel:T 135/90 R 17 104M

Speed up to a max. of50 mph / 80 km/h4.2 / 60

535i xDrive, 535d xDrive

Tire size Pressure specificationsin bar/PSI

Specifications inbar/PSI with coldtires

245/45 R 18 100 VM+S XL A/S RSC245/40 R 19 98 VM+S XL A/S RSC245/45 R 18 96 YRSC225/55 R 17 97 HM+S RSC245/45 R 18 100 VM+S XL RSC

2.4 / 35 2.7 / 39

Front: 245/45 R 1896 Y RSCRear: 275/40 R 1899 Y RSC

2.4 / 35-

-2.4 / 35

Front: 245/40 R 1994 Y RSCRear: 275/35 R 1996 Y RSC

2.4 / 35-

-2.6 / 38

Tire size Pressure specificationsin bar/PSI

Front: 245/35 R 2095 Y XL RSCRear: 275/30 R 2097 Y XL RSC

2.5 / 36-

-3.0 / 44

Emergency wheel:T 135/90 R 17 104M

Speed up to a max. of50 mph / 80 km/h4.2 / 60

550i xDrive

Tire size Pressure specificationsin bar/PSI

Specifications inbar/PSI with coldtires

245/45 R 18 100 VM+S XL A/S RSC245/40 R 19 98 V M+S XL A/S RSC245/45 R 18 96 YRSC245/45 R 18 100 VM+S XL RSC

2.6 / 38 2.7 / 39

Front: 245/45 R 1896 Y RSCRear: 275/40 R 1899 Y RSC

2.6 / 38-

-2.6 / 38

Front: 245/40 R 1994 Y RSCRear: 275/35 R 1996 Y RSC

2.6 / 38-

-2.7 / 39

Front: 245/35 R 2095 Y XL RSCRear: 275/30 R 2097 Y XL RSC

2.7 / 39-

-3.1 / 45

Seite 214

Mobility Wheels and tires

214Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 219: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Tire inflation pressures at max.speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h

Speeds above 100 mph/160 km/hIn order to drive at maximum speeds in

excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe,and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures forspeeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from therelevant table on the following pages. Other‐wise tire damage and accidents could occur.◀

Tire inflation pressure values over100 mph/160 km/h

528iWithout high-speed tuning feature

Tire size Pressure specificationsin bar/PSI

Specifications inbar/PSI with coldtires

225/55 R 17 97 V M+S A/S RSC225/55 R 17 97 HM+S RSC

2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38

245/45 R 18 100 VM+S XL A/S RSC245/40 R 19 98 V M+S XL A/S RSC245/45 R 18 96 YRSC245/45 R 18 100 VM+S XL RSC

2.4 / 35 2.9 /42

Front: 245/45 R 1896 Y RSCRear: 275/40 R 1899 Y RSC

2.4 / 35-

-2.4 / 35

Tire size Pressure specificationsin bar/PSI

Front: 245/40 R 1994 Y RSCRear: 275/35 R 1996 Y RSC

2.4 / 35-

-2.6 / 38

Front: 245/35 R 2095 Y XL RSCRear: 275/30 R 2097 Y XL RSC

2.4 / 35-

-2.9 /42

Emergency wheel:T 135/90 R 17 104M

Speed up to a max. of50 mph / 80 km/h4.2 / 60

With high-speed tuning feature

Tire size Pressure specificationsin bar/PSI

Specifications inbar/PSI with coldtires

225/55 R 17 97 V M+S A/S RSC225/55 R 17 97 HM+S RSC

2.5 / 36 3.0 / 44

245/45 R 18 100 VM+S XL A/S RSC245/40 R 19 98 V M+S XL A/S RSC245/45 R 18 96 YRSC245/45 R 18 100 VM+S XL RSC

2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46

Front: 245/45 R 1896 Y RSCRear: 275/40 R 1899 Y RSC

2.7 / 39-

-2.7 / 39

Seite 215

Wheels and tires Mobility

215Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 220: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Tire size Pressure specificationsin bar/PSI

Front: 245/40 R 1994 Y RSCRear: 275/35 R 1996 Y RSC

2.7 / 39-

-3.0 / 44

Front: 245/35 R 2095 Y XL RSCRear: 275/30 R 2097 Y XL RSC

2.7 / 39-

-3.2 / 46

Emergency wheel:T 135/90 R 17 104M

Speed up to a max. of50 mph / 80 km/h4.2 / 60

535i, 535dWithout high-speed tuning feature

Tire size Pressure specificationsin bar/PSI

Specifications inbar/PSI with coldtires

245/45 R 18 100 VM+S XL A/S RSC245/40 R 19 98 VM+S XL A/S RSC245/45 R 18 96 YRSC225/55 R 17 97 HM+S RSC245/45 R 18 100 VM+S XL RSC

2.4 / 35 2.9 /42

Front: 245/45 R 1896 Y RSCRear: 275/40 R 1899 Y RSC

2.4 / 35-

-2.4 / 35

Tire size Pressure specificationsin bar/PSI

Front: 245/40 R 1994 Y RSCRear: 275/35 R 1996 Y RSC

2.4 / 35-

-2.6 / 38

Front: 245/35 R 2095 Y XL RSCRear: 275/30 R 2097 Y XL RSC

2.4 / 35-

-2.9 /42

Emergency wheel:T 135/90 R 17 104M

Speed up to a max. of50 mph / 80 km/h4.2 / 60

With high-speed tuning feature

Tire size Pressure specificationsin bar/PSI

Specifications inbar/PSI with coldtires

245/45 R 18 100 VM+S XL A/S RSC245/45 R 18 96 YRSC225/55 R 17 97 HM+S RSC245/45 R 18 100 VM+S XL RSC

2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46

245/40 R 19 98 VM+S XL A/S RSC

2.8 / 41 3.3 / 48

Front: 245/45 R 1896 Y RSCRear: 275/40 R 1899 Y RSC

2.7 / 39-

-2.7 / 39

Seite 216

Mobility Wheels and tires

216Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 221: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Tire size Pressure specificationsin bar/PSI

Front: 245/40 R 1994 Y RSCRear: 275/35 R 1996 Y RSC

2.7 / 39-

-3.0 / 44

Front: 245/35 R 2095 Y XL RSCRear: 275/30 R 2097 Y XL RSC

2.7 / 39-

-3.2 / 46

Emergency wheel:T 135/90 R 17 104M

Speed up to a max. of50 mph / 80 km/h4.2 / 60

550iWithout high-speed tuning feature

Tire size Pressure specificationsin bar/PSI

Specifications inbar/PSI with coldtires

245/45 R 18 100 VM+S XL A/S RSC245/40 R 19 98 V M+S XL A/S RSC245/45 R 18 96 YRSC245/45 R 18 100 VM+S XL RSC

2.5 / 36 3.0 / 44

Front: 245/45 R 1896 Y RSCRear: 275/40 R 1899 Y RSC

2.5 / 36-

-2.5 / 36

Tire size Pressure specificationsin bar/PSI

Front: 245/40 R 1994 Y RSCRear: 275/35 R 1996 Y RSC

2.5 / 36-

-2.6 / 38

Front: 245/35 R 2095 Y XL RSCRear: 275/30 R 2097 Y XL RSC

2.6 / 38-

-2.9 /42

With high-speed tuning feature

Tire size Pressure specificationsin bar/PSI

Specifications inbar/PSI with coldtires

245/45 R 18 100 VM+S XL A/S RSC245/40 R 19 98 V M+S XL A/S RSC245/45 R 18 96 YRSC245/45 R 18 100 VM+S XL RSC

2.9 /42 3.3 / 48

Front: 245/45 R 1896 Y RSCRear: 275/40 R 1899 Y RSC

2.9 /42-

-2.9 /42

Front: 245/40 R 1994 Y RSCRear: 275/35 R 1996 Y RSC

2.9 /42-

-3.3 / 48

Front: 245/35 R 2095 Y XL RSCRear: 275/30 R 2097 Y XL RSC

2.9 /42-

-3.3 / 48

Seite 217

Wheels and tires Mobility

217Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 222: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

528i xDriveWithout high-speed tuning feature

Tire size Pressure specificationsin bar/PSI

Specifications inbar/PSI with coldtires

225/55 R 17 97 V M+S A/S RSC225/55 R 17 97 H M+S RSC245/45 R 18 100 VM+S XL A/S RSC245/40 R 19 98 V M+S XL A/S RSC245/45 R 18 96 YRSC245/45 R 18 100 VM+S XL RSC

2.4 / 35 2.9 /42

Front: 245/45 R 1896 Y RSCRear: 275/40 R 1899 Y RSC

2.4 / 35-

-2.4 / 35

Front: 245/40 R 1994 Y RSCRear: 275/35 R 1996 Y RSC

2.4 / 35-

-2.6 / 38

Front: 245/35 R 2095 Y XL RSCRear: 275/30 R 2097 Y XL RSC

2.5 / 36-

-3.0 / 44

Emergency wheel:T 135/90 R 17 104M

Speed up to a max. of50 mph / 80 km/h4.2 / 60

With high-speed tuning feature

Tire size Pressure specificationsin bar/PSI

Specifications inbar/PSI with coldtires

225/55 R 17 97 V M+S A/S RSC245/45 R 18 100 VM+S XL A/S RSC245/40 R 19 98 V M+S XL A/S RSC225/55 R 17 97 H M+S RSC245/45 R 18 96 YRSC245/45 R 18 100 VM+S XL RSC

2.8 / 41 3.3 / 48

Front: 245/45 R 1896 Y RSCRear: 275/40 R 1899 Y RSC

2.8 / 41-

-2.8 / 41

Front: 245/40 R 1994 Y RSCRear: 275/35 R 1996 Y RSC

2.8 / 41-

-3.0 / 44

Front: 245/35 R 2095 Y XL RSCRear: 275/30 R 2097 Y XL RSC

2.9 /42-

-3.3 / 48

Emergency wheel:T 135/90 R 17 104M

Speed up to a max. of50 mph / 80 km/h4.2 / 60

535i xDrive, 535d xDriveWithout high-speed tuning feature

Seite 218

Mobility Wheels and tires

218Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 223: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Tire size Pressure specifica‐tions in bar/PSI

Specifications inbar/PSI with coldtires

245/45 R 18 100 VM+S XL A/S RSC245/40 R 19 98 V M+S XL A/S RSC245/45 R 18 96 YRSC225/55 R 17 97 H M+S RSC245/45 R 18 100 VM+S XL RSC

2.5 / 36 2.9 /42

Front: 245/45 R 1896 Y RSCRear: 275/40 R 1899 Y RSC

2.5 / 36-

-2.5 / 36

Front: 245/40 R 1994 Y RSCRear: 275/35 R 1996 Y RSC

2.4 / 35-

-2.6 / 38

Front:245/35 R 20 95 Y XLRear: 275/30 R 2097 Y XL

2.5 / 36-

-3.0 / 44

Emergency wheel:T 135/90 R 17 104M

Speed up to a max. of50 mph / 80 km/h4.2 / 60

With high-speed tuning feature

Tire size Pressure specifica‐tions in bar/PSI

Specifications inbar/PSI with coldtires

245/45 R 18 100 VM+S XL A/S RSC245/40 R 19 98 V M+S XL A/S RSC245/45 R 18 96 YRSC225/55 R 17 97 H M+S RSC245/45 R 18 100 VM+S XL RSC

2.8 / 41 3.3 / 48

Front: 245/45 R 1896 Y RSCRear:275/40 R 18 99 YRSC

2.8 / 41-

-2.8 / 41

Front: 245/40 R 1994 Y RSCRear:275/35 R 19 96 YRSC

2.8 / 41-

-3.0 / 44

Front: 245/35 R 2095 Y XL RSCRear:275/30 R 20 97 Y XLRSC

2.9 /42-

-3.3 / 48

Emergency wheel:T 135/90 R 17 104M

Speed up to a max. of50 mph / 80 km/h4.2 / 60

550i xDriveWithout high-speed tuning feature

Seite 219

Wheels and tires Mobility

219Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 224: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Tire size Pressure specificationsin bar/PSI

Specifications inbar/PSI with coldtires

245/45 R 18 100 VM+S XL A/S RSC245/40 R 19 98 V M+S XL A/S RSC245/45 R 18 96 YRSC245/45 R 18 100 VM+S XL RSC

2.6 / 38 3.0 / 44

Front: 245/45 R 1896 Y RSCRear: 275/40 R 1899 Y RSC

2.6 / 38-

-2.6 / 38

Front: 245/40 R 1994 Y RSCRear: 275/35 R 1996 Y RSC

2.6 / 38-

-2.7 / 39

Front: 245/35 R 2095 Y XL RSCRear: 275/30 R 2097 Y XL RSC

2.7 / 39-

-3.1 / 45

With high-speed tuning feature

Tire size Pressure specificationsin bar/PSI

Specifications inbar/PSI with coldtires

245/45 R 18 100 VM+S XL A/S RSC245/40 R 19 98 V M+S XL A/S RSC245/45 R 18 96 YRSC245/45 R 18 100 VM+S XL RSC

3.0 / 44 3.4 / 49

Front: 245/45 R 1896 Y RSCRear: 275/40 R 1899 Y RSC

3.0 / 44-

-3.0 / 44

Front: 245/40 R 1994 Y RSCRear: 275/35 R 1996 Y RSC

3.0 / 44-

-3.2 / 46

Front: 245/35 R 2095 Y XL RSCRear: 275/30 R 2097 Y XL RSC

3.1 / 45-

-3.4 / 49

Tire identification marksTire size245/45 R 18 96 Y245: nominal width in mm45: aspect ratio in %R: radial tire code18: rim diameter in inches96: load rating, not for ZR tiresY: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires

Seite 220

Mobility Wheels and tires

220Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 225: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Speed letterQ = up to 100 mph, 160 km/hR = up to 106 mph, 170 km/hS = up to 112 mph, 180 km/hT = up to 118 mph, 190 km/hH = up to 131 mph, 210 km/hV = up to 150 mph, 240 km/hW = up to 167 mph, 270 km/hY = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h

Tire Identification NumberDOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 4314xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brandxxx: tire size and tire design4314: tire ageTires with DOT codes meet the guidelines ofthe U.S. Department of Transportation.

Tire ageDOT … 4314: the tire was manufactured in the43th week of 2014.

RecommendationRegardless of wear and tear, replace tires atleast every 6 years.

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicableon the tire sidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width.For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA;Temperature A

DOT Quality GradesTreadwearTraction AA A B CTemperature A B CAll passenger car tires must conform to Fed‐eral Safety Requirements in addition to thesegrades.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified gov‐ernment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g,times as well on the government course as atire graded 100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and may depart signifi‐cantly from the norm due to variations in driv‐ing habits, service practices and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

TractionThe traction grades, from highest to lowest,are AA, A, B, and C.Those grades represent the tire's ability tostop on wet pavement as measured undercontrolled conditions on specified governmenttest surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor traction performance.The traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

TemperatureThe temperature grades are A, the highest, B,and C, representing the tire's resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditionson a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tirelife, and excessive temperature can lead tosudden tire failure. The grade C correspondsto a level of performance which all passengercar tires must meet under the Federal MotorVehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades BandA represent higher levels of performance onthe laboratory test wheel than the minimum re‐quired by law.

Seite 221

Wheels and tires Mobility

221Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 226: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Temperature grade for this tireThe temperature grade for this tire is es‐

tablished for a tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐tion, or excessive loading, either separately orin combination, can cause heat buildup andpossible tire failure.If necessary, have the vehicle towed.◀

RSC – Run-flat tiresRun-flat tires, refer to page 224, are labeledwith a circular symbol containing the lettersRSC marked on the sidewall.

M+SWinter and all-season tires with better coldweather performance than summer tires.

Tire treadSummer tiresDo not drive with a tire tread depth of less than0.12 in/3 mm.There is an increased danger of hydroplaning ifthe tire tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm.

Winter tiresDo not drive with a tire tread depth of less than0.16 in/4 mm.Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires areless suitable for winter operation.

Minimum tread depth

Wear indicators are distributed around thetire's circumference and have the legally re‐quired minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.

They are marked on the side of the tire withTWI, Tread Wear Indicator.

Tire damageGeneral informationInspect your tires often for damage, foreignobjects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.

HintsDriving over rough or damaged road surfaces,as well as debris, curbs and other obstaclescan cause serious damage to wheels, tires andsuspension parts. This is more likely to occurwith low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐ioning between the wheel and the road. Becareful to avoid road hazards and reduce yourspeed, especially if your vehicle is equippedwith low-profile tires.Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de‐fects:▷ Unusual vibrations while driving.▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐

dency to pull to the left or right.Damage can, e. g., be caused by driving overcurbs, road damage, or similar things.

Seite 222

Mobility Wheels and tires

222Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 227: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

In case of tire damageIf there are indications of tire damage, re‐

duce your speed immediately and have therims and tires checked right away; otherwise,there is the increased risk of an accident.Drive carefully to the nearest service center.Have the vehicle towed or transported there.Otherwise, tire damage can become life threat‐ening for vehicle occupants and also other traf‐fic.◀

Repair of tire damageFor safety reasons, the manufacturer of

your vehicle recommends that you do not havedamaged tires repaired; they should be re‐placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re‐sult.◀

Changing wheels and tiresMounting

Information on mounting tiresHave mounting and balancing performed

only by a service center.If work is not carried out properly, there is adanger of subsequent damage and relatedsafety hazards.◀

Wheel and tire combinationYou can ask the service center about the rightwheel/tire combination and wheel rim versionsfor the vehicle.Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impairthe function of a variety of systems such asABS or DSC.To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐figuration from a single manufacturer.Following tire damage, have the original wheeland tire combination remounted on the vehicleas soon as possible.

Approved wheels and tiresYou should only use wheels and tires

that have been approved by the vehicle manu‐facturer for your vehicle type; otherwise, e.g.,despite having the same official size ratings,variations can lead to chassis contact and withit, the risk of severe accidentsThe manufacturer of your vehicle cannot eval‐uate non-approved wheels and tires to deter‐mine if they are suited for use, and thereforecannot guarantee the operating safety of thevehicle.◀

Recommended tire brands

For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐hicle recommends certain tire brands. Thesecan be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.With proper use, these tires meet the higheststandards for safety and handling.

New tiresTire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;they achieve their full traction potential after abreak-in time.Drive conservatively for the first200 miles/300 km.

Retreaded tiresThe manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐ommend the use of retreaded tires.

Seite 223

Wheels and tires Mobility

223Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 228: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Retreaded tiresPossibly substantial variations in the de‐

sign and age of the tire casing structures canlimit service life and have a negative impact onroad safety.◀

Winter tiresWinter tires are recommended for operating onwinter roads.Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro‐vide better winter traction than summer tires,they do not provide the same level of perform‐ance as winter tires.

Maximum speed of winter tiresIf the maximum speed of the vehicle is higherthan the permissible speed for the winter tires,then a respective symbol is displayed in yourfield of vision. You can obtain this sign from thetire specialist or from your service center.

Maximum speed for winter tiresDo not exceed the maximum speed for

the respective winter tires; otherwise, tire dam‐age and accidents can occur.◀

Run-flat tiresIf you are already using run-flat tires, for yourown safety you should replace them only withthe same kind. No spare tire is available in thecase of a flat tire. Your service center will beglad to advise you.

Rotating wheels between axlesDifferent wear patterns can occur on the frontand rear axles depending on individual drivingconditions. The tires can be rotated betweenthe axles to achieve even wear. Your servicecenter will be glad to advise you. After rotating,check the tire pressure and correct if needed.Rotating the tires is not permissible on vehi‐cles with different tire sizes on the front andrear axles, i.e. when using different types oftires.

StorageStore wheels and tires in a cool, dry place withas little exposure to light as possible.Always protect tires against all contact with oil,grease and fuels.Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.

Run-flat tiresLabel

RSC label on the tire sidewall.The wheels consist of tires that are self-sup‐porting, to a limited degree, and possibly spe‐cial rims.The support of the sidewall allows the tire toremain drivable to a restricted degree in theevent of a tire inflation pressure loss.

Follow the instructions for continued drivingwith a flat tire.

Changing run-flat tiresFor your own safety, only use run-flat tires. Nospare tire is available in the case of a flat tire.Your service center will be glad to advise you.

Snow chainsFine-link snow chainsOnly certain types of fine-link snow chainshave been tested by the manufacturer of thevehicle, classified as road-safe and approved.

Seite 224

Mobility Wheels and tires

224Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 229: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Information about the approved snow chainsare available from the service center.

UseUse only in pairs on the rear wheels, equippedwith the tires of the following size:▷ 225/55 R 17.▷ 245/45 R 18.▷ 245/40 R 19.Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐tions.Make sure that the snow chains are alwayssufficiently tight. Retighten as needed accord‐ing to the chain manufacturer's instructions.Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor aftermounting snow chains, as doing so may resultin incorrect readings.Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor aftermounting snow chains, as doing so may resultin incorrect readings.When driving with snow chains, briefly activateDynamic Traction Control if needed.

Maximum speed with snow chainsDo not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/hwhen using snow chains.

Snow chain detection

The conceptWhen using snow chains, settings should bemade via the iDrive for the snow chains beingapplied.The snow chain detection system supportsyou by automatically showing the detectedstate on the Control Display.When snow chains are in use, the rear axlesteering of the Integral Active Steering is deac‐tivated automatically.At speeds above the maximum permittedspeed with snow chains of 30 mph/50 km/h,the rear axle steering is activated again auto‐matically.

Activating the status1. "Settings"2. "Tire chains"3. "Tire chains installed"

Automatic detectionIf functioning properly:▷ Snow chains are mounted. Settings are not

activated .After you drive a short distance, a CheckControl message is shown and the state isactivated automatically.Confirm the automatic activation.

▷ Snow chains are not mounted. Settings areactivated .At speeds above 30 mph/50 km/h, a CheckControl message is displayed. Deactivatethe status manually.

If not functioning properly:▷ Snow chains are mounted. Settings are not

activated .A Check Control message is not displayed.The automatic detection system is mal‐functioning. Activate the status manually.

Activating/deactivating rear axlesteeringIf the status indicating that snow chains are inuse is activated, the rear axle steering is deac‐tivated automatically.At speeds above 30 mph/50 km/h, the rear axlesteering is activated again, even though snowchains are in use.

Seite 225

Wheels and tires Mobility

225Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 230: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Engine compartmentVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems.

Important features in the engine compartment

1 Vehicle identification number2 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal3 Washer fluid reservoir

4 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal5 Oil filler neck.6 Coolant reservoir

HoodOpening the hood

Working in the engine compartmentNever attempt to perform any service or

repair operations on your vehicle without thenecessary professional technical training.

If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide‐lines, have any work on the vehicle performedonly by a service center.If work is not carried out properly, there is adanger of subsequent damage and relatedsafety hazards.◀

Seite 226

Mobility Engine compartment

226Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 231: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Never reach into the engine compart‐ment

Never reach into spaces or gaps in the enginecompartment; otherwise, there is a risk of in‐jury, e.g., from rotating or hot parts.◀

Danger of injury when the hood is openThere is a danger of injury from protrud‐

ing parts when the hood is open.◀

1. Pull the lever.

2. Press the release handle and open thehood.

3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood.

Closing the hoodHood open when drivingIf you see any signs that the hood is not

completely closed while driving, pull over im‐mediately and close it securely.◀

Danger of jammingMake sure that the closing path of the

hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀

Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 16in/40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully.The hood must audibly engage on both sides.

Seite 227

Engine compartment Mobility

227Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 232: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Engine oilVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems.

General informationThe engine oil consumption is dependent onthe driving style and driving conditions.The engine oil consumption can increase incase of, for example:▷ Sporty driving.▷ Break-in the engine.▷ Idling of the engine.▷ Usage of non-approved engine oil grades.Therefore, regularly check the engine oil levelafter refueling.Depending on its engine, the vehicle is equip‐ped with electronic oil measurement or oilmeasuring is done with a dipstick.The electronic oil measurement has two meas‐uring principles:▷ Status display▷ Detailed measurement

Electronic oil measurementStatus display

The conceptThe engine oil level is monitored electronicallywhile driving and shown on the Control Dis‐play.

If the engine oil level reaches the minimumlevel, a check control message is displayed.

RequirementsA current measured value is available after ap‐prox. 30 minutes of driving. During a shortertrip, the status of the last, sufficiently long tripis displayed.With frequent short-distance trips, regularlyperform a detailed measurement.

Displaying the engine oil levelOn the Control Display:

1. "Vehicle info"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Engine oil level"

Engine oil level display messagesDifferent messages appear on the display de‐pending on the engine oil level. Pay attentionto these messages.If the engine oil level is too low, within the next125 miles/200 km Add engine oil, refer topage 229.

Engine oil level too lowAdd engine oil immediately; otherwise,

an insufficient amount of engine oil could re‐sult in engine damage.◀

Take care not to add too much engine oil.Too much engine oilHave the vehicle checked immediately;

otherwise, surplus engine oil can lead to en‐gine damage.◀

Seite 228

Mobility Engine oil

228Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 233: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Detailed measurement

The conceptIn the detailed measurement the engine oillevel is checked and displayed via a scale.During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐creased somewhat.

General informationA detailed measurement is only possible withcertain engines.

Requirements▷ Vehicle is on level road.▷ Manual transmission: shift lever in neutral

position, clutch and accelerator pedals notdepressed.

▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever inselector lever position N or P and accelera‐tor pedal not depressed.

▷ Engine is running and is at operating tem‐perature.

Performing a detailed measurementIn order to perform a detailed measurement ofthe engine oil level:

1. "Vehicle info"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Measure engine oil level"4. "Start measurement"The engine oil level is checked and displayedvia a scale.Time: approx. 1 minute.

Adding engine oilGeneral informationSwitch off the ignition and safely park the vehi‐cle before engine oil is added.

Oil filler neck

Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐played in the instrument cluster or when theengine oil level has almost dropped to thelower mark of the dipstick.Add 1 US quart/liter.With 8 cylinder engine:Add 2 US quarts/liters.

Adding engine oilAdd oil within the next 125 miles/200 km;

otherwise, this may cause engine damage.◀

Do not add too much engine oilWhen too much engine oil is added, im‐

mediately have the vehicle checked, otherwise,this may cause engine damage.◀

Protect childrenKeep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil‐

dren and observe the warnings on the contain‐ers to prevent health risks.◀

Engine oil types to addHints

No oil additivesOil additives may lead to engine dam‐

age.◀

Seite 229

Engine oil Mobility

229Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 234: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Viscosity grades for engine oilsWhen selecting an engine oil, ensure that

the engine oil belongs to one of the viscositygrades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40,and SAE 5W-30 or malfunctions or enginedamage may occur.◀

The engine oil quality is critical for the life ofthe engine.

Approved engine oil typesYou can add engine oils with the followingspecifications:

Gasoline engine

BMW Longlife-01.

BMW Longlife-01 FE.

Diesel engine

BMW Longlife-04.

Additional information about the approvedtypes of engine oils can be obtained from theservice center.

Alternative engine oil typesIf the approved engine oils are not available, upto 1 US quart/liter of an engine oil with the fol‐lowing specification can be added:

Gasoline engine

API SM or superior grade specification.

Diesel engine

API ILSAC GF-5.

Engine oil change:The vehicle manufacturer recommends thatyou let the service center change the motor oil.

Seite 230

Mobility Engine oil

230Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 235: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

CoolantVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems.

HintsDanger of burns from hot engineDo not open the cooling system while

the engine is hot; otherwise, esliding coolantmay cause burns.◀

Suitable additivesOnly use suitable additives; otherwise,

engine damage may occur. The additives areharmful to your health.◀

Coolant consists of water and additives.Not all commercially available additives aresuitable for the vehicle. Information about thesuitable additives are available from the servicecenter.

Coolant levelGeneral informationIf there is no Min. and Max. mark in the fillerneck of the coolant reservoir, have the coolantlevel checked if needed by your service centerand add coolant as needed.Depending on the engine installation, the cool‐ant reservoir is located on the right side or theleft side of the engine compartment.

Checking1. Let the engine cool.2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly

counterclockwise to allow any excesspressure to dissipate, then open it.

3. Open the coolant reservoir lid.4. The coolant level is correct if it lies be‐

tween the minimum and maximum marksin the filler neck.

Seite 231

Coolant Mobility

231Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 236: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Adding1. Let the engine cool.2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly

counterclockwise to allow any excesspressure to dissipate, then open it.

3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant upto the specified level; do not overfill.

4. Turn the lid until there is an audible click.The arrows on the coolant reservoir andthe lid must point towards one another.

5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐nated as soon as possible.

DisposalComply with the relevant environmen‐tal protection regulations when dispos‐ing of coolant and coolant additives.

Seite 232

Mobility Coolant

232Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 237: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

MaintenanceVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems.

BMW maintenance systemThe maintenance system indicates requiredmaintenance measures, and thereby providessupport in maintaining road safety and the op‐erational reliability of the vehicle.

Condition Based ServiceCBSSensors and special algorithms take into ac‐count the driving conditions of your vehicle.Based on this, Condition Based Service recog‐nizes the maintenance requirements.The system makes it possible to adapt theamount of maintenance corresponding to youruser profile.Details on the service requirements, refer topage 94, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐play.

Service data in the remote controlInformation on the required maintenance iscontinuously stored in the remote control.Your service center will read out this data andsuggest the right array of service proceduresfor your vehicle.Therefore, hand your service specialist the re‐mote control with which the vehicle was drivenmost recently.

Storage periodsStorage periods during which the vehicle bat‐tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐count.If this occurs, have a service center update thetime-dependent maintenance procedures,such as checking brake fluid and, if needed,changing the engine oil and the microfilter/activated-charcoal filter.

Service and WarrantyInformation Booklet for USmodels and Warranty andService Guide Booklet forCanadian modelsPlease consult your Service and Warranty In‐formation Booklet for US models and Warrantyand Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐els for additional information on service re‐quirements.Maintenance and repair should be performedby your service center. Make sure to have reg‐ular maintenance procedures recorded in thevehicle's Service and Warranty InformationBooklet for US models, and in the Warrantyand Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐els. These entries are proof of regular mainte‐nance.

Socket for OBD OnboardDiagnosisNote

Socket for Onboard DiagnosisThe socket for onboard diagnostics may

only be used by the service center or a work‐shop that operates in accordance with thespecifications of the vehicle manufacturer with

Seite 233

Maintenance Mobility

233Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 238: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

correspondingly trained personnel and otherauthorized persons. Otherwise, use may resultin operating problems for the vehicle.◀

Position

There is an OBD socket on the driver's side forchecking the primary components in the vehi‐cle's emissions.

Emissions▷ The warning lamp lights up:

Emissions are deteriorating. Havethe vehicle checked as soon aspossible.

▷ The warning lamp flashes under certaincircumstances:This indicates that there is excessive mis‐firing in the engine.Reduce the vehicle speed and have thesystem checked immediately; otherwise,serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐riod can seriously damage emission con‐trol components, in particular the catalyticconverter.

Seite 234

Mobility Maintenance

234Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 239: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Replacing componentsVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems.

Onboard vehicle tool kit

The onboard vehicle tool kit is located in afold-down cover in the trunk lid.Unscrew the wing nut to open.

Wiper blade replacementGeneral information

Do not fold down the wipers withoutwiper blades

Do not fold down the wipers if wiper bladeshave not been installed; this may damage thewindshield.◀

Replacing the wiper blades1. To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer

to page 78, the wiper arms.2. Fold up the wipers.

3. Position the wiper blade in a horizontal po‐sition.

4. Remove the wiper blade toward one side.

5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse orderof removal until it locks in place.

6. Fold down the wipers.

Lamp and bulb replacementHints

Lights and bulbsLights and bulbs make an essential contribu‐tion to vehicle safety.The manufacturer of the vehicle recommendsthat you entrust corresponding procedures to

Seite 235

Replacing components Mobility

235Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 240: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

the service center if you are unfamiliar those orif they have not been described here.You can obtain a selection of replacementbulbs at the service center.

Danger of burnsOnly change bulbs when they are cool;

otherwise, there is a danger of gettingburned.◀

Working on the lighting systemWhen working on the lighting system,

you should always reel off the lights affected toprevent short circuits.To avoid possible injury or equipment damagewhen replacing bulbs, observe any instructionsprovided by the bulb manufacturer.◀

Do not perform work/bulb replacementon xenon headlights

Have any work on the xenon lighting system,including bulb replacement, performed only bya service center. Due to the high voltagepresent in the system, there is a danger of fatalinjuries if work is carried out improperly.◀

Do not touch the bulbsDo not touch the glass of new bulbs with

your bare hands, as even minute amounts ofcontamination will burn into the bulb's surfaceand reduce its service life.Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar,or hold the bulb by its base.◀

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)Some items of equipment use light-emittingdiodes installed behind a cover as a lightsource.These light-emitting diodes, which are relatedto conventional lasers, are officially designatedas Class 1 light-emitting diodes.

Do not remove the coversDo not remove the covers, and never

stare into the unfiltered light for several hours;otherwise, irritation of the retina could result.◀

Headlight glassCondensation can form on the inside of the ex‐ternal lights in cool or humid weather. Whendriving with the light switched on, the conden‐sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐light glass does not need to be changed.If the headlights do not dim despite drivingwith the light switched on, increasing humidityforms, e. g. water droplets in the light, have theservice center check this.

Headlight settingThe headlight adjustments can be affected bychanging lights and bulbs. Have the head‐lights' settings checked and corrected by serv‐ice after a replacement.

Front lights, bulb replacement

Xenon headlights

At a glance

1 Corner-illuminating lights2 Parking lamp, daytime running lights3 Low beams/high beams4 Turn signal

Seite 236

Mobility Replacing components

236Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 241: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

HintsBecause of the long life of these bulbs, thelikelihood of failure is very low. Switching thelights on and off frequently shortens their life.If a bulb fails, reel on the front fog lights andcontinue the trip with great care. Comply withlocal regulations.

Do not perform work/bulb replacementon xenon headlights

Have any work on the xenon lighting system,including bulb replacement, performed only bya service center. Due to the high voltagepresent in the system, there is a danger of fatalinjuries if work is carried out improperly.◀

For checking and adjusting headlamp aim,please contact your BMW center.

Parking lights and roadside parking lampFollow general instructions, refer to page 235.These lights feature LED technology.Contact your service center in the event of amalfunction.

Accessing the bulbs

Remove the screws and fold down the lid.

Turn signalFollow general instructions, refer to page 235.The illustration shows the left side of the en‐gine compartment.24-watt bulb, PY.

Unscrew the lid, remove it, and change thebulb.

Corner-illuminating lightsFollow general instructions, refer to page 235.The illustration shows the left side of the en‐gine compartment.55-watt bulb, H7.

1. Fold open the cover in the engine compart‐ment.

2. Unscrew the lid and remove it.

Seite 237

Replacing components Mobility

237Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 242: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

3. Unscrew the bulb holder counterclockwise.

4. Remove the bulb and replace it.5. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in

the reverse order.

LED headlights

At a glance

1 Corner-illuminating lights2 Low beams/high beams3 Parking lamp, daytime running lights4 Turn signal5 Side marker lights

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)With LED headlights, all front lights and sideindicators are designed with LED technology.If an LED fails, reel on the front fog lights andcontinue the trip with great care. Comply withlocal regulations.Contact your service center in the event of amalfunction.

LED front fog lightsThese front fog lights are made using LEDtechnology. Contact your service center in theevent of a malfunction.

Turn signal in exterior mirrorThe turn signals in the exterior mirrors featureLED technology. Contact your service centerin the event of a malfunction.

Tail lights, bulb replacement

At a glance

1 Turn signal2 Reversing lamp3 Inside brake lamp4 Rear lamp5 Outside brake lamp6 Rear reflector

Turn signal, outer brake, tail, andlicense plate lightsFollow general instructions, refer to page 235.These lights feature LED technology.Contact your service center in the event of amalfunction.

Seite 238

Mobility Replacing components

238Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 243: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Lights in the trunk lid

Access to the lights1. Remove the three screws using the screw

driver from the onboard vehicle tool kit.

2. Fold away the cover.

Inside brake lampFollow general instructions, refer to page 235.21-watt bulb, H21W.

The illustration shows the position of the bulbin the installed bulb holder.

Squeeze the clips together and remove thebulb holder.Press the bulb into the bulb holder, turn coun‐terclockwise and remove.

Reversing lampFollow general instructions, refer to page 235.16-watt bulb, W16W.

The illustration shows the position of the bulbin the installed bulb holder.

Squeeze the clips together and remove thebulb holder.Pull out the bulb and replace it.

Seite 239

Replacing components Mobility

239Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 244: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Changing wheelsHintsWhen using run-flat tires or sealants, a tiredoes not need to be changed immediately inthe event of pressure loss due to a flat tire.Which is why no spare tire is available.The tools for changing wheels are available asaccessories from your service center.

Jacking points for the vehicle jack

The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐cated at the positions shown.

Vehicle batteryMaintenanceThe battery is maintenance-free.The added amount of acid is sufficient for theservice life of the battery.Further information about the battery can beobtained from your service center.

Battery replacementUse approved vehicle batteries onlyOnly use vehicle batteries that have been

approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer;otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged andsystems or functions may not be fully availa‐ble.◀

After a battery replacement, have the batteryregistered on the vehicle by your service cen‐

ter to ensure that all comfort features are fullyavailable and that any Check Control mes‐sages of these comfort features are no longerdisplayed.

Charging the battery

NoteDo not connect charging devices to the12 volt socket in the vehicle

Do not connect battery chargers to the fac‐tory-installed 12 volt sockets in the vehicle asthis may damage the vehicle battery due to anincreased power consumption.◀

General informationMake sure that the battery is always suffi‐ciently charged to guarantee that the batteryremains usable for its full service life.The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐lowing cases:▷ When making frequent short-distance

drives.▷ If the vehicle is not used for prolonged pe‐

riods, longer than a month.

Starting aid terminalsIn the vehicle, only charge the battery via thestarting aid terminals, refer to page 244, in theengine compartment with the engine off.

Power failureAfter a temporary power loss, some equipmentneeds to be newly initialized or individual set‐tings updated, e.g.:▷ Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory:

store the positions again.▷ Time: update.▷ Date: update.▷ Glass sunroof: initialize the system, refer to

page 51.

Seite 240

Mobility Replacing components

240Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 245: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Disposing of old batteriesHave old batteries disposed of by yourservice center or bring them to a recy‐cling center.

Maintain the battery in an upright position fortransport and storage. Secure the battery sothat it does not tip over during transport.

FusesHints

Replacing fusesNever attempt to repair a blown fuse and

do not replace a defective fuse with a substi‐tute of another color or amperage rating; thiscould lead to a circuit overload, ultimately re‐sulting in a fire in the vehicle.◀

Plastic tweezers and information on the fusetypes and locations are stored in the fuse boxin the cargo area.

In the glove compartment

Push the handle up, arrow 1, and open the lid,arrow 2.

In the cargo area

Open the cover on the right side trim, arrow.

Information on the fuse types and locations isfound on a separate sheet.

Seite 241

Replacing components Mobility

241Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 246: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Breakdown assistanceVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems.

Hazard warning flashers

The button is located in the center console.

Intelligent EmergencyRequestThe conceptIn case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐quest can be made through this system.

General informationOnly press the SOS button in an emergency.

HintsEmergency Request not guaranteedFor technical reasons, the Emergency

Request cannot be guaranteed under unfavor‐able conditions.◀

At a glance

SOS button in the roofliner

Requirements▷ The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has

been activated.▷ The radio-ready state is switched on.▷ The Assist system is functional.

Initiating an Emergency Request1. Press the cover briefly to open it.2. Press the SOS button until the LED at the

button lights up green.▷ The LED lights up green: an Emergency

Request was initiated.If a cancel prompt appears on the display,the Emergency Request can be aborted.If the situation allows, wait in your vehicleuntil the voice connection has been estab‐lished.

▷ The LED flashes green when a connectionto the BMW Response Center has beenestablished.When the emergency request is receivedat the BMW Response Center, the BMWResponse Center contacts you and takesfurther steps to help you.Even if you are unable to respond, theBMW Response Center can take further

Seite 242

Mobility Breakdown assistance

242Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 247: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

steps to help you under certain circum‐stances.For this, data are transmitted to the BMWResponse Center which serve to deter‐mine the necessary rescue measures. E. g.the current position of the vehicle, if it canbe established.

▷ If the LED is flashing green, but the BMWResponse Center can no longer be heardvia the speaker, you can nevertheless stillbe heard at the BMW Response Center.

Initiating an Emergency RequestautomaticallyUnder certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐quest is automatically initiated immediately af‐ter a severe accident. Automatic Collision Noti‐fication is not affected by pressing the SOSbutton.

Warning triangle

The warning triangle is located in the containeron the inside of the trunk lid.Unscrew the wing nut to open.

First aid kitNoteSome of the articles have a limited service life.Check the expiration dates of the contentsregularly and replace any expired itemspromptly.

Storage

The first aid kit is located in the container onthe inside of the trunk lid.Unscrew the wing nut to open.

Roadside AssistanceService availabilityRoadside Assistance can be reached aroundthe clock in many countries. You can obtain as‐sistance there in the event of a vehicle break‐down.

Roadside AssistanceThe Roadside Assistance phone number canbe viewed on the iDrive or a connection toRoadside Assistance can be established di‐rectly.

Jump-startingHintsIf the battery is discharged, an engine can bestarted using the battery of another vehicleand two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca‐bles with fully insulated clamp handles.To prevent personal injury or damage to bothvehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐dure.

Seite 243

Breakdown assistance Mobility

243Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 248: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Do not touch live partsTo avoid the risk of potentially fatal in‐

jury, always avoid all contact with electricalcomponents while the engine is running.◀

Preparation1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐

hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. This infor‐mation can be found on the battery.

2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐cle.

3. Switch off any electronic systems/powerconsumers in both vehicles.

Bodywork contact between vehiclesMake sure that there is no contact be‐

tween the bodywork of the two vehicles; other‐wise, there is a danger of short circuits.◀

Starting aid terminalsConnecting orderConnect the jumper cables in the correct

order to prevent risk of injury from arcing.◀

The so-called starting aid terminal in the en‐gine compartment acts as the battery's posi‐tive terminal.

The body ground or a special nut acts as thebattery negative terminal.

Connecting the cables1. Pull off the lid of the BMW starting aid ter‐

minal.2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive

jumper cable to the positive terminal of thebattery, or to the corresponding startingaid terminal of the vehicle providing assis‐tance.

3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other endof the cable to the positive terminal of thebattery, or to the corresponding startingaid terminal of the vehicle to be started.

4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negativejumper cable to the negative terminal ofthe battery, or to the corresponding engineor body ground of assisting vehicle.

5. Attach the second terminal clamp to thenegative terminal of the battery, or to thecorresponding engine or body ground ofthe vehicle to be started.

Starting the engineNever use spray fluids to start the engine.

1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicleand let it run for several minutes at an in‐creased idle speed.If the vehicle to be started has a diesel en‐gine: let the engine of the assisting vehiclerun for approx. 10 minutes.

2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to bestarted in the usual way.

Seite 244

Mobility Breakdown assistance

244Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 249: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

If the first starting attempt is not success‐ful, wait a few minutes before making an‐other attempt in order to allow the dis‐charged battery to recharge.

3. Let both engines run for several minutes.4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re‐

verse order.Check the battery and recharge if needed.

Tow-starting and towingNote

Tow-starting and towingFor towing the vehicle turn, switch off the

Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐tions of the individual braking systems mightlead to accidents.◀

Steptronic transmission: transportingyour vehicle

NoteYour vehicle is not permitted to be towed.Therefore, contact a service center in theevent of a breakdown.

Do not have the vehicle towedHave your vehicle transported on a load‐

ing platform only; otherwise, damage may oc‐cur.◀

Tow truck

The vehicle should only be transported on aloading platform.

Do not lift the vehicleDo not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or

body and chassis parts; otherwise, damagemay result.◀

Use tow fitting located in the front only for po‐sitioning the vehicle.

Manual transmission

Observe before towing your vehicleGearshift lever in neutral position.

TowingWhen the parking brake is blockedThe parking brake cannot be released

manually.Do not tow the vehicle with the parking brakeblocked, or the vehicle can be damaged.Contact your service center.◀

Follow the towing instructionsFollow all towing instructions; otherwise,

vehicle damage or accidents may occur.◀

▷ Make sure that the ignition is switched on;otherwise, the low beams, tail lights, turnsignals, and wipers may be unavailable.

▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axletilted, as the front wheels could turn.

Seite 245

Breakdown assistance Mobility

245Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 250: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

▷ When the engine is stopped, there is nopower assist. Consequently, more forceneeds to be applied when braking andsteering.

▷ Larger steering wheel movements are re‐quired.

▷ The towing vehicle must not be lighterthan the vehicle being towed; otherwise,it will not be possible to control the vehi‐cle's response.

Tow truck

Have your vehicle transported with a tow truckwith a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.

Do not lift the vehicleDo not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or

body and chassis parts; otherwise, damagemay result.◀

Towing other vehicles

HintsLight towing vehicleThe towing vehicle must not be lighter

than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it willnot be possible to control the vehicle's re‐sponse.◀

Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctlyAttach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow

fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts maycause damage.◀

▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐pending on local regulations.

▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearlyidentify the vehicle being towed by placinga sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐dow.

Tow barThe tow fittings used should be on the sameside on both vehicles.Should it prove impossible to avoid mountingthe tow bar at an offset angle, please observethe following:▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going

around corners.▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it

is secured with an offset.

Tow ropeWhen starting to tow the vehicle, make surethat the tow rope is taut.To avoid jerking and the associated stresseson the vehicle components when towing, al‐ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps.

Tow fittingThe screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐ried in the vehicle.The tow fitting can be screwed in at the frontor rear of the BMW.

The tow fitting is located in the container onthe inside of the trunk lid.

Seite 246

Mobility Breakdown assistance

246Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 251: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Tow fitting, information on use▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with

the vehicle and screw it all the way in.▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved

roads only.▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,

do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and thevehicle can occur.◀

Screw thread for tow fitting

Push out the cover by pressing on the topedge.

Tow-starting

Steptronic transmissionDo not tow-start the vehicle.Tow-starting the engine is not possible due tothe Steptronic transmission.Have the cause of the starting problems fixed.

Manual transmissionIf possible, do not tow-start the vehicle butstart the engine by jump-starting, refer topage 243. If the vehicle is equipped with a cat‐alytic converter, only tow-start while the en‐gine is cold.

1. Switch on the hazard warning system andcomply with local regulations.

2. Ignition, refer to page 69, on.3. Engage third gear.

4. Have the vehicle tow-started with theclutch pedal pressed and slowly releasethe pedal. After the engine starts, immedi‐ately press on the clutch pedal again.

5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the towbar or rope, and reel off the hazard warningsystem.

6. Have the vehicle checked.

Seite 247

Breakdown assistance Mobility

247Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 252: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

CareVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems.

Car washesGeneral informationRegularly remove foreign objects such asleaves in the area below the windshield whenthe hood is raised.Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly inwinter. Intense soiling and road salt can dam‐age the vehicle.

HintsSteam jets or high-pressure washersWhen using steam jets or high-pressure

washers, hold them a sufficient distance awayand use a maximum temperature of140 ℉/60 ℃.If the vehicle has a glass sunroof, ensure that adistance of at least 31.5 inches/80 cm is main‐tained. Holding them too close or using exces‐sively high pressures or temperatures cancause damage or preliminary damage that maythen lead to long-term damage.Follow the user's manual for the high-pressurewasher.◀

Cleaning sensors/cameras with high-pressure washers

When using high-pressure washers, do notspray the exterior sensors and cameras, e.g.,Park Distance Control, for extended periods of

time and only from a distance of at least12 in/30 cm.◀

Automatic car washes

HintsNote the following:▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or

those that use soft brushes in order toavoid paint damage.

▷ Make sure that the wheels and tires are notdamaged by the transport mechanisms.

▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, theymay be damaged, depending on the widthof the vehicle.

▷ Deactivate the rain sensor, refer topage 77, to avoid unintentional wiper acti‐vation.

▷ In some cases, an unintentional alarm canbe triggered by the interior motion sensorof the alarm system. Follow the instruc‐tions on avoiding an unintentional alarm,refer to page 48.

Guide rails in car washesAvoid car washes with guide rails higher

than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle bodycould be damaged.◀

Before driving into a car washIn order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in acar wash, take the following steps:Manual transmission:

1. Drive into the car wash.2. Shift to neutral.3. Switch the engine off.4. Switch on the ignition.

Seite 248

Mobility Care

248Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 253: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Steptronic transmission:

1. Drive into the car wash.2. Engage selector lever position N.3. Deactivating Automatic Hold, refer to

page 75.4. Release the parking brake.5. Switch the engine off.

In this way, the ignition remains switchedon, and a Check-Control message is dis‐played.

Do not turn off the ignition in the carwash

Do not turn off the ignition in the car wash;otherwise, selector lever position P is en‐gaged and damages can result.◀

The vehicle cannot be locked from the outsidewhen in selector lever position N. A signalsounds when an attempt is made to lock thevehicle.To start the engine with manual transmission:

1. Press on the clutch pedal.2. Press the Start/Stop button.To start the engine with Steptronic transmis‐sion:

1. Depress the brake pedal.2. Press the Start/Stop button.Pressing the Start/Stop button without step‐ping on the brake turns the ignition off.

Selector lever positionSelector lever position P is engaged automati‐cally:▷ When the ignition is switched off.▷ After approx. 15 minutes.

Headlights▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or

acidic cleansers.

▷ Soak areas that have been dirtied e. g.,from insects, with shampoo and wash offwith water.

▷ Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use anice scraper.

After washing the vehicleAfter washing the vehicle, apply the brakesbriefly to dry them; otherwise, braking actioncan be reduced and corrosion of the brakediscs can occur.Completely remove all residues on the win‐dows, to minimize loss of visibility due tosmearing and to reduce wiper noises andwiper blade wear.

Vehicle careCar care productsBMW recommends using care and cleaningproducts from BMW, since these have beentested and approved.

Car care and cleaning productsFollow the instructions on the container.

When cleaning the interior, open the doors orwindows.Only use products intended for cleaning vehi‐cles.Cleansers can contain substances that aredangerous and harmful to your health.◀

Vehicle paintRegular care contributes to driving safety andvalue retention. Environmental influences inareas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐quency and extent of your car care to theseinfluences.Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil,grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐

Seite 249

Care Mobility

249Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 254: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

mediately to prevent the finish from being al‐tered or discolored.Only use respectively approved cleaning andcare products for vehicles with matte finish.Suitable care products for matte finishes areavailable from the service center.

Leather careRemove dust from the leather often, using acloth or vacuum cleaner.Otherwise, particles of dust and road grimechafe in pores and folds, and lead to increasedwear and premature degradation of the leathersurface.To guard against discoloration, such as fromclothing, provide leather care roughly everytwo months.Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐cause soiling on such surfaces is substantiallymore visible.Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt andgrease will gradually break down the protectivelayer of the leather surface.Suitable care products are available from theservice center.

Upholstery material careVacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.If upholstery is very dirty, e.g., with beveragestains, use a soft sponge or microfiber clothwith a suitable interior cleaner.Clean the upholstery down to the seams usinglarge sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing thematerial vigorously.

Damage from Velcro® fastenersOpen Velcro® fasteners on pants or

other articles of clothing can damage the seatcovers. Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners areclosed.◀

Caring for special components

Light-alloy wheelsWhen cleaning the vehicle, use only neutralwheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9.Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steamjets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐turer's instructions.Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agentscan destroy the protective layer of adjacentcomponents, such as the brake disk.

Chrome surfacesCarefully clean components such as the radia‐tor grille or door handles with an ample supplyof water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐ularly when they have been exposed to roadsalt.

Rubber componentsAside from water, treat only with rubbercleansers.When cleaning rubber seals, do not use anysilicon-containing car care products in order toavoid damage or noises.

Fine wood partsClean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with asoft cloth.

Plastic componentsThese include:▷ Imitation leather surfaces.▷ Roofliner.▷ Lamp lenses.▷ Instrument cluster cover.▷ Matt black spray-coated components.▷ Painted parts in the interior.Clean with a microfiber cloth.Dampen cloth lightly with water.Do not soak the roofliner.

Seite 250

Mobility Care

250Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 255: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

No cleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐vents

Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol orsolvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-dutygrease removers, fuel, or such; this could leadto surface damage.◀

Safety beltsDirty belt straps impede the reeling action andthus have a negative impact on safety.

Chemical cleaningDo not clean chemically; this can destroy

the webbing.◀

Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safetybelts clipped into their buckles.Do not allow the reels to retract the safetybelts until they are dry.

Carpets and floor matsNo objects in the area around the pedalsKeep floor mats, carpets, and any other

objects out of the pedal area; otherwise, thefunction of the pedals could be impeded whiledriving and create the risk of an accident.Do not place additional floor mats over existingmats or other objects.Only use floor mats that have been approvedfor the vehicle and can be properly attached tofloor.Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐tened again after they were removed for clean‐ing, e.g.◀

Floor mats can be removed from the car's inte‐rior for cleaning.If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with amicrofiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner.To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back andforth in the direction of travel only.

Sensors/camerasTo clean sensors and cameras, use a clothmoistened with a small amount of glasscleaner.

Displays/monitorsCleaning displays and screensDo not use any chemical or household

cleaning agents; otherwise, surfaces can be af‐fected.◀

Keeping out moistureKeep all fluids and moisture away from

the unit; otherwise, electrical components canbe damaged.◀

Avoid pressureAvoid pressing too hard when cleaning

and do not use abrasive materials; otherwise,damage can result.◀

Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.

Long-termWhen the vehicle is shut down for longer thanthree months, special measures must betaken. Additional information is available fromthe service center.

Seite 251

Care Mobility

251Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 256: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 257: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

ReferenceThis chapter contains the technical data and an

index that will quickly take you to the informationyou need.

Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 258: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Technical dataVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems.

NoteThe technical data and specifications in thisOwner's Manual are used as guidance values.The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this,for example, due to the selected special equip‐ment, country version or country-specificmeasurement method. Detailed values can be

found in the approval documents, on informa‐tion signs on the vehicle or can be obtainedfrom the service center.The information in the vehicle documents al‐ways has priority.

DimensionsNoteThe dimensions can vary depending on themodel version, equipment or country-specificmeasurement method.The specified heights do not take into accountattached parts, for example, a roof antenna,

roof racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate,for example, due to the selected special equip‐ment, tires, load and chassis version.

BMW 5 Series Sedan

Width with mirrors inches/mm 82.8/2,102

Width without mirrors inches/mm 73.2/1,860

Height inches/mm 57.6/1,464

Length inches/mm 193.4/4,913

Wheelbase inches/mm 116.9/2,968

Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 39.4/12-39.7/12.1

Seite 254

Reference Technical data

254Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 259: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Weights

528i

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,971/2,255

Load lbs/kg 948/430

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,359/1,070

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,844/1,290

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100

Trunk capacity cu ft/liters 18.4/520

535i

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,181/2,350

Load lbs/kg 992/450

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,491/1,130

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,910/1,320

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100

Cargo area capacity cu ft/liters 18.4/520

550i

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,401/2,450

Load lbs/kg 948/430

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,712/1,230

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,932/1,330

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100

Cargo area capacity cu ft/liters 18.4/520

535d

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,300/2,404

Load lbs/kg 950/431

Seite 255

Technical data Reference

255Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 260: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

535d

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,550/1,157

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,910/1,320

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100

Cargo area capacity cu ft/liters 18.4/520

528i xDrive

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,170/2,345

Load lbs/kg 948/430

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,447/1,110

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,888/1,310

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100

Cargo area capacity cu ft/liters 18.4/520

535i xDrive

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,379/2,440

Load lbs/kg 992/450

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,701/1,225

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,910/1,320

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100

Cargo area capacity cu ft/liters 18.4/520

550i xDrive

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,600/2,540

Load lbs/kg 948/430

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,800/1,270

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,954/1,340

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100

Cargo area capacity cu ft/liters 18.4/520

Seite 256

Reference Technical data

256Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 261: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

535d xDrive

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,390/2,445

Load lbs/kg 950/431

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,700/1,225

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,910/1,320

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100

Cargo area capacity cu ft/liters 18.4/520

Capacities

US gal/liters Notes

Fuel tank, approx. 18.5/70 Fuel quality, refer topage 206

Seite 257

Technical data Reference

257Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 262: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Everything from A to ZIndexAABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐

tem 135 ACC, Active Cruise Control

with Stop & Go 143 Acceleration Assistant, refer

to Launch Control 82 Activated-charcoal filter 168 Active Blind Spot Detec‐

tion 130 Active Cruise Control with

Stop & Go, ACC 143 Active Protection 132 Active seat, front 56 Active seat ventilation,

front 57 Active Steering, integral 139 Adaptive brake assistant 135 Adaptive brake lights, refer to

Brake force display 132 Adaptive drive 138 Adaptive Light Control 104 Additives, oil 229 Adjustments, seats/head re‐

straints 53 After washing vehicle 249 Airbags 108 Airbags, indicator/warning

light 109 Air circulation, refer to Recir‐

culated-air mode 167 Air, dehumidifying, refer to

Cooling function 167 Air distribution, manual 166 Air flow, automatic climate

control 166 Air outlets, see ventila‐

tion 168 Air pressure, tires 211 Alarm system 47

Alarm, unintentional 48 All around the center con‐

sole 16 All around the roofliner 17 All around the steering

wheel 14 All-season tires, refer to Win‐

ter tires 224 All-wheel-drive 137 Alternating-code hand-held

transmitter 173 Alternative oil types 230 Ambient light 106 Animal detection, see Night

Vision 125 Antifreeze, washer fluid 78 Antilock Brake System,

ABS 135 Anti-slip control, refer to

DSC 135 Approved axle load 255 Approved engine oils 230 Armrest, refer to Center arm‐

rest 182 Arrival time 98 Ashtray 174 Ashtray, front 174, 175 Ashtray, rear 175 Assistance, Roadside Assis‐

tance 243 Assistance when driving

off 135 Attentiveness assistant 132 AUTO H button 74 AUTO H button, refer to Au‐

tomatic Hold 74 AUTO intensity 166 Automatic car wash 248 Automatic climate con‐

trol 165

Automatic Cruise Controlwith Stop & Go 143

Automatic Curb Monitor 62 Automatic deactivation, front-

seat passenger airbags 110 Automatic headlight con‐

trol 104 Automatic Hold 74 Automatic locking 46 Automatic recirculated-air

control 167 Automatic Soft Closing,

doors 40 Automatic transmission, see

Steptronic transmission 79 Automatic trunk lid 41 AUTO program, automatic cli‐

mate control 166 AUTO program, intensity 166 Auto Start/Stop function 71 Average fuel consumption 98 Average speed 98 Axle loads, weights 255

BBackrest curvature, refer to

Lumbar support 55 Backrest, width 55 Band-aids, refer to First aid

kit 243 Bar for tow-starting/

towing 246 Battery replacement, vehicle

battery 240 Battery replacement, vehicle

remote control 34 Battery, vehicle 240 Belts, safety belts 57 Beverage holder, cu‐

pholder 183

Seite 258

Reference Everything from A to Z

258Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 263: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Blinds, sun protection 49 BMW Advanced Diesel 207 BMW Assist, see user's

manual for Navigation, En‐tertainment and Communi‐cation

BMW maintenance sys‐tem 233

Bonus range, ECO PRO 197 Bottle holder, refer to Cu‐

pholder 183 Brake assistant 135 Brake assistant, adaptive 135 Brake discs, break-in 188 Brake force display 132 Brake lights, adaptive 132 Brake lights, brake force dis‐

play 132 Brake lights, bulb replace‐

ment 238 Brake pads, break-in 188 Braking, hints 190 Breakdown assis‐

tance 242, 243 Break-in 188 Brightness of Control Dis‐

play 100 Bulb replacement 235 Bulb replacement, front 236 Bulb replacement, rear 238 Bulbs and lights 235 Button, RES 146 Button, Start/Stop 69 Bypassing, refer to Jump-

starting 243

CCalifornia Proposition 65

Warning 7 Calling up mirror adjust‐

ment 46 Calling up seat adjust‐

ment 46 Calling up steering wheel ad‐

justment 46

Camera, care 251 Camera, rearview cam‐

era 155 Camera, Side View 157 Camera, Top View 159 Can holder, refer to Cu‐

pholder 183 Car battery 240 Car care products 249 Care, displays 251 Care, vehicle 249 Cargo 192 Cargo area, enlarging 177 Cargo area, storage compart‐

ments 184 Cargo, securing 193 Cargo straps, securing

cargo 193 Car key, refer to Remote con‐

trol 34 Carpet, care 251 Car wash 248 Catalytic converter, refer to

Hot exhaust system 189 CBS Condition Based Serv‐

ice 233 CD/Multimedia, see user's

manual for Navigation, En‐tertainment and Communi‐cation

Center armrest 182 Center console 16 Central locking system 39 Central screen, refer to Con‐

trol Display 18 Changes, technical, refer to

Safety 7 Changing parts 235 Changing wheels 240 Changing wheels/tires 223 Chassis number, see vehicle

identification number 9 Check Control 88 Checking the engine oil level

electronically 228

Checking the oil level elec‐tronically 228

Children, seating position 65 Children, transporting

safely 65 Child restraint fixing sys‐

tem 65 Child restraint fixing system

LATCH 66 Child restraint fixing systems,

mounting 65 Child safety locks 68 Child seat, mounting 65 Child seats 65 Chrome parts, care 250 Cigarette lighter 174 Cleaning displays 251 Climate control 165 Climate control laminated

tinted safety glass 189 Climate control wind‐

shield 189 Clock 93 Closing/opening via door

lock 39 Closing/opening with remote

control 37 Closing the trunk lid with no-

touch activation 44 Clothes hooks 184 Coasting 199 Coasting with engine decou‐

pled, coasting 199 Coasting with idling en‐

gine 199 Cold starting, refer to Starting

the engine 70 Combination reel, refer to

Turn signals 76 Combination reel, refer to

Wiper system 77 COMFORT+ program, Driving

Dynamics Control 141 Comfort Access 42 COMFORT program, Driving

Dynamics Control 141

Seite 259

Everything from A to Z Reference

259Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 264: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Computer 97 Condensation on win‐

dows 166 Condensation under the vehi‐

cle 191 Condition Based Service

CBS 233 Configure driving mode 141 Confirmation signal 46 ConnectedDrive, see user's

manual for Navigation, En‐tertainment and Communi‐cation

ConnectedDrive Services Continued driving with a flat

tire 113, 116 Control Display 18 Control Display, settings 99 Controller 18 Control systems, driving sta‐

bility 135 Convenient opening with the

remote control 37 Coolant 231 Coolant level 231 Coolant temperature 92 Cooling function 167 Cooling, maximum 167 Cooling system 231 Corrosion on brake discs 190 Cosmetic mirror 174 Cruise control 150 Cruise control, active with

Stop & Go 143 Cruise Control, refer to Active

Cruise Control 143 Cruising range 93 Cupholder 183 Current fuel consumption 93

DDamage, tires 222 Damping control, dy‐

namic 138 Data, technical 254

Date 93 Daytime running lights 104 Defrosting, refer to Windows,

defrosting 166 Dehumidifying, air 167 Deleting personal data 24 Deletion of personal data 24 Destination distance 98 Diesel exhaust fluid, at low

temperatures 208 Diesel exhaust fluid, having

refilled 208 Diesel exhaust fluid, on mini‐

mum 208 Diesel exhaust fluid, replen‐

ishing yourself 208 Diesel particulate filter 189 Digital clock 93 Dimensions 254 Dimmable exterior mirrors 63 Dimmable interior rearview

mirror 63 Direction indicator, refer to

Turn signals 76 Display, electronic, instru‐

ment cluster 84 Display in windshield 101 Display lighting, refer to In‐

strument lighting 106 Displays 85 Displays, cleaning 251 Disposal, coolant 232 Disposal, vehicle battery 241 Distance control, refer to

PDC 152 Distance to destination 98 Divided screen view, split

screen 23 Door lock 39 Door lock, refer to Remote

control 34 Doors, Automatic Soft Clos‐

ing 40 Downhill control 137 Drive-off assistant 135

Drive-off assistant, refer toDSC 135

Driver assistance, refer to In‐telligent Safety 116

Driving Assistant, refer to In‐telligent Safety 116

Driving Dynamics Con‐trol 139

Driving instructions, break-in 188

Driving mode 139 Driving notes, general 188 Driving stability control sys‐

tems 135 Driving tips 188 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐

trol 135 DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐

trol 136 Dynamic Damping Con‐

trol 138 Dynamic Drive 138 Dynamic Stability Control

DSC 135 Dynamic Traction Control

DTC 136

EECO PRO 196 ECO PRO, bonus range 197 ECO PRO display 196 ECO PRO displays 86 ECO PRO driving mode 196 ECO PRO mode 196 ECO PRO Tip - driving in‐

struction 198 EfficientDynamics 198 Electronic displays, instru‐

ment cluster 84 Electronic oil measure‐

ment 228 Electronic Stability Program

ESP, refer to DSC 135 Emergency detection, remote

control 35

Seite 260

Reference Everything from A to Z

260Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 265: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Emergency release, fuel fillerflap 204

Emergency Request 242 Emergency service, refer to

Roadside Assistance 243 Emergency start function, en‐

gine start 35 Emergency unlocking, trans‐

mission lock 82 Emergency unlocking, trunk

lid 42 Energy Control 93 Energy recovery 94 Engine, automatic reel-off 71 Engine, automatic Start/Stop

function 71 Engine compartment 226 Engine compartment, work‐

ing in 226 Engine coolant 231 Engine idling when driving,

coasting 199 Engine oil 228 Engine oil, adding 229 Engine oil additives 229 Engine oil change 230 Engine oil filler neck 229 Engine oil temperature 92 Engine oil types, alterna‐

tive 230 Engine oil types, ap‐

proved 230 Engine start during malfunc‐

tion 35 Engine start, jump-start‐

ing 243 Engine start, refer to Starting

the engine 70 Engine stop 71 Engine temperature 92 Entering a car wash 248 Equipment, interior 172 Error displays, see Check

Control 88 ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐

gram, refer to DSC 135

Exchanging wheels/tires 223 Exhaust system 189 Exterior mirror, automatic

dimming feature 63 Exterior mirrors 62 External start 243 External temperature dis‐

play 93 External temperature warn‐

ing 93 Eyes for securing cargo 193

FFailure message, see Check

Control 88 False alarm, refer to Uninten‐

tional alarm 48 Fan, refer to Air flow 166 Filler neck for engine oil 229 Fine wood, care 250 First aid kit 243 Fitting for towing, see tow fit‐

ting 246 Flat tire, changing

wheels 240 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 115 Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐

tor TPM 111 Flat tire, warning

lamp 112, 115 Flooding 190 Floor carpet, care 251 Floor mats, care 251 Fold down the rear seat back‐

rest, see Though-loadingsystem 177

Fold-out position, wiper 78 Foot brake 190 Front airbags 108 Front-end collision warning

with braking function 120 Front-end collision warning

with City Braking func‐tion 117

Front fog lights 106

Front fog lights, bulb replace‐ment 238

Front lights 236 front-seat passenger airbags,

automatic deactivation 110 Front-seat passenger airbags,

indicator lamp 110 FTM Flat Tire Monitor 115 Fuel 206 Fuel consumption, current 93 Fuel consumption, refer to

Average fuel consump‐tion 98

Fuel filler flap 204 Fuel gauge 92 Fuel lid 204 Fuel quality 206 Fuel recommendation 206 Fuel, tank capacity 257 Fuse 241

GGarage door opener, refer to

Universal Integrated RemoteControl 172

Gasoline 206 Gear change, Steptronic

transmission 80 Gear shift indicator 95 General driving notes 188 Glare shield 174 Glass sunroof, powered 50 Glove compartment 181 Gross vehicle weight, ap‐

proved 255

HHandbrake, refer to Parking

brake 73 Hand-held transmitter, alter‐

nating code 173 Hazard warning flashers 242 HDC Hill Descent Con‐

trol 137

Seite 261

Everything from A to Z Reference

261Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 266: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Head airbags 108 Headlight control, auto‐

matic 104 Headlight courtesy delay fea‐

ture 103 Headlight courtesy delay fea‐

ture via remote control 38 Headlight flasher 76 Headlight glass 236 Headlights 236 Headlights, care 249 Headlight washer system 77 Head restraints 53 Head restraints, front 58 Head restraints, rear 60 Head-up Display 101 Head-up Display, care 251 Heavy cargo, stowing 193 Height, vehicle 254 High-beam Assistant 105 High beams 76 High beams/low beams, refer

to High-beam Assistant 105 Hill Descent Control

HDC 137 Hills 190 Hill start assistant, refer to

Drive-off assistant 135 Hints 6 Holder for beverages 183 Hood 226 Horn 14 Hotel function, trunk lid 42 Hot exhaust system 189 HUD Head-up Display 101 Hydroplaning 189

IIce warning, see External

temperature warning 93 Icy roads, see External tem‐

perature warning 93 Identification marks, tires 220

Identification number, see ve‐hicle identification num‐ber 9

iDrive 18 Ignition key, refer to Remote

control 34 Ignition off 69 Ignition on 69 Indication of a flat

tire 112, 115 Indicator and alarm lamps,

see Check Control 88 Indicator lamp, see Check

Control 88 Individual air distribution 166 Individual settings, refer to

Personal Profile 35 Inflation pressure, tires 211 Inflation pressure warning

FTM, tires 115 Info display, refer to Com‐

puter 97 Initialization, Integral Active

Steering 139 Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐

tor TPM 112 Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor

FTM 115 Instrument cluster 84 Instrument cluster, electronic

displays 84 Instrument display, multifunc‐

tional 85 Instrument lighting 106 Integral Active Steering 139 Integrated key 34 Integrated Owner's Manual in

the vehicle 29 Intelligent Emergency Re‐

quest 242 Intelligent Safety 116 Intensity, AUTO pro‐

gram 166 Interior equipment 172 Interior lights 106

Interior lights via remote con‐trol 38

Interior motion sensor 48 Interior rearview mirror, auto‐

matic dimming feature 63 Interior rearview mirror, man‐

ually dimmable 63 Interval display, service re‐

quirements 94

JJacking points for the vehicle

jack 240 Joystick, Steptronic transmis‐

sion 80 Jump-starting 243

KKey/remote control 34 Keyless Go, refer to Comfort

Access 42 Key Memory, refer to Per‐

sonal Profile 35 Kickdown, Steptronic trans‐

mission 80 Knee airbag 108

LLamp replacement 235 Lamp replacement, front 236 Lamp replacement, rear 238 Lane departure warning 129 Lane margin, warning 129 Language on Control Dis‐

play 100 Lashing eyes, securing

cargo 193 LATCH child restraint sys‐

tem 66 Launch Control 82 Leather, care 250 LED front fog lights, bulb re‐

placement 238

Seite 262

Reference Everything from A to Z

262Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 267: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

LED headlights, Bulb replace‐ment 238

LED light 238 LEDs, light-emitting di‐

odes 236 Length, vehicle 254 Letters and numbers, enter‐

ing 24 License plate lamp, bulb re‐

placement 238 Light alloy wheels, care 250 Light control 104 Light-emitting diodes,

LEDs 236 Lighter, front 174, 175 Lighter, rear 175 Lighting 103 Lighting, speaker 107 Lighting via remote con‐

trol 38 Light reel 103 Lights 103 Lights and bulbs 235 Load 193 Loading 192 Lock, door 39 Locking/unlocking via door

lock 39 Locking/unlocking with re‐

mote control 37 Locking, automatic 46 Locking, settings 46 Locking via trunk lid 40 Lock, power window 49 Locks, doors, and win‐

dows 68 Low beams 103 Low beams, automatic, refer

to High-beam Assistant 105 Lower back support 55 Low-Sulfur Diesel 207 Luggage rack, see Roof-

mounted luggage rack 193 Lumbar support 55

MMaintenance 233 Maintenance require‐

ments 233 Maintenance, service require‐

ments 94 Maintenance system,

BMW 233 Make-up mirror 174 Malfunction displays, see

Check Control 88 Manual air distribution 166 Manual air flow 166 Manual brake, refer to Parking

brake 73 Manual mode, Steptronic

transmission 81 Manual operation, door

lock 39 Manual operation, exterior

mirrors 62 Manual operation, fuel filler

flap 204 Manual operation, Park Dis‐

tance Control PDC 153 Manual operation, rearview

camera 155 Manual operation, Side

View 158 Manual operation, Top

View 159 Manual transmission 79 Marking on approved

tires 223 Marking, run-flat tires 224 Massage seat, front 56 Master key, refer to Remote

control 34 Maximum cooling 167 Maximum speed, display 95 Maximum speed, winter

tires 224 Measure, units of 100 Medical kit 243

Memory for seat, mirrors,steering wheel 61

Menu, EfficientDynamics 198 Menu in instrument clus‐

ter 96 Menus, operating, iDrive 18 Menus, refer to iDrive operat‐

ing concept 19 Messages, see Check Con‐

trol 88 Microfilter 168 Minimum tread, tires 222 Mirror 62 Mirror memory 61 Mobile communication devi‐

ces in the vehicle 189 Modifications, technical, refer

to Safety 7 Moisture in headlight 236 Monitor, refer to Control Dis‐

play 18 Mounting of child restraint

systems 65 Multifunctional instrument

display 85 Multifunction steering wheel,

buttons 14

NNavigation, see user's manual

for Navigation, Entertain‐ment and Communication

Neck restraints, front, refer toHead restraints 58

Neck restraints, rear, refer toHead restraints 60

Neutral cleaner, see wheelcleaner 250

New wheels and tires 223 Night Vision 125 Night Vision device, see Night

Vision 125 Nylon rope for tow-starting/

towing 246

Seite 263

Everything from A to Z Reference

263Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 268: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

OOBD Onboard Diagnosis 233 OBD, see OBD Onboard Di‐

agnosis 233 Object detection, see Night

Vision 125 Obstacle marking, rearview

camera 156 Octane rating, refer to Rec‐

ommended fuel grade 206 Odometer 92 Office, see user's manual for

Navigation, Entertainmentand Communication

Oil 228 Oil, adding 229 Oil additives 229 Oil change 230 Oil change interval, service

requirements 94 Oil filler neck 229 Oil types, alternative 230 Oil types, approved 230 Old batteries, disposal 241 Onboard monitor, refer to

Control Display 18 Onboard vehicle tool kit 235 Opening/closing via door

lock 39 Opening and closing 34 Opening and closing, without

remote control 39 Opening and closing, with re‐

mote control 37 Opening the trunk lid with no-

touch activation 44 Operating concept, iDrive 18 Optional equipment, standard

equipment 6 Outside air, refer to Auto‐

matic recirculated-air con‐trol 167

Overheating of engine, referto Coolant temperature 92

PPaint, vehicle 249 Parallel parking assistant 160 Park Distance Control

PDC 152 Parked-car ventilation 171 Parked vehicle, condensa‐

tion 191 Parking aid, refer to PDC 152 Parking assistant 160 Parking brake 73 Parking lights 103 Parking with Automatic

Hold 74 Particulate filter 189 Passenger side mirror, tilting

downward 62 Pathway lines, rearview cam‐

era 156 PDC Park Distance Con‐

trol 152 Pedestrian detection, see

Night Vision 125 Pedestrian warning with city

braking function 123 Personal Profile 35 Personal Profile, exporting

profiles 36 Pinch protection system,

glass sunroof 51 Pinch protection system, win‐

dows 49 Plastic, care 250 Power failure 240 Power sunroof, glass 50 Power windows 48 Pressure, tire air pres‐

sure 211 Pressure warning FTM,

tires 115 Profile, refer to Personal Pro‐

file 35 Programmable memory but‐

tons, iDrive 23

Protective function, glasssunroof 51

Protective function, win‐dows 49

Push-and-turn reel, refer toController 18

RRadiator fluid 231 Radio-operated key, refer to

Remote control 34 Radio ready state 70 Radio, see user's manual for

Navigation, Entertainmentand Communication

Rain sensor 77 Rear automatic climate con‐

trol 169 Rear axle steering 139 Rear lights 238 Rear socket 177 Rearview camera 154 Rearview mirror 62 Rear window defroster 167 Recirculated-air mode 167 Recommended fuel

grade 206 Recommended tire

brands 223 Refueling 204 Remaining range 93 Remote control/key 34 Remote control, malfunc‐

tion 38 Remote control, univer‐

sal 172 Replacement fuse 241 Replacing parts 235 Replacing wheels/tires 223 Reporting safety defects 9 RES button 146 RES button, see Active

Cruise Control, ACC 143 RES button, see Cruise con‐

trol 150

Seite 264

Reference Everything from A to Z

264Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 269: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Reserve warning, refer toRange 93

Reset, Tire Pressure MonitorTPM 112

Residual heat, automatic cli‐mate control 168

Retaining straps, securingcargo 193

Retreaded tires 223 Reversing lamp, bulb replace‐

ment 239 Roadside parking lights 104 Roller sunblinds 49 Roll stabilization, refer to

Adaptive Drive 138 Roll stabilization, refer to Dy‐

namic Drive 138 RON recommended fuel

grade 206 Roofliner 17 Roof load capacity 255 Roof-mounted luggage

rack 193 Rope for tow-starting/

towing 246 RSC Run Flat System Com‐

ponent, refer to Run-flattires 224

Rubber components,care 250

Run-flat tires 224

SSafe braking 190 Safety 7 Safety belt reminder for driv‐

er's seat and front passen‐ger seat 58

Safety belts 57 Safety belts, care 251 Safety Package, refer to Ac‐

tive Protection 132 Safety reel, windows 49 Safety systems, airbags 108 Saving fuel 195

Screen, refer to Control Dis‐play 18

Screwdriver, see Onboard ve‐hicle tool kit 235

Screw thread, see screwthread for tow fitting, screwthread for tow fitting 247

Seat belts, refer to Safetybelts 57

Seat heating, front 56 Seat heating, rear 56 Seating position for chil‐

dren 65 Seat, mirror, and steering

wheel memory 61 Seats 53 Seat ventilation, front 57 Selection list in instrument

cluster 96 Selector lever, Steptronic

transmission 80 Sensors, care 251 Service and warranty 8 Service requirements, Condi‐

tion Based ServiceCBS 233

Service requirements, dis‐play 94

Service, Roadside Assis‐tance 243

Services, ConnectedDrive SET button, see Active

Cruise Control, ACC 143 SET button, see Cruise con‐

trol 150 Settings, locking/unlock‐

ing 46 Settings on Control Dis‐

play 99 Settings, storing for seat, mir‐

rors, steering wheel 61 Shift Lights 87 Shift paddles on steering

wheel 81 Shoulder support 56 Side airbags 108

Side View 157 Signaling, horn 14 Signals when unlocking 46 Sitting safely 53 Size 254 Ski bag 179 Slide/tilt glass roof 50 Smallest turning radius 254 Smoker's package 174 Snow chains 224 Socket 176 Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐

nostics 233 Soot particulate filter 189 SOS button 242 Spare fuse 241 Speaker lighting 107 Specified engine oil

types 230 Speed, average 98 Speed limit detection, com‐

puter 98 Speed limiter, display 95 Speed Limit Information 95 Speed warning 99 Split screen 23 SPORT+ - program, Dynamic

Driving Control 140 Sport displays, torque dis‐

play, performance dis‐play 99

SPORT program, driving dy‐namics 140

Sport program, transmis‐sion 81

Stability control systems 135 Start/stop, automatic func‐

tion 71 Start/Stop button 69 Start function during malfunc‐

tion 35 Starting the engine 70 Status control display,

tires 112 Status information, iDrive 22 Status of Owner's Manual 6

Seite 265

Everything from A to Z Reference

265Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 270: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Steering, Integral ActiveSteering 139

Steering wheel, adjusting 63 Steering wheel heating 64 Steering wheel memory 61 Steptronic Sport transmis‐

sion 81 Steptronic transmission 79 Stopping the engine 71 Storage compartment, re‐

mote control 184 Storage compartments 181 Storage compartments, loca‐

tions 181 Storage, tires 224 Storing the vehicle 251 Summer tires, tread 222 Sun visor 174 Supplementary text mes‐

sage 91 Surround View 154 Suspension settings 139 Switch for Dynamic Driving

Control 139 Switch-on times, parked-car

ventilation 171 Switch, refer to Cockpit 14 Symbols 6 Symbols in the status field 22 SYNC program, automatic cli‐

mate control 167

TTachometer 92 Tail and brake lights 238 Tail lights 238 Tail lights, bulb replace‐

ment 238 Technical changes, refer to

Safety 7 Technical data 254 Telephone, see user's manual

for Navigation, Entertain‐ment and Communication

Temperature, automatic cli‐mate control 166

Temperature display for ex‐ternal temperature 93

Temperature, engine oil 92 Terminal, starting aid 244 Text message, supplemen‐

tary 91 Theft alarm system, refer to

Alarm system 47 Thermal camera, see Night

Vision 125 Thigh support 55 Through-loading system 177 Tilt alarm sensor 48 Time of arrival 98 Tire damage 222 Tire identification marks 220 Tire inflation pressure 211 Tire inflation pressure moni‐

tor, refer to FTM 115 Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 111 Tires, changing 223 Tires, everything on wheels

and tires 211 Tires, run-flat tires 224 Tire tread 222 Tone, see user's manual for

Navigation, Entertainmentand Communication

Tool 235 Top View 158 Total vehicle weight 255 Touchpad 21 Tow fitting 246 Towing 245 Tow lug, see tow fitting 246 Tow-starting 245 Tow truck 246 TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐

tor 111 Traction control 136 TRACTION, driving dynam‐

ics 136

Transmission lock, electronicunlocking 82

Transmission, manual trans‐mission 79

Transmission, see Steptronictransmission 79

Transporting childrensafely 65

Tread, tires 222 Trip computer 98 Triple turn signal activa‐

tion 76 Trip odometer 92 Truck for tow-starting/

towing 246 Trunk lid, automatic 41 Trunk lid closing 40 Trunk lid, closing with no-

touch activation 44 Trunk lid, emergency unlock‐

ing 42 Trunk lid, hotel function 42 Trunk lid opening 40 Trunk lid, opening with no-

touch activation 44 Trunk lid via remote con‐

trol 38 Turning circle 254 Turning circle lines, rearview

camera 156 Turn signals, operation 76 Turn signals, rear, bulb re‐

placement 238

UUnintentional alarm 48 Units of measure 100 Universal remote control 172 Unlock button, Steptronic

transmission 80 Unlocking/locking via door

lock 39 Unlocking/locking with re‐

mote control 37 Unlocking, settings 46

Seite 266

Reference Everything from A to Z

266Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 271: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

Updates made after the edito‐rial deadline 6

Upholstery care 250 USB interface 177

VVanity mirror 174 Variable steering, Integral Ac‐

tive Steering 139 Vehicle battery 240 Vehicle battery, replac‐

ing 240 Vehicle, break-in 188 Vehicle care 249 Vehicle features and op‐

tions 6 Vehicle identification num‐

ber 9 Vehicle jack 240 Vehicle paint 249 Vehicle storage 251 Vehicle wash 248 Ventilation 168 Ventilation, refer to Parked-

car ventilation 171 Venting, see ventilation 168 Vent, see ventilation 168 VIN, see vehicle identification

number 9 Voice activation system 26

WWarning and indicator lamps,

see Check Control 88 Warning displays, see Check

Control 88 Warning messages, see

Check Control 88 Warning triangle 243 Washer fluid 78 Washer fluid reservoir, ca‐

pacity 257 Washer nozzles, wind‐

shield 78

Washer system 77 Washing, vehicle 248 Water on roads 190 Weights 255 Welcome lights 103 Wheel base, vehicle 254 Wheel cleaner 250 Wheels, changing 223 Wheels, everything on wheels

and tires 211 Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor

FTM 115 Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni‐

tor TPM 111 Width, vehicle 254 Window defroster, rear 167 Windows, powered 48 Windshield, climate con‐

trol 189 Windshield washer fluid 78 Windshield washer noz‐

zles 78 Windshield washer sys‐

tem 77 Windshield wiper 77 Winter diesel 207 Winter storage, care 251 Winter tires, suitable

tires 224 Winter tires, tread 222 Wiper 77 Wiper blades, replacing 235 Wiper fluid 78 Wiper, fold-out position 78 Wiper system 77 Wood, care 250 Word match concept, naviga‐

tion 24 Wrench, see Onboard vehicle

tool kit 235

XxDrive 137 Xenon headlights, bulb re‐

placement 236

Seite 267

Everything from A to Z Reference

267Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14

Page 272: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual
Page 273: BMW 550 2014 Owners Manual

More about BMW

bmwusa.comThe Ultimate

Driving Machine

0140

2 9

56 2

18 u

e

*BL295621800D*

Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 956 218 - X/14